nt300d PDF

NT300D
Operation Manual
Part Number: 81705-00

Revision: B
Date: March 1999
Trimble Navigation Limited

645 North Mary Avenue
Post Office Box 3642
Sunnyvale, CA 94088-3642
U.S.A.
+1-800-827-8000 in North America

+1-408-481-8000 International
FAX: +1-408-481-7744
www.trimble.com
Trimble Navigation Europe Limited
Trimble House, Meridian Office Park
Osborn Way, Hook
Hampshire RG27 9HX
ENGLAND
+44-1256-760-150
FAX: +44-1256-760-148
Trimble Navigation Singapore PTE Limited

300 Beach Road
#34-05, The Concourse
Singapore 199555
SINGAPORE
+65-296-2700
FAX: +65-296-8033
Trimble Japan K.K.

Sumitomo Hamamatsu-cho, Building 10F
1-18-16 Hamamatsu-cho Minato-ku
Tokyo 105
JAPAN
+81-3-5472-0880
FAX: +81-3-5472-2326
Trimble Navigation New Zealand Limited

11 Birmingham Drive
P.O. Box 8729 Riccarton
Christchurch
NEW ZEALAND
+64-3-339-1400
FAX: +64-3-339-1417
Copyrights
© 1999 Trimble Navigation Limited. All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be
copied, photocopied, reproduced, translated, or reduced to any electronic medium or machine-
readable form without prior written consent from Trimble Navigation Limited.
Printed in the United States of America. Printed on recycled paper.
Revision Notice
This is the second release of the NT300D Operation Manual, Part Number 81705-00,
Revision B, March 1999.
Trademarks
NT300D is a trademark of Trimble Navigation Limited. All other brand names are trademarks
of their respective holders.
Disclaimer of Warranty
EXCEPT AS INDICATED IN “LIMITED WARRANTY” HEREIN, TRIMBLE HARDWARE,
SOFTWARE, FIRMWARE AND DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND WITHOUT
EXPRESS OR LIMITED WARRANTY OF ANY KIND BY EITHER TRIMBLE OR ANYONE WHO
HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN ITS CREATION, PRODUCTION, OR DISTRIBUTION INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK, AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE TRIMBLE HARDWARE, SOFTWARE, FIRMWARE AND
DOCUMENTATION, IS WITH YOU. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
Limitation of Liability
IN NO EVENT WILL TRIMBLE OR ANY PERSON INVOLVED IN THE CREATION,
PRODUCTION, OR DISTRIBUTION OF THE TRIMBLE PRODUCT BE LIABLE TO YOU ON
ACCOUNT OF ANY CLAIM FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST
SAVINGS, OR OTHER SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR EXEMPLARY
DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY DAMAGES ASSESSED AGAINST OR
PAID BY YOU TO ANY THIRD PARTY, RISING OUT OF THE USE, LIABILITY TO USE,
QUALITY OR PERFORMANCE OF SUCH TRIMBLE PRODUCT INCLUDING HARDWARE,
SOFTWARE, FIRMWARE, AND DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF TRIMBLE OR ANY SUCH
PERSON OR ENTITY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF DAMAGES, OR FOR ANY
CLAIM BY ANY OTHER PARTY. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE LIMITATION OR
EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO, THE
ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
Software and Firmware Limited Warranty
Trimble warrants that Software and Firmware products will substantially conform to the
published specifications provided it is used with the Trimble products, computer products, and
operating system for which it was designed. For a period of ninety (90) days, commencing
thirty (30) days after shipment from Trimble, Trimble also warrants that the magnetic media on
which Software and Firmware are distributed and the documentation are free from defects in
materials and workmanship. During the ninety (90) day warranty period, Trimble will replace
defective media or documentation, or correct substantial program errors at no charge. If
Trimble is unable to replace defective media or documentation, or correct program errors,
Trimble will refund the price paid for The Software. These are your sole remedies for any
breach in warranty.
Hardware Limited Warranty

Trimble Navigation Limited products are warranted against defects in material and
workmanship for a period of one year. The warranty period shall commence thirty (30) days
after shipment from Trimble’s factory. Warranty service will be provided at a designated
Trimble Service Center. Trimble will at its option either repair or replace products that prove to
be defective. The Customer shall pay all shipping charges for products returned to Trimble for
warranty service. Trimble shall pay all shipping charges for the return of products to the
Customer. This warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from:
1. Improper or inadequate maintenance by the buyer
2. Buyer-supplied software or interfacing
3. Unauthorized modification or misuse
4. Operation outside of the environmental specifications of the product
5. Improper installation, where applicable
6. Lightning or other electrical discharge
7. Fresh or salt water immersion or spray
8. Normal wear and tear on consumable parts (for example, batteries)
No other warranty is expressed or implied. Trimble Navigation Limited specifically disclaims
the implied warranties of fitness for a particular purpose and merchantability.
Table of Contents
Preface
Scope and Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxvi
Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxvi
Related Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxviii
Update Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxviii
World Wide Web (WWW) Site . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxviii
File Transfer Protocol (FTP) Site . . . . . . . . . . . .xxviii
Technical Assistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxviii
Reader Comment Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxix
Document Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxix
Notes, Cautions, and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xxx
1 Overview
1.1 Standard Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
1.2 Optional Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
1.3 Differential GPS Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5
1.3.1 Sources of DGPS Error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6
1.3.2 Critical Factors Affecting DGPS Accuracy . . . . . . .1-7
1.4 Dead Reckoning (DR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
1.5 Beacon Signal Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
1.5.1 Beacon Pre-filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
1.5.2 Beacon Automatic Gain Control . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
1.5.3 Beacon Analog-to-Digital Conversion . . . . . . . . .1-14
NT300D Operation Manual v

Table of Contents
1.5.4 Beacon Digital Signal Processing. . . . . . . . . . . .1-14

1.5.5 Beacon Database Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
1.5.6 Beacon I/O Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14
1.6 Combined Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-15
2 Installation
2.1 NT300D Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
2.1.1 Combined GPS/Beacon Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
2.1.2 Antenna Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
2.1.3 Control/Display Unit (CDU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
2.1.4 Installation Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
2.2 Installation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
2.3 Installing the CDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
2.3.1 Gimbal Mount Installation (Standard Kit) . . . . . . . .2-8
2.3.2 Panel Mount Installation (Optional Kit Available) . . . .2-10
2.4 Mounting the Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
2.4.1 Sources of Electrical Interference. . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
2.4.2 Pole Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
2.4.3 Direct Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
2.5 Routing and Connecting the Antenna Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
2.5.1 Choosing an Antenna Cable Route . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
2.5.2 Securing the Antenna Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
2.5.3 Antenna Connector Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
2.6 Connecting the Interface Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23
2.6.1 Receiver I/O Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
2.6.2 Installing Connectors on the Interface Cable. . . . . . .2-26
2.7 Contact Closure Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
2.7.1 Speed Log Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
2.7.2 External Alarm Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31
2.8 Connecting a Power Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
vi NT300D Operation Manual

Table of Contents
2.8.1 Connecting the Ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34

2.8.2 Installing a Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34
2.8.3 Power Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
2.8.4 Power Interruptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35
2.9 Installing the Smart Card Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
2.9.1 Choosing a Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-36
2.9.2 Routing and Connecting the SCR Cable . . . . . . . .2-36
2.9.3 Installation Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37
2.10 Installing the Remote Station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40
2.10.1 Choosing a Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40
2.10.2 Routing the Remote Station Cable . . . . . . . . . . .2-40
2.10.3 Installing the Remote Station CDU . . . . . . . . . . .2-40
2.10.4 Connecting the NT300D to the Remote Station . . . . .2-41
3 Getting Started
3.1 Working with the Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
3.1.1 Power Key (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
3.1.2 Display (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
3.1.3 Brightness and Contrast (3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
3.1.4 Numeric Keypad (4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
3.1.5 Cursor Controls (5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
3.1.6 Function Keys (6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
3.1.7 Softkeys (7) and MENU Key (8) . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
3.1.8 PLOT Key (9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
3.2 Working with Screens and Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
3.2.1 Title Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
3.2.2 Mode Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
3.2.3 Presentation Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
3.2.4 Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
3.3 Entering Data in Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
NT300D Operation Manual vii

Table of Contents
3.3.1 Editing Alphanumeric Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11

3.4 Working with Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
3.4.1 Confirmation Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
3.4.2 Status Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
3.4.3 Warning Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
3.4.4 Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
4 Configuration
4.1 Working with the SETUP Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-1
4.1.1 Changing Setup Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2
4.1.2 Resetting the NT300D to Factory Default Values . . . .4-2
4.1.3 Display Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2
4.2 Configuring I/O Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
4.3 Configuring GPS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
4.4 Configuring the Internal Beacon Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
4.5 Datum Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
4.6 Choosing a Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
4.7 Navigation and Status Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
4.8 Waypoint and Route Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
4.9 Dead Reckoning (DR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
4.10 Setting Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
4.11 Using the Track Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
4.12 Using a SCR (Smart Card Reader) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
4.13 Remote Station Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
5 Navigation Screens
5.1 Navigation Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
5.2 PLOT Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
5.2.1 Scaling the Mercator Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
5.2.2 Panning the Mercator Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4
viii NT300D Operation Manual

Table of Contents
5.2.3 PLOT Screen Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5

5.2.4 Displaying PLOT Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6
5.3 NAV Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8
5.3.1 NAV1 Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8
5.3.2 NAV2 Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
5.4 USER Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
5.5 SAVE Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
5.5.1 Creating an Emergency Destination Waypoint. . . . . .5-15
5.5.2 Cancelling an Emergency Destination Waypoint . . . . .5-16
6 Waypoints
6.1 WAYPOINT Screen Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
6.2 The Waypoint Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
6.2.1 Query Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
6.2.2 WAYPOINT Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
6.2.3 Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7
6.3 Creating Waypoint Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9
6.4 Editing Waypoint Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10
6.5 Saving and Retrieving Waypoints to/from a PC Card . . . . . . . .6-11
6.5.1 Saving a Waypoint and Route Library to a Card . . . . .6-12
6.5.2 Retrieving a Waypoint and Route Library . . . . . . . .6-12
7 Routes
7.1 ROUTE Screen Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
7.2 The Route Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
7.3 Creating Routes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6
7.3.1 Manual Entry of Waypoints and Legs . . . . . . . . . .7-7
7.3.2 Assigning Route Record Names . . . . . . . . . . . .7-8
7.3.3 Selecting Route Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-9
7.3.4 Creating Routes Using Range and Bearing . . . . . . .7-10
NT300D Operation Manual ix

Table of Contents
7.4 Editing Route Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-11

7.5 Erasing Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12
7.6 Advancing Legs in a Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13
7.7 Saving/Retrieving Routes to/from a PC Card . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14
7.8 Search and Rescue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14
8 Status
8.1 STATUS Screen Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
8.2 STATUS Screens Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
8.3 STATUS Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4
8.4 STATUS/GPS Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
8.4.1 STATUS/GPS/INFO Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
8.5 STATUS/DGPS Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
8.5.1 STATUS/DGPS/CORRECTIONS Screen . . . . . . . .8-12
8.5.2 STATUS/DGPS/RTCM MESSAGE Screen . . . . . . .8-14
8.5.3 STATUS/DGPS/REF STATION Screen . . . . . . . . .8-15
8.5.4 STATUS/DGPS/ALMANAC Screen . . . . . . . . . .8-16
8.6 STATUS/DR Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18
8.7 STATUS/NAV Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
8.8 STATUS/BEACON RECEIVER Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
8.9 STATUS/GRAPH Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
8.9.1 STATUS/GRAPH/EXECUTE Screen . . . . . . . . . .8-25
8.10 STATUS/SCR Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27
9 Setup
9.1 SETUP Screen Hierarchy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
9.1.1 Protected SETUP Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3
9.1.2 Changing Factory Default Values . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3
9.2 SETUP Screen Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4
9.3 SETUP Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6
x NT300D Operation Manual

Table of Contents
9.4 SETUP/GPS Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8

9.4.1 SETUP/GPS/DATUM Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13
9.4.2 SETUP/GPS/DATUM/USER DATUM Screen . . . . .9-15
9.5 SETUP/NAV Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
9.5.1 SETUP/NAV/COORDS Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21
9.6 SETUP/DR Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23
9.7 SETUP/ALARM Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
9.7.1 SETUP/ALARM 1 Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
9.8 SETUP/BEACON RECEIVER Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32
9.8.1 SETUP/BEACON RECEIVER/FFT Screen . . . . . . .9-35
9.9 SETUP/SCR Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38
9.9.1 SETUP/SCR/FORMAT Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40
9.9.2 SETUP/SCR/DIR Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41
9.10 SETUP/USER Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42
9.10.1 SETUP/USER/USER 1, 2, 3 Screens . . . . . . . . . .9-43
9.11 SETUP/TRACK Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-45
9.11.1 SETUP/TRACK/CONFIG Screen . . . . . . . . . . .9-50
9.11.2 SETUP/TRACK/RESET Screen . . . . . . . . . . . .9-52
9.12 SETUP/LANGUAGES Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-53
9.13 SETUP/ I/O Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54
9.13.1 SETUP/I/O /I/O TEST Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-58
9.13.2 SETUP/ I/O /NMEA SENTENCES Screen . . . . . . .9-59
9.13.3 SETUP/ I/O /NMEA CONTROL Screen . . . . . . . .9-61
9.13.4 SETUP/ I/O CONTROL/DATUM Screen . . . . . . . .9-63
9.13.5 SETUP/ I/O /CONTROL/DATUM/USER DATUM
Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-65
9.13.6 SETUP/ I/O /CC OUTPUT Screen . . . . . . . . . . .9-68
9.14 SETUP/ UTIL Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-70
NT300D Operation Manual xi

Table of Contents
10 Operating the SCR

10.1 Opening the SCR Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
10.2 Closing the SCR Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
10.3 Inserting and Removing Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
10.4 Memory Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-5
10.4.1 Standard PC Cards from Various Manufacturers . . . . .10-6
10.5 Configuring the SCR and Formatting PC Cards . . . . . . . . . . .10-6
10.6 Monitoring the Status of the SCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6
10.7 Saving/Retrieving Waypoints and Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6
10.8 Recording and Displaying Track Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
10.9 Caring for the SCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7
10.9.1 Caring for the Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8
11 Operating the Remote Station
A Technical Specifications
B NMEA-0183 Sentences
B.1 NMEA-0183 Sentence Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1
B.1.1 Symbols and Delimiters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-3
B.1.2 Checksum Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-4
B.1.3 Field Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-4
B.1.4 Custom NMEA Sentences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-7
B.2 NMEA Sentence Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-9
B.3 Standard NMEA Input Sentences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-12
B.4 Standard NMEA Output Sentences. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-16
B.5 Custom NMEA Configuration Sentences . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-45
B.6 Custom NMEA Sentences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-53
xii NT300D Operation Manual

Table of Contents
C DGPS Radiobeacons
Glossary
Index
NT300D Operation Manual xiii

Table of Contents
xiv NT300D Operation Manual

List of Figures
Figure 1-1 NT300D Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
Figure 2-1 NT300D System Interconnect Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
Figure 2-2 Combined GPS/Beacon Antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3
Figure 2-3 NT300D Antenna Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Figure 2-4 Control/Display Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Figure 2-5 Gimbal Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8
Figure 2-6 Mounting the CDU to the Gimbal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Figure 2-7 Panel Mount Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Figure 2-8 Optional Panel Mount Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Figure 2-9 Pole Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Figure 2-10 Direct Mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Figure 2-11 Cable Preparation Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Figure 2-12 Cable End with Wire Braid Folded Back. . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
Figure 2-13 Placing the Connector Onto the Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Figure 2-14 Sliding the Connector Out of the Cassette . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Figure 2-15 Attaching the Cable to the Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
Figure 2-16 NT300D CDU Back Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23
Figure 2-17 Connecting the NT300D to Other Compatible Devices
(RS-422 Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24
Figure 2-18 Interface Cable Stripping Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27
Figure 2-19 Serial Port Connector Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Figure 2-20 Serial Port 1 Contact-Closure Connections . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
Figure 2-21 Correct Power Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32
Figure 2-22 Ground Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34
NT300D Operation Manual xv

List of Figures
Figure 2-23 Smart Card Reader Basic Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37

Figure 2-24 Smart Card Reader Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38
Figure 2-25 SCR Flush Mounting Option (P/N 80976-00) . . . . . . . . . .2-39
Figure 2-26 NT300D to Remote Station Connections . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41
Figure 3-1 NT300D Front Panel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
Figure 3-2 Screen Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
Figure 3-3 Sample Confirmation Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
Figure 3-4 Sample Status Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
Figure 3-5 Sample Warning Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
Figure 3-6 Sample Error Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
Figure 5-1 PLOT Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Figure 5-2 PLOT Screen Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5
Figure 5-3 NAV1 Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8
Figure 5-4 NAV2 Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Figure 5-5 USER1 Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Figure 5-6 SAVE Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Figure 6-1 WAYPOINT Screen Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
Figure 6-2 WAYPOINT Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3
Figure 7-1 ROUTE Screen Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
Figure 7-2 ROUTE Screen – The Route Library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
Figure 7-3 ROUTE Screen – Creating Routes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6
Figure 7-4 ROUTE/EDIT Screen, Manual Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7
Figure 7-5 PLOT Screen – Search and Rescue. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14
Figure 7-6 ROUTE/SEARCH & RESCUE Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15
Figure 7-7 Search & Rescue Lane Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17
Figure 8-1 STATUS Screen Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2
Figure 8-2 STATUS Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4
Figure 8-3 STATUS/GPS Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6
Figure 8-4 STATUS/GPS/INFO Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
Figure 8-5 STATUS/DGPS Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
xvi NT300D Operation Manual

List of Figures
Figure 8-6 STATUS/DGPS/CORRECTIONS Screen . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12

Figure 8-7 STATUS/DGPS/ RTCM MESSAGE Screen . . . . . . . . . . .8-14
Figure 8-8 STATUS/DGPS/REF STATION Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15
Figure 8-9 STATUS/DGPS/ALMANAC Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16
Figure 8-10 STATUS/DR Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18
Figure 8-11 STATUS/NAV Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
Figure 8-12 STATUS/BEACON RECEIVER Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
Figure 8-13 STATUS/GRAPH Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
Figure 8-14 SOG (Speed Over Ground) Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25
Figure 8-15 STATUS/GRAPH/EXECUTE Screen Cursor . . . . . . . . . .8-26
Figure 8-16 STATUS/SCR Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27
Figure 9-1 SETUP Screen Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2
Figure 9-2 SETUP Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6
Figure 9-3 SETUP/GPS Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8
Figure 9-4 SETUP/GPS/DATUM Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-14
Figure 9-5 Extended Listing of Datums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-14
Figure 9-6 Three-Parameter Datum Transformation . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15
Figure 9-7 Seven-Parameter Datum Transformation. . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15
Figure 9-8 SETUP/NAV Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
Figure 9-9 SETUP/NAV/COORDS Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21
Figure 9-10 SETUP/DR Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23
Figure 9-11 SETUP/ALARM 1 Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Figure 9-14 SETUP/BEACON RECEIVER Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32
Figure 9-15 SETUP/BEACON RECEIVER/FFT Screen . . . . . . . . . . .9-35
Figure 9-16 Narrowband FFT Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37
Figure 9-17 Narrowband FFT Plot with Squaring On. . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37
Figure 9-18 SETUP/SCR Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38
Figure 9-19 SEUP/SCR/FORMAT Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40
NT300D Operation Manual xvii

List of Figures
Figure 9-20 SETUP/SCR/DIR Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41

Figure 9-21 SETUP/USER Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42
Figure 9-22 SETUP/USER/USER 1 Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43
Figure 9-23 SETUP/TRACK Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-47
Figure 9-24 SETUP/TRACK/DISP Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-49
Figure 9-25 SETUP/TRACK/CONFIG Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-51
Figure 9-26 SETUP/TRACK/CONFIG/EDIT Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . .9-51
Figure 9-27 SETUP/LANGUAGES Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-53
Figure 9-28 SETUP I/O Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54
Figure 9-29 SETUP/I/O /I/O TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-58
Figure 9-30 SETUP/ I/O /NMEA SENTENCE 1 (Port 2) Screen . . . . . .9-59
Figure 9-31 SETUP/ I/O /NMEA CONTROL 2 (Port 2) . . . . . . . . . . .9-61
Figure 9-32 SETUP/ I/O CTRL 1/DATUM screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-64
Figure 9-33 Extended Listing of Datums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-64
Figure 9-34 Three-Parameter Datum Transformation . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-65
Figure 9-35 Seven-Parameter Datum Transformation. . . . . . . . . . . . .9-65
Figure 9-36 SETUP/ I/O /CC OUTPUT Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-68
Figure 9-37 SETUP/UTIL Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-70
Figure 10-1 Opening the Smart Card Reader’s Door . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Figure 10-2 Smart Card Reader Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Figure B-1 Sample ZDA Sentence Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1
Figure B-2 Custom NMEA Sentence Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-7
xviii NT300D Operation Manual

List of Tables
Table 2-1 Serial Connections to External Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Table 2-2 NT300D Serial Port Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26
Table 2-3 Serial Port Pin-out Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28
Table 2-4 Remote Station Pin-out Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42
Table 3-1 Function Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Table 3-2 Mode Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
Table 3-3 Field Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Table 3-4 Alphabetical Character Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11
Table 5-1 Navigation Screen Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2
Table 5-2 PLOT Menu Softkey Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6
Table 5-3 Layer Softkey Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7
Table 5-4 Optional NAV1 Data Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Table 5-5 Save Softkey Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Table 6-1 WAYPOINT Query Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-4
Table 6-2 WAYPOINT Record Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5
Table 6-3 WAYPOINT Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-6
Table 6-4 WAYPOINT Screen Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7
Table 7-1 ROUTE Record Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4
Table 7-2 ROUTE Screen Softkey Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5
Table 7-3 Route Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-9
Table 7-4 ROUTE/EDIT Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-11
Table 8-1 STATUS Screens Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
Table 8-2 STATUS Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4
NT300D Operation Manual xix

List of Tables
Table 8-3 Message on bottom lines of STATUS screen . . . . . . . . . 8-5

Table 8-4 STATUS/GPS/INFO Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Table 8-5 STATUS/DGPS Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Table 8-6 STATUS/DGPS/CORRECTIONS Fields . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Table 8-7 STATUS/DGPS/ALMANAC Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Table 8-8 STATUS/DR Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
Table 8-9 STATUS/NAV Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Table 8-10 STATUS/BEACON RECEIVER Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Table 8-11 STATUS/GRAPH/EXECUTE Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Table 8-12 STATUS/SCR Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Table 9-1 SETUP Screen Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Table 9-2 SETUP Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Table 9-3 SETUP/GPS Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Table 9-4 Three-Parameter Datum Transformation Fields . . . . . . . . 9-16
Table 9-5 Seven-Parameter Datum Transformation Fields . . . . . . . . 9-17
Table 9-6 SETUP/NAV Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Table 9-7 SETUP/NAV/COORDS Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Table 9-8 SETUP/NAV/COORDS Latitude and Longitude Fields . . . . 9-22
Table 9-9 SETUP/DR Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Table 9-10 SETUP/ALARM 1 Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Table 9-13 SETUP/BEACON RECEIVER Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Table 9-14 Search Mode Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Table 9-15 FFT MODE Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
Table 9-16 SETUP/SCR Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Table 9-17 DISPLAY CYCLING TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
Table 9-18 Navigation Data Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Table 9-19 Data Stored in Track Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45
xx NT300D Operation Manual

List of Tables
Table 9-20 SETUP/TRACK Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48

Table 9-21 Track Data Recording Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-52
Table 9-22 INPUT Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-55
Table 9-23 OUTPUT Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-56
Table 9-24 REMOTE SELECT Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-57
Table 9-25 TALKER ID Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-60
Table 9-26 SETUP/ I/O /CONTROL Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-62
Table 9-27 Three-Parameter Datum Transformation Fields . . . . . . . . .9-66
Table 9-28 Seven-Parameter Datum Transformation Fields . . . . . . . . .9-67
Table 9-29 SETUP/ I/O /CC OUTPUT Field Options . . . . . . . . . . . .9-69
Table 9-30 Memory Clearing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-71
Table A-1 NT300D Receiver Physical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1
Table A-2 Combined GPS/Beacon Antenna Physical Specifications . . . .A-2
Table A-3 Smart Card Reader (SCR) Option Physical Specifications . . .A-2
Table A-4 Remote Station Physical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-2
Table A-5 NT300D Receiver Operating Characteristics . . . . . . . . . .A-3
Table A-6 Smart Card Reader (SCR) Option Operating Characteristics . .A-5
Table B-1 Sample ZDA Sentence Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-2
Table B-2 Supported Talker ID Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-5
Table B-3 Custom NMEA Function Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-8
Table B-4 Supported NMEA-0183 Sentences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-9
Table B-5 GPQ Sentence Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-12
Table B-6 MSK Sentence Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-13
Table B-7 HDG Sentence Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-14
Table B-8 VHW Sentence Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-15
Table B-9 ALM Sentence Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-17
Table B-10 APA Sentence Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-18
Table B-11 APB Sentence Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-19
Table B-12 BOD Sentence Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-21
Table B-13 BWC Sentence Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-22
NT300D Operation Manual xxi

List of Tables
Table B-14 BWR Sentence Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-23

Table B-15 DTM Sentence Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-24
Table B-16 GGA Sentence Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-25
Table B-17 GLL Sentence Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-26
Table B-18 GRS Sentence Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-27
Table B-19 GSA Sentence Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-28
Table B-20 GST Message Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-29
Table B-21 GSV Sentence Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-30
Table B-22 HSC Sentence Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-31
Table B-23 MSS Sentence Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-32
Table B-24 R00 Sentence Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-33
Table B-25 RMB Sentence Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-35
Table B-26 RMC Sentence Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-37
Table B-27 VDR Sentence Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-38
Table B-28 VTG Sentence Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-39
Table B-29 WCV Sentence Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-40
Table B-30 WPL Sentence Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-41
Table B-31 XTE Sentence Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-42
Table B-32 ZDA Sentence Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-43
Table B-33 ZLZ Sentence Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-44
Table B-34 PTNL,CFG,0 Sentence Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-45
Table B-39 PTNLA,ERTI Sentence Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-53
Table B-40 PTNLC,ERTI Sentence Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-54
Table B-41 PTNLQ,ERTI Sentence Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-56
Table B-42 PTNLR,ERTI Sentence Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-57
xxii NT300D Operation Manual

List of Tables
Table B-43 PTNLA,ERTL Sentence Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-58

Table B-44 PTNLC,ERTL Sentence Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-59
Table B-45 PTNLQ,ERTL Sentence Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-60
Table B-46 PTNLR,ERTL Sentence Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-61
Table B-47 PTNLA,EWPI Sentence Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-62
Table B-48 PTNLC,EWPI Sentence Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-63
Table B-49 PTNLQ,EWPI Sentence Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-64
Table B-50 PTNLR,EWPI Sentence Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-65
Table B-51 PTNLQ,NRTI Sentence Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-66
Table B-52 PTNLR,NRTI Sentence Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-67
Table B-53 PTNLQ,NRTL Sentence Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-68
Table B-54 PTNLR,NRTL Sentence Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-69
Table B-55 PTNLQ,NWPI Sentence Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-70
Table B-56 PTNLR,NWPI Sentence Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-71
Table B-57 PTNLR,SRTI Sentence Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-72
Table B-58 PTNLS,SRTI Sentence Fields1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-73
Table B-59 PTNLR,SWPI Sentence Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-74
Table B-60 PTNLS,SWPI Sentence Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-75
Table B-61 PTNLQ,VERS Sentence Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-76
Table B-62 PTNLR,VERS Sentence Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-77
Table C-1 Worldwide DGPS Radiobeacon List, April 1996 . . . . . . . .C-2
NT300D Operation Manual xxiii

List of Tables
xxiv NT300D Operation Manual

Preface
Welcome to the NT300D Operation Manual. This manual describes
the installation, configuration and operation of the NT300D. The
NT300D combines the functionality of a differential GPS receiver and
Beacon receiver, packaged within a rugged housing. The high
resolution LCD display, the softkeys and the user friendly screens,
simplify all aspects of marine navigation from positioning to route
planning.
The NT300D utilizes Trimble’s advanced low power, low noise, high
accuracy Maxwell chip technology to achieve submeter position
accuracy. The unit contains a 12 channel GPS receiver capable of
simultaneously tracking all satellites in view. The NT300D also
includes a dual-channel, all-digital, fully-automatic radiobeacon
receiver for acquiring DGPS radiobeacon broadcasts conforming to
the IALA (International Association of Lighthouse Authorities)
standard. This ensures maximum performance at all times, at any
location.
The user interface supports all the advanced features included in the
NT300D. The most important functions are executed with single key
operations, and the menu structure is easy to follow. The user can also
customize the navigation screens for maximum flexibility.
NT300D Operation Manual xxv

Preface
The NT300D serial ports can send and receive data using a variety of
protocols. The receiver serial ports can be configured for
communications using NMEA-0183 messages, TSIP (Trimble
Standard Interface Protocol) packets, or TAIP (Trimble ASCII
Interface Protocol) messages. The NT300D can also receive external
RTCM corrections and pass-through RTCM corrections received by
the internal radiobeacon receiver through a serial port to an external
device.
Scope and Audience

Even if you have used other Global Positioning System (GPS)
receivers and other Beacon receivers we recommend that you spend
some time reading this manual. The following section provides you
with a guide to this manual, as well as to other documentation
included with this product.
Organization
This manual includes the following chapters and appendices:
• Chapter 1, Overview, gives an introduction to the NT300D. It
also describes GPS and DGPS, including the factors that
influence NT300D accuracy.
• Chapter 2, Installation, provides installation instructions for
the NT300D and the optional Smart Card Reader (SCR).
• Chapter 3, Getting Started, discusses the front panel controls
and display, and gives basic instructions for displaying
screens and editing data.
• Chapter 4, Configuration, gives guidelines for setting
NT300D configuration parameters.
xxvi NT300D Operation Manual

Preface
• Chapter 5, Navigation Screens, shows you how to use the

NT300D navigation screens, including the PLOT, NAV1 & 2,
and USER1, 2 & 3 screens. The Emergency Waypoint Save
feature is also introduced.
• Chapter 6, Waypoints, shows you how to use the waypoint
library, including instructions for creating, modifying, and
using waypoints.
• Chapter 7, Routes, shows you how to use the route library,
including instructions for creating, modifying, and using
routes. The Search & Rescue feature is also described.
• Chapter 8, Status, describes the system status screens,
including the GPS, DGPS, DR, BEACON RECEIVER, GRAPH,
NAV, and SCR status screens.
• Chapter 9, Setup, includes reference information for
configuring NT300D setup parameters.
• Chapter 10, Operating the SCR, provides operating
instructions for the optional Smart Card Reader.
• Chapter 11, Operating the Remote Station, provides
guidelines for operating a Remote Station, interconnected to
a primary NT300D receiver.
• Appendix A, Technical Specifications, gives details on
physical dimensions, power requirements, and other
characteristics of the NT300D, including the Smart Card
Reader.
• Appendix B, NMEA-0183 Sentences, describes the format of
NMEA-0183 messages and the NMEA messages supported
by the NT300D, including proprietary NMEA messages
developed by Trimble.
• Appendix C, DGPS Radiobeacons, includes a listing of
DGPS radiobeacons.
• The Glossary included definitions of the words and terms
used throughout this document.
NT300D Operation Manual xxvii

Preface
Related Information
This manual contains system-wide information about the NT300D.
The following sections discuss other sources of information.
Update Notes
You will find a registration card with your NT300D. By sending in
your registration card, you are automatically sent update notes as they
become available. When you receive these packages, read them. They
contain important information about software and hardware changes.
Contact your local Trimble Dealer for more information about the
support agreement contracts for software and firmware, and the
extended warranty programs for hardware.
World Wide Web (WWW) Site

For an interactive look at Trimble, visit our site on the World Wide
Web (www.trimble.com).
File Transfer Protocol (FTP) Site

Use the Trimble FTP site to send files or to receive files such as
software patches, utilities, and answers to frequently asked questions
(FAQs). The address is ftp://ftp.trimble.com.
You can also access the FTP site from the Trimble World Wide Web
site (www.trimble.com/support/support.htm).
Technical Assistance
If you have a problem and cannot find the information you need in the
product documentation, contact your local dealer.
xxviii NT300D Operation Manual

Preface
Reader Comment Form

Thank you for purchasing this product. We would appreciate
feedback about the documentation. Contributors of particularly
helpful evaluations will receive a thank-you gift.
To forward your feedback, do one of the following:
• send an email to ReaderFeedback@trimble.com
• complete and fax or post the reader comment form at the back
of this manual to the attention of the Documentation Group.
(If the reader comment form is not available, send comments
and suggestions to the address in the front of this manual.)
All comments and suggestions become the property of Trimble
Navigation Limited.
Document Conventions
Italic type is used to emphasize passages of text.
Italicized SMALL CAPITALS identify screen and menu names.
SMALL CAPITALS identify configuration parameter names and
parameter settings.
Helvetica Bold represent the softkeys you can press to select the
options displayed in menus.

Round symbols with direction arrows are used to identify
the arrow keys. The symbol identifies the double arrow key.
The round symbols, labeled – , represent the buttons on the
numeric keypad.
Rectangular symbols, such as [SETUP] or [STATUS], are used to
identify the buttons you can press to display NT300D screens.
NT300D Operation Manual xxix

Preface
Notes, Cautions, and Warnings

Notes, cautions, and warnings are used to emphasize important
information.
* Note – Notes give additional significant information about the subject

to increase your knowledge, or guide your actions.
I Caution – Cautions alert you to situations that could cause hardware

damage or software error.
M Warning – Warnings alert you to situations that could cause

unrecoverable data loss.
xxx NT300D Operation Manual

1 Overview
This chapter gives an overview of the NT300D receiver. It also briefly
describes GPS and DGPS, including the factors affecting the accuracy
of the NT300D.
The NT300D combines a GPS receiver and a Beacon receiver into one
unit, packaged in a rugged housing, Figure 1-1.
Figure 1-1 NT300D Receiver
NT300D Operation Manual 1-1

Overview 1
The NT300D is designed to interface with other marine equipment
and systems as well as being used alone as a precise navigator.
Computers, auto pilots, and radars are examples of instruments the
NT300D interfaces with.
The extensive set of features implemented in the NT300D are all
available to the operator through the user interface. The user interface
allows the operator to easily navigate through the different screens.
The most important functions are executed with single key operations
for quicker access. The user can also customize the navigation screens
for maximum flexibility. The high resolution LCD display offers a
wide viewing angle and selectable settings of its brightness and
contrast. The keypad has red backlighting to make it readable at night.
The NT300D utilizes Trimble’s advanced low-power, low noise, high
accuracy Maxwell chip technology to achieve sub-meter level
position accuracy. The unit contains a 12 channel GPS receiver
capable of simultaneously tracking all satellites in view. Advanced
carrier-phase filtering techniques applied to exceptionally low-noise
C/A code measurements are used to generate real-time sub-meter
positions at a maximum rate of 5 times per second, even under the
most challenging operating conditions. In addition, the user has the
option to turn on a complex position and velocity (P/V) filter for
smoother navigation.
The NT300D features a dual-channel, all-digital, fully-automatic
radiobeacon receiver. RTCM SC-104 corrections conforming to the
IALA standard, broadcast by marine radiobeacons, are received and
demodulated. The receiver uses advanced digital-signal processing
techniques to track and demodulate signals from radiobeacon
stations. The radiobeacons operate in the MF (medium frequency)
band from 283.5 kHz to 325.0 kHz.
The NT300D also accepts external corrections in the RTCM SC-104
format. Those corrections are received on one of the unit’s two serial
ports.
The receiver has the ability to automatically prioritize the externally
received RTCM corrections over the RTCM corrections received by
the internal beacon receiver.
1-2 NT300D Operation Manual

1 Overview
The NT300D communicates using both standard NMEA-0183

sentences and custom NMEA sentences, TSIP (Trimble Standard
Interface Protocol) packets, and TAIP (Trimble ASCII Interface
Protocol) messages. Support for several communication protocols
offers optimal flexibility when interfacing with external equipment.
A connector is provided on the back panel of the NT300D for
attaching an optional SCR (Smart Card Reader). The SCR allows
storage of useful data, such as waypoint and route libraries, and vessel
tracks on PC Cards.
1.1 Standard Features

• Combined GPS/ beacon receiver featuring a high resolution
LCD display and a backlit keypad mounted in a rugged housing.
• An extensive set of screen features, includes: navigation
tools, waypoint and route planning, advanced GPS and
beacon receiver control and monitoring, alarms, datum
transformations, data recording and much more.
• The NT300D is certified to CE-mark and IEC945
• 12 GPS (C/A-code) tracking channels, carrier-phase filtering
and instantaneous full wavelength carrier-phase measurements.
• Less than two tenths of a second delay in computed position.
Typical accuracy: less then 1 meter (RMS) and 0.1 knots (RMS).
• Position update rate up to 5 times per second on the serial
port and once a second update rate on the display.
• Simultaneous use of three different datums—one on each of
the two serial ports and one for display and track recording.
• The dual-channel beacon receiver integrated in the NT300D
allows for a smooth transition between reference stations.
The receiver can select beacons automatically or the user can
manually make the selection.

Overview 1
• The beacon receiver features special techniques for instant
acquisition of radiobeacon signals and advanced techniques
for reducing the impact of atmospheric noise and jamming
signals.
• Two RS-422 serial ports feature support for the NMEA-0183,
RTCM SC-104, TSIP, and TAIP protocols.
• Contact-closure output for alarm or 200 PPNM (Pulses Per
Nautical Mile) output.
• Combined L1 GPS antenna and H-field loop beacon antenna.
Antenna cable, 35 meter (105-foot) low-loss, quad-shielded
RG-59, male F to male F connectors.
• 1 year warranty.
1.2 Optional Features

• Antenna cable, 50-meter (164-foot) low-loss, quad-shielded,
RG-59, Male F to Male F connectors.
• Scorpio System option for use in decoding radiobeacon
signals in the United Kingdom.
• The SCR (Smart Card Reader) allows the user to store
waypoint and route libraries on a PC Card as well as
recording navigation data.
• Extended warranty and firmware update agreement.

1 Overview
1.3 Differential GPS Positioning

The NT300D uses differential GPS to achieve positions accurate to the
submeter level.
DGPS employs two or more receivers. One receiver, called the
reference station is located at a known point to determine the errors in
the pseudoranges to the satellites. These errors, called pseudorange
corrections, are usually transmitted by a radiobeacon transmitter. An
unlimited number of mobile NT300Ds receive the data at unknown
locations within the transmission range of the reference station.
The pseudorange corrections (PRCs) are computed by determining
the differences between the actual and computed ranges to the tracked
satellites. The coordinates of the mobile receivers can then be
computed by applying the received PRCs to the mobile unit’s
observed ranges. This is done in real time.
The concept of differential GPS is based on the fact that because GPS
satellites are in high orbits (the orbital radius is greater than four
times the radius of the Earth), the pseudorange errors observed by the
reference station receiver are similar to the pseudorange errors seen
by mobile receivers in the vicinity.

Overview 1
1.3.1 Sources of DGPS Error

Pseudorange errors can come from several sources. Some errors are
common to both the reference station and the mobile receivers, such
as satellite clock errors. These can be removed using differential
corrections. Errors that are not common to both the reference station
and mobile receiver include multipath and receiver noise. These
errors cannot be removed using differential corrections.
Each satellite broadcasts orbital and satellite clock data based on
predicted behavior. If the orbit of a satellite does not behave as
predicted, it results in an error in the pseudorange. The commonality
of the orbital error between two receivers depends on the distance
between the receivers and the direction of the orbital error. Because
GPS satellites orbit at high altitude, pseudorange errors caused by
orbital prediction errors are similar between two receivers within 100
kilometers of each other. At greater distances between receivers,
orbital errors become larger for each receiver, becoming an increasing
source of error that cannot be corrected with differential correction.
The greatest source of pseudorange error is Selective Availability
(S/A). S/A refers to the errors in the Ephemeris data and satellite-
clock dithering that are deliberately induced by the U.S. Department
of Defense (DoD), the operators of GPS. The purpose of this
corruption is to restrict full GPS accuracy from all users except
authorized users, typically the U.S. military and its allies. The
magnitude of S/A errors combined with other error sources results in
autonomous (single receiver, GPS only) horizontal accuracy such that
95% of the positions are within 100 meters of truth.
S/A errors can be removed using DGPS. The clock-dither error, like
unplanned clock errors, is common to all receivers using the satellite.
S/A Ephemeris errors are similar to orbital errors and can be removed
by DGPS. Even without S/A, differential GPS corrections are still
required for most precise applications (GPS positions alone are not
accurate enough to provide the required position precision). GPS,
with S/A turned off, provides accuracy on the order of 10 meters.

1 Overview
Other sources of pseudorange error include ionospheric delay,

tropospheric delay, multipath, and receiver noise. DGPS removes
most of the errors due to ionospheric and tropospheric delay as long
as the distance between the reference station receiver and mobile
receiver is not too large.
Multipath and receiver noise, however, are unique to a receiver and
cannot be removed by differential techniques. The NT300D Maxwell-
based receiver uses the latest advancements in receiver design, has
appreciably lower noise levels than earlier receivers, and uses
advanced filtering and signal-processing techniques. The receiver
design, when used in a low-multipath environment, minimizes errors
from ionospheric and tropospheric delay, so that the resulting DGPS
positions are more accurate.
1.3.2 Critical Factors Affecting DGPS Accuracy

The accuracy achieved when using real-time differential corrections
with the NT300D receiver depends on the following factors:
• Receiver type at the reference station
• Number of common visible satellites between the NT300D
and the reference station
• Multipath environment
• Distance between the reference station and mobile receivers
• Position Dilution of Precision (PDOP)
• GPS Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR)
• Satellite elevations
• Rate of corrections transmitted from reference station
• GPS operating parameters

Overview 1
The accuracy of the NT300D receiver with differential correction is
better than 1 meter (RMS) given the following conditions:
• Number of satellites used: > 5
• PDOP: < 4
• Signal to Noise Ratio: > 39 dB-Hz
• Satellite Elevation Mask: > 10°
• The reference DGPS receiver is a Trimble Maxwell-based
receiver (specific models listed in the following note)
* Note – The following Trimble DSM, PathFinder, and 4000SE/SSE/SSi

receiver models have Maxwell-based technology and when used as
the reference station, yield submeter accuracy with the NT300D
Maxwell-based receiver:
GPS PathFinder Community Base Station

DSM Reference Station
4000RS/DS
4000MSK DGPS Reference Station
Land Surveyor II
Land Surveyor IID
System Surveyor II
Geodetic Surveyor
Geodetic System Surveyor
GIS Surveyor Base Station
If your receiver is not listed above, contact your local Trimble dealer to
learn about upgrade options.

1 Overview
Number of Visible Satellites

Four or more satellites (SVs) must be visible to calculate a 3D
(three-dimensional) position (latitude, longitude, and height). Three
or more satellites must be visible to calculate a 2D (two-dimensional)
position (latitude and longitude). In addition to positions, GPS
receivers also provide an accurate time in both 2D and 3D modes.
Environmental Factors
The signals from satellites are sometimes reflected off nearby objects,
particularly metallic objects, causing the GPS antenna element to
receive false or erroneous signals. This phenomena is known as
multipath.
Severe multipath can induce errors of dozens of meters, while mild
multipath could cause small errors of only a meter or less. Optimal
accuracy is obtained by locating the GPS antenna clear of large
reflective surfaces and also by having a clear view of the sky.

Overview 1
PDOP Mask
DOP (Dilution of Precision) is a unitless measure that indicates when
the satellite geometry can provide the most accurate results. Three
DOP measures are available:
• PDOP (Position Dilution of Precision)
• HDOP (Horizontal Dilution of Precision)
• VDOP (Vertical Dilution of Precision)
PDOP gives you information when the satellite geometry can provide
the most accurate results in 3D mode (solve for latitude, longitude,
and height). HDOP is used when you are working in 2D mode
(latitude and longitude). VDOP is used to determine when the satellite
geometry can provide accurate results in height. The most commonly
used DOP measure is PDOP.
When the satellites are spread around the sky, the PDOP value is low
and the computed position fixes are more accurate. When the
satellites are grouped closely together, the PDOP is high and the
position fixes are less accurate. You can configure a PDOP Mask to
control the point at which the receiver stops outputting position
reports if the PDOP becomes too high. For submeter accuracy, data
should be collected with a PDOP of 4 or less.
In most marine applications, a PDOP Mask of 6 or more could be
used to avoid outages. However, when the PDOP Mask is raised to 6,
accuracy could suffer, but this may prove to be an acceptable trade-off
for some applications—less accuracy for more GPS availability time.
The default PDOP Mask for the NT300D is set to 8.

1 Overview
SNR Mask
SNR is a measure of the strength of the satellite signal. Accuracy
degrades as the signal strength decreases. To avoid computing
positions from weak signals, the SNR Mask should be set to M
(Medium: 39 dB-Hz) or H (High: 45 dB-Hz). If an SNR Mask of L
(Low: 33 dB-Hz) is chosen, more positions become available because
some weaker SVs with low SNR are used at the risk of decreasing
accuracy. The default SNR Mask for the NT300D is set to M.
* Note – PDOP and SNR act in opposite directions: greater accuracy is

achieved with low PDOP and high SNR.
Elevation Mask
When a satellite is low on the horizon, the satellite signals must travel
a greater distance through the atmosphere, resulting in a lower signal
strength and delayed reception by the NT300D. Low-elevation
satellites tend to yield noisy data. For submeter accuracy, data should
only be collected from satellites positioned at least 10° above the
horizon. The default Elevation Mask for the NT300D is set to 10°.
Position Fix Mode

Manual 3D Position Fix Mode yields the best accuracy. Auto 2D/3D
Position Fix Mode allows the receiver to use 3 SVs (2D) without loss
of data at the expense of accuracy, since a 2D (three-satellite) solution
is not as accurate as a 3D (four or more satellite) position solution.
Manual 2D Position Fix Mode requires a manual height to be entered
to provide a more accurate latitude and longitude. The default
position fix mode for the NT300D is set to 3D.

Overview 1
Pseudorange Correction Age (PRC Age)
Individual pseudorange corrections (PRCs) for each satellite are
transmitted with a time tag to identify the PRC creation time. The
accuracy of a PRC decreases steadily with age, and as a result, older
PRCs can degrade position accuracy.
The PRC AGE parameter lets you specify a maximum time (aging)
period, in seconds, before older PRCs are no longer applied to
position solutions. Depending on the number of remaining PRCs, not
exceeding the PRC age limit, this may or may not cause the NT300D
to lose DGPS lock. The default value of 30 seconds is adequate for
most applications. If the PRCs are no longer valid and the NT300D
drops differential GPS, the DGPS alarm is triggered. This could
happen due to old PRCs or faulty reference station health. For detailed
information about DGPS and pseudorange corrections, see section
1.3, page 1-5.
Reference Station Health Monitoring

The NT300D monitors the health of the reference station and gives
you a warning if the station health is bad. A new reference station
should then be used. The switching of reference stations happens
automatically when you use the dual-channel beacon receiver in
automatic mode. If you run the beacon receiver in manual mode, it is
a good choice to set the Reference Station Health Monitoring alarm to
On (default). In this way, you can make sure to manually change the
reference station as it becomes necessary. For detailed information
about DGPS, see section 1.3, page 1-5.

1 Overview
1.4 Dead Reckoning (DR)

The NT300D automatically switches to dead reckoning mode when
GPS information is not available. In DR mode, the NT300D can use
an external source of speed and heading information to compute
positions, or use speed and heading values entered using the keypad.
The DR indicator is displayed in the upper right corner of all screens
when the receiver is operating in dead reckoning mode. For detailed
information, see section 9.6, page 9-23.
1.5 Beacon Signal Processing

Beacon signal processing is broken down into six stages:
• Beacon pre-filtering
• Beacon automatic gain control
• Beacon Analog-to-Digital conversion
• Beacon digital signal processing
• Beacon Radiobeacon database generation
• Beacon I/O processing
These six stages are discussed in the following sections.
1.5.1 Beacon Pre-filtering

The Beacon pre-filter rejects additional interference in the MF signal
which was not attenuated by the antenna pre-amp filter or was picked
up by the antenna cable.
1.5.2 Beacon Automatic Gain Control

This stage automatically amplifies the filtered MF signal to an
optimal level for the analog-to-digital conversion stage.

Overview 1
1.5.3 Beacon Analog-to-Digital Conversion

The analog MF signals are converted into digital signals for the digital
signal processing stage. The receiver uses a wide-band conversion
technique to improve radiobeacon acquisition by allowing a broader
range of beacon signals to pass to the signal processing stage for
evaluation.
In addition, the wide-band analog-to-digital conversion enables the
use of special digital noise reduction techniques for handling impulse
noise. This permits a highly adaptable and optimized response to
impulse noise such as lightning.
1.5.4 Beacon Digital Signal Processing

Controlled by proprietary processing algorithms, the Beacon digital
signal processor (DSP) digitally filters the wide-band sample, selects
the best beacon signal, and passes the selected signal to the I/O
processor. In addition, the DSP measures signal level, noise level, and
frequency offset.
1.5.5 Beacon Database Generation

The receiver builds a database containing records for up to 10
radiobeacon stations. The number of database records is dependent on
the number of radiobeacons within the broadcast reception range of
the receiver.
1.5.6 Beacon I/O Processing

The NT300D Beacon I/O processor monitors the integrity of the data
signal received on Beacon channels 0 and 1 from the DSP, formats the
RTCM SC-104 data messages, and sends the RTCM data across the
microprocessor bus to the GPS processor.

1 Overview
1.6 Combined Antenna

The combined antenna shipped with the NT300D features two
antenna elements: an L1 GPS antenna and a Beacon H-Field Loop
antenna.
The L1 GPS antenna is an active antenna element that is designed to
filter out unwanted signals and amplify the L1 GPS signal for
transmission over the antenna cable to the NT300D.
The Beacon H-field Loop antenna features a preamplifier for filtering
out interference such as AM radio broadcasts, Loran C chains, and
noise from switching power supplies. After filtering, the preamplifier
amplifies the Beacon signal for transmission over the same antenna
cable to the NT300D.

Overview 1

2 Installation
This chapter provides instructions for installing the NT300D as well
as a brief description of each component of the NT300D system. After
installing the NT300D, please refer to Chapter 4, Configuration. For
configuration information about the optional Smart Card Reader
(SCR), see Chapter 10, Operating the SCR.
The NT300D is designed to withstand harsh marine conditions.
Thorough electrical and environmental testing has been done and the
unit is certified for both CE-mark and IEC945. IEC945 complies with
IMO (International Maritime Organization) recommendations for
performance standards of ship-board electronics. Both certifications
are of importance in the US and internationally.
The NT300D system (P/N 81720-00) consists of the following
components:
• Combined GPS/Beacon Antenna (P/N 81711-01)
• Antenna Cable, 35 meter (105 foot) (P/N 81303-20)
• Control/Display Unit (CDU) (P/N 81720-01)
• Installation Kit (P/N 80958-00)
• Optional Smart Card Reader (P/N 80929-00)
• Optional Panel Mount Installation Kit (P/N 80976-00)

Installation 2
Figure 2-1 illustrates the components in the NT300D system and how
they are interconnected.
Combined
GPS/Beacon
Antenna
NT300D
NMEA
0183
Receiver
SCR
Red Black
Switch
12V Gnd
DC Power
Figure 2-1 NT300D System Interconnect Diagram

2 Installation
2.1 NT300D Components

The components of the NT300D are described in the following
sections.
2.1.1 Combined GPS/Beacon Antenna

The NT300D uses an active antenna to collect signals from the GPS
satellites and the marine DGPS beacon transmitters. The antenna
contains a pre-amplifier and elements for acquiring both GPS and
beacon signals. The components are housed in a sealed, weather-
proof plastic enclosure suitable for permanent installation in an
exposed location, Figure 2-2.
Figure 2-2 Combined GPS/Beacon Antenna

Installation 2
2.1.2 Antenna Cable

The antenna cable is a weatherproof, 75 ohm, quad-shielded, low-
loss, coaxial cable that links the antenna to the CDU. The NT300D is
supplied with a 35-meter (105-foot) unterminated cable, Figure 2-3.
This cable is specifically designed to meet the stringent requirements
of GPS.
105'
(35m)
Figure 2-3 NT300D Antenna Cable
I Caution – It is essential to use only the antenna cable provided with

the NT300D (if required, a longer cable is available as an option from
Trimble, P/N 81725-00). This cable is carefully manufactured to
receive both the 1.5 GHz satellite signals and the 300 kHz-band
beacon signals. The cable also supplies the antenna with DC power.
Inexpensive cables with similar labels do not meet these
requirements.
Do not splice the cable at any point during its run or use a different
cable than the ones provided by Trimble. This can cause signal loss
and result in a poorly operating DGPS receiver.

2 Installation
2.1.3 Control/Display Unit (CDU)

The CDU includes the GPS/Beacon receiver electronics and the
microprocessor electronics for controlling the display and the keypad,
Figure 2-4. The front panel contains a high resolution (320 x 240
pixels) LCD display and a rubber keypad with red LED backlighting.
The display has adjustable brightness and contrast controls and can
also be set to operate in reversed video mode for night time operation.
The back panel contains connectors for connecting power, antenna,
and interface devices. The CDU can be mounted on a gimbal or flush-
mounted in a panel.
Figure 2-4 Control/Display Unit
2.1.4 Installation Kit

The installation kit includes all of the hardware required to install the
NT300D system. A gimbal mount is provided, along with connector
kits, power cable, fuses, and tie-wraps. An optional panel mounting
kit is available.

Installation 2
2.2 Installation Overview

The steps required to install the NT300D are listed below. Before
beginning the installation, do some careful planning and look for
suitable locations for the antenna, the NT300D, and the optional SCR.
The length of your cables is an important factor to consider when
selecting mounting locations for components.
1. Install the CDU
2. Install the optional Smart Card Reader
3. Mount the antenna
4. Route the antenna cable
5. Connect the interfacing devices
6. Connect the power source
The following sections provide detailed instructions for each of these
steps.

2 Installation
2.3 Installing the CDU

The CDU can be installed using the gimbal mount provided in the
standard installation kit, or an optional panel mount. The CDU can be
installed in any convenient location where it is protected from
extreme environmental conditions. The CDU display is visible in any
lighting condition, including direct sunlight and complete darkness.
Choose a location where the display is easily viewed and the keypad
is readily accessible. All external connections to the CDU are made
through connectors on the CDU's back panel. Avoid locations with
exposure to extreme environmental conditions, including:
• Excessive heat (> 55 °C)
• Excessive cold (<0°C)
• High vibration
• Corrosive fluids and gases
Avoiding these conditions improves CDU performance and ensures
long term product reliability.

Installation 2
2.3.1 Gimbal Mount Installation (Standard Kit)

The gimbal mount allows the CDU to be attached to any flat surface
(table, wall, and ceiling) and does not require access to the opposite
side of the mounting surface. The gimbal mount kit includes a gimbal
base, two gimbal knobs, two nuts, sixteen tie wraps, and two
neoprene washers. Screws for attaching the gimbal base to the
mounting surface are also included, Figure 2-5.
Figure 2-5 Gimbal Mount
When positioning the gimbal base on the mounting surface, allow a

minimum of 12 cm (4.75 inches) of clearance behind the CDU for the
power, antenna, and interface connectors and cables. Choose an
appropriate fastener scheme for the mounting surface (wood, metal,
and fiberglass).

2 Installation
To gimbal mount the CDU:

1. Drill four holes in the mounting surface using the gimbal base
as a template.
2. Secure the gimbal base to the mounting surface using the
screws provided (ASA UNC 10-24 x 0.75 inch), or an
alternate fastener scheme.
3. Align the CDU bracket with the gimbal base and trap the two
neoprene washers between the NT300D and the gimbal base
(see Figure 2-6).
Gimbal Neoprene
Washer
NT300D
Nut
Figure 2-6 Mounting the CDU to the Gimbal
4. Insert the two ASA UNC 10-24 hex nuts into the slots of the
CDU.
5. Install the gimbal knobs and tighten them just enough to
prevent the CDU from pivoting on the gimbals.

Installation 2
2.3.2 Panel Mount Installation (Optional Kit Available)

The CDU can also be mounted in an instrument console or in a wall
with access to the opposite side of the mounting surface.
Panel mounting requires several holes in the mounting surface. Figure
2-7 illustrates the cutouts required in the mounting surface.
9.0"
8.25"
4.0"
CUTOUT
6.0"
Figure 2-7 Panel Mount Template
A full scale template is enclosed with the panel mount kit. Use this
template when cutting and drilling the holes shown above. The panel
mount kit includes two sets of thumb screws. The 5/8-inch set is used
for panel thicknesses between 1/4-inch and 1/2-inch. The 15/16-inch
set is used for panels between 1/2-inch and 3/4-inch thick.
M Warning – Be extremely careful when selecting the thumb screws

you use to panel mount the CDU. If you attempt to mount the panel
with longer than recommended thumb screws, you may permanently
damage the CDU.

2 Installation
A minimum clearance of 12 cm (4.75 inches) is required behind the

panel for the power, antenna, and interface connectors and cables, and
for installing the thumb screws (see Figure 2-8).
ThumbScrew
4.75"
Washer
FlushMount
Gasket Panel
Figure 2-8 Optional Panel Mount Kit

Installation 2
To panel mount the CDU:
1. Align the panel mount template on the mounting surface.
I Caution – Before cutting holes in the mounting surface, verify that at

least 12 cm (4.75 inches) of clearance exists on the opposite side of
the mounting surface for the power, antenna, and interface
connectors and cables.
2. Using the template as a guide, cut a 21.0 cm by 15.2 cm

(8.25-inch by 6.0-inch) opening in the mounting surface.
3. Using the template as a guide, drill four 1/4-inch holes in the
mounting surface for the thumb screws.
4. Peel the backing off the mounting gasket, and apply the
gasket to the mounting surface or the back of the CDU. Be
sure that the holes in the gasket are aligned with the thumb
screw holes.
5. Place the CDU in the opening.
6. Insert the appropriate thumb screws, with washer, through the
screw holes from the back side of the mounting surface, and
thread the screws into the threaded inserts in the back of the
CDU.
7. Before tightening the thumb screws, make sure that the CDU
is correctly oriented in the mounting hole.
8. Hand-tighten the thumb screws until the CDU is snug in the
mounting hole.
I Caution – Do not over tighten thumbscrews. Too much tension may

permanently damage the CDU.

2 Installation
2.4 Mounting the Antenna

Consider the following guidelines when selecting a location for the
combined GPS/Beacon antenna:
• Choose a location for the antenna that is safe from damage
during normal operation of the vessel.
• Signals from transmitting antennas can interfere with the
NT300D. Install the antenna at least 10 meters from satellite
communication equipment. Avoid mounting the antenna near
radar arrays.
I Caution – Never install the antenna within of the direct transmission

beam (or cone) of satellite communication equipment.
M Warning – High-power radar beamed directly at the antenna can

damage the pre-amplifier.
• Choose a location that is open, unobstructed, and well away

from metal objects.
• Avoid mounting the antenna close to stays, electrical cables,
and metal masts. Mount the antenna at least 2 feet from other
antennas.
• Avoid areas with high vibration, excessive heat, electrical
interference, and strong magnetic fields. (See sources listed in
the next section.)

Installation 2
2.4.1 Sources of Electrical Interference

Optimal performance of the NT300D requires GPS and Beacon
signals to have a high Signal-to-Noise Ratio ( SNR). Choose a location
for the antenna with a minimal amount of ambient noise. It may be
necessary to install noise suppressors or line filters on equipment
generating a significant amount of electrical interference. Several
common sources of electrical and magnetic noise are:
• Gasoline engines (Spark Plugs)
• Televisions and PC monitors
• Alternators and generators
• Electric motors
• Propeller shafts
• Equipment with DC-to-AC converters
• Florescent lights
• Power lines
• Switching power supplies
The antenna can be mounted on a pole, or directly on a flat surface.
Choose the appropriate mounting technique for the selected location,
and use the antenna mounting guidelines in the following sections.
2.4.2 Pole Mount

The threaded socket in the base of the pole mount accepts a 1.0 inch,
14 threads per inch, straight thread. The antenna only requires hand
tightening on the pole. The pole mount housing protects the antenna
connector from the environment.
To mount the antenna on a pole:
1. Securely install the pole or extension to the vessel.
2. If routing the antenna cable through the pole or extension,
feed the cable through before installing the antenna.

2 Installation
3. Thread the antenna housing on the pole. The pole mount

housing only requires hand tightening on the pole. Figure 2-9
illustrates a pole mount.
Figure 2-9 Pole Mount
4. Attach the cable and the pole mount housing to the antenna
using the four ASA UNF 10-32 x 0.75 inch screws provided.
I Caution – Do not use a tool to tighten the pole mount housing on the
pole, since this may damage the housing.

Installation 2
2.4.3 Direct Mount

The base of the antenna housing has four threaded holes (ASA UNF
10-32) for securing the antenna directly to a flat surface. Direct
mounting requires access below the mounting surface for installing
fasteners and routing the antenna cable. Five holes must be drilled in
the mounting surface. Four holes are used for fasteners and the fifth
hole provides clearance for the antenna connector. Figure 2-10
illustrates a direct mount.
Figure 2-10 Direct Mount

2 Installation
The installation kit includes four screws (ASA UNF 10-32 x 0.75 inch)
for securing the antenna to the surface. The screws supplied are the
appropriate length for a surface thickness of 6 mm (0.25 inch). If the
surface thickness is outside of this range, you need to supply the
appropriate length screws.
2.5 Routing and Connecting the Antenna Cable

An antenna cable is included with the NT300D. Install the F-
connector at the antenna end before routing the cable. For more
information, see section 2.5.3, page 2-18.
2.5.1 Choosing an Antenna Cable Route

After mounting the antenna, you need to route the antenna cable from
the antenna to the NT300D. When routing the cable, choose the most
direct path to the receiver while avoiding the following hazards:
• Sharp ends or kinks in the cable
• Hot surfaces (exhaust manifolds or stacks)
• Rotating or reciprocating equipment
• Sharp or abrasive surfaces
• Door and window jambs
• Corrosive fluids or gases

Installation 2
2.5.2 Securing the Antenna Cable

After routing the antenna cable to the NT300D, attach the F connector
to the antenna and use tie-wraps to secure the cable at several points
along the cable route.
* Note – When securing the cable, start at the antenna and work
toward the receiver.
One tie-wrap is required to secure the cable to the mount near the
base of the antenna. This tie-wrap provides strain relief for the
antenna cable connection.
* Note – Install heat-shrink tubing, tape, or other protection for the

cable jacket, at points where the cable enters and exits bulkheads to
prevent cable chafing.
When the cable is secured, cut the receiver end of the cable to an
appropriate length. Leave enough cable slack to allow for easy
connection to the NT300D.
2.5.3 Antenna Connector Installation

This section describes the correct procedure for attaching the F-type
connectors to the ends of the antenna cable.
I Caution – It is essential that the F-type connectors are attached to

the antenna cable by a qualified professional following the procedures
outlined in this section. This is to prevent possible signal loss or
separation of the antenna cable from the connector.

2 Installation
Preparing the Cable Ends
* Note – First attach the F-type connector only to the end of the cable
being connected to the antenna prior to routing the cable. Once the
cable is routed, secured, and trimmed, attach the second end
following the same procedure.
Use a cable preparation tool to prepare the cable. A knife also may be
used provided that the dimensions shown in Figure 2-11 are met.
.125" .3125"
(3.2mm) (8.0mm)
Figure 2-11 Cable Preparation Dimensions
1. Squarely cut the cable jacket.

2. Squarely cut the braid and dielectric.
3. Clean center conductor; remove residual dielectric and long
braid strands.
4. Fold all the braids back over the jacket, taking care not to tear
the foil wrapping on the dielectric. When this step is
completed, the cable should look as shown in Figure 2-12.
Figure 2-12 Cable End with Wire Braid Folded Back

Installation 2
I Caution – Do not attempt to assemble an F-type connector directly

on the NT300D antenna port. The 30-60 inch/lbs of torque required for
assembly can damage the port. Assembly should be performed with
the supplied F-Connector Dummy Port (P/N 16081), or any other port
which can absorb these torque levels without damage.
Placing the Connector Onto the Cable

Making sure the cable is centered, push it firmly into the connector
while twisting the cable back and forth (see Figure 2-13). Push until
the cable dielectric is even with the end of the connector mandrel. The
cable jacket must enter the mandrel completely. This is especially
important in cold weather, since the cable jacket tends to stiffen. If the
cable does not go into the connector smoothly, back it out and repeat
the procedure.
Figure 2-13 Placing the Connector Onto the Cable

2 Installation
Slide the connector out of the cassette. Inspect the connector to make
sure that the dielectric is flush with the end of the mandrel. If not,
place the cable connector assembly back into the cassette and push
the cable harder, while twisting, until the dielectric is flush, see Figure
2-14.
Figure 2-14 Sliding the Connector Out of the Cassette
Screw the assembled connector to the dummy port (P/N 16081). Use
two 7/16-inch wrenches to apply torque. The connection gradually
gets harder to turn, however the amount of torque increases
dramatically just before the cable connection is completely engaged.
At this point, another half-turn should be taken on the connector to
complete the process.
Test the connection at this point by twisting and pulling the cable,
while holding the connector, to make sure it is solidly attached. After
disassembly of the dummy port (P/N 16081), the center conductor of
the cable should protrude about 8 mm (0.31 inch) from the connector
housing. The white dielectric should be flush with the inside of the
connector.

Installation 2
Attaching the Cable to the Port
Slide a rubber sealing sleeve (provided by Trimble) over the port far
enough to leave the first two threads exposed, Figure 2-15. Install the
connector finger tight plus 1/3 turn with a 7/16-inch wrench. After
tightening the port, perform a twist and tug to confirm correct
installation.
Figure 2-15 Attaching the Cable to the Port

2 Installation
2.6 Connecting the Interface Devices

The NT300D can be connected to devices that communicate with
NMEA-0183, TSIP (proprietary Trimble Standard Interface Protocol),
TAIP (proprietary Trimble ASCII Interface Protocol), or RTCM
protocol. The NT300D can receive external corrections through the
serial port, allowing you to use a local reference station as the source
of corrections. The receiver can also provide other GPS equipment
with RTCM corrections with the built in RTCM pass-through
function. For more information, see section 9.13, page 9-54. An
optional Smart Card Reader (SCR) can also be connected to the unit.
Figure 2-16 show the connections on the NT300D back panel.
Grounding Lug
GPS Antenna DC Power

SCR
Serial Port 2 Serial Port 1
Figure 2-16 NT300D CDU Back Panel

Installation 2
The interface cables for the two serial ports must be supplied by the
installer. For serial RS-422 interface connections, use a 24-26 gauge,
shielded, twisted-pair cable, Figure 2-17.
* Note – When routing the interface cable avoid hazards such as sharp
bends, hot or sharp surfaces, door jambs, corrosive fluids and gases
and rotating equipment.
NT300D
Ground Lug
Interface device with
isolated power supply Ground Lug
Pair #1
RX+ TX+
RX- TX-
TX+ RX+
TX- Pair #2 RX-
Shield Wire Shield Wire Ground
Ground Lug Shielded, twisted pairs. Lug
HULL
Figure 2-17 Connecting the NT300D to Other Compatible Devices

(RS-422 Only)
* Note – Since the NT300D uses an isolated (floating) power supply,

care must be taken to provide a ground reference between the
NT300D and the other equipment. If the other equipment also has an
isolated power supply, the ground reference could be achieved
through the hull or ground bonding system.

2 Installation
The receiver is flexible enough to receive RS-232 and TTL signals,

and can also transmit data to most devices designed for TTL inputs
and to some equipment with RS-232 serial ports. See Table 2-1.
However, Trimble recommends the use of an RS-422 to RS-232 self-
powered, signal level converter.
Table 2-1 Serial Connections to External Devices
RS-422 RS-232 TTL

NT300D Pin Signal Device Device Device
Receive + 1 Á Transmit +
Transmit - 2 Ë Receive - Receive Receive
data data
Transmit + 3 Ë Receive +
Receive - 4 Á Transmit - Transmit Transmit
data data
Signal 5 Á Ë Signal Signal Signal
Ground Return Return Return

Installation 2
2.6.1 Receiver I/O Ports

The receiver has two independent bidirectional RS-422 serial ports
(P1, P2), one port for connecting a Smart Card Reader (SCR) and one
power port (PWR). Table 2-2 summarizes the available functions on
the serial ports.
Table 2-2 NT300D Serial Port Function
P1 P2 SCR PWR
• NMEA-0183 • NMEA-0183 • SCR • Power
• RTCM SC-104 • RTCM SC-104
• TSIP • TSIP
• TAIP • TAIP
• Alarm output or • Remote
200 PPNM Station
output
• Remote Station
For information about configuring the serial ports, see section 9.13,
page 9-54.
2.6.2 Installing Connectors on the Interface Cable

The installation kit includes 7-pin connector kits for the serial ports.
Use the pin-out information and instructions on the following pages
to install the connectors on the interface cables. Refer to the
connection diagrams you created when connecting the interface
cables to the external devices to identify the appropriate wire for each
pin in the connector. Since the serial ports can support multiple
devices, multiple cables may be terminated by each connector. This
can be done using a terminal strip or similar device.
Select one of the 7-pin connector kits (P/N 21998) from the
installation kit, and follow the instructions below to install the
connector on the interface cable.

2 Installation
To install the interface connector:

1. Prepare the wires in the cable for termination. Strip the cable
jacket to expose 17 mm (0.63 inch) of wire, see Figure 2-18.
.438" .25"
11.2 mm 6.4 mm
Cable Jacket Shield Shield Wire
Figure 2-18 Interface Cable Stripping Dimensions
2. Feed the back shell of the connector over the end of the wire.
3. Strip the insulation from each wire to expose 6.4 mm (0.25
inch) of the conductor. Leave the shield wire long enough to
be attached to the interface device. If the connector is
installed for the NT300D, the shield wire should be connected
to signal ground (pin 5).
4. Select a grommet which provides a snug fit around the cable
jacket and feed the grommet over the end of the wire. Each
connector kit includes four grommets with different internal
diameters. Push the grommet down the cable, just enough to
allow for easy soldering of the wires to the connector.
5. Feed the coupling ring over the end of the wire.
6. Solder each wire to the appropriate socket on the connector
based on the pin-out information in Table 2-3 and diagrams in
Figure 2-19.

Installation 2
1: R+ 7: CONTACT CLOSURE B (CONFIGURABLE)

2: T- 6: CONTACT CLOSURE A (CONFIGURABLE)
3: T+ 5: SIG GND
4: R-
P1 SOLDER
SIDE
SHOWN
1: R+ 7: RESERVED
2: T- 6: RESERVED
3: T+ 5: SIG GND
4: R-
P2
Figure 2-19 Serial Port Connector Configuration
* Note – The diagrams in Figure 2-19 show the solder side of the
connector body as observed from the rear of the CDU.
Table 2-3 Serial Port Pin-out Requirements
Pin # Port 1 (RS-422) Port 2 (RS-422)

1 Receive + Receive +
2 Transmit – Transmit –
3 Transmit + Transmit +
4 Receive – Receive –
5 Signal Ground Signal Ground
6 Contact Closure A Reserved
7 Contact Closure B Reserved

2 Installation
* Note – If the shield wire is used, insulate the wire with shrink tubing or
tape to prevent it from shorting out with other wires.
7. Slide the O-ring over the end of the connector.

8. Slide the grommet up the wire to the base of the connector.
9. Squeeze the two cable grips around the grommet while
slipping the back shell over the grommet.
10. Lock the back shell of the connector to complete the
installation.
11. Connect the cable to the appropriate port on the back panel of
the NT300D after installing the connector.

Installation 2
2.7 Contact Closure Outputs

Port 1 also can be used as a relay contact closure output when
configured properly. The options are to output a speed log signal or to
output a signal to an external alarm. You can select the option to use
from the SETUP/ I/O /CC OUTPUT screen. For more information, see
section 9.13.5, page 9-65.
Pin #6 (Contact Closure A) and pin #7 (Contact Closure B) are used
for the contact-closure output. The pulse-width for the contact closure
is fixed at 100 milliseconds. The relay contacts can handle a load of
up to 150 milliamperes at normal input voltage (12 or 24 Volt). A
serial resistor is required to limit current, as shown in Figure 2-20.
NT300D ARPA, Other

Contact Closure A Pull-up
PPNM A Pin #6
Resistor
PPNM B Pin #7
Contact Closure B
Figure 2-20 Serial Port 1 Contact-Closure Connections
I Caution – Do not connect a source load to these pins, exceeding the

150 mA ratings of the internal relay.
Since the output is a solid-state relay closure, the external equipment

must provide the battery and battery return. Use only DC power.

2 Installation
2.7.1 Speed Log Output

The NT300D can output a 200 pulse-per-nautical-mile ( PPNM) speed
log signal based on the GPS-measured speed over ground (SOG). The
availability of this signal is a significant alternative to conventional
log output, since the signal is very accurate and immune to many of
the errors that typically plague speed logs.
The speed log signal is automatic. When the NT300D computes a
valid GPS position solution and measures a SOG greater than 0.3
knots, the receiver outputs the speed log signal.
2.7.2 External Alarm Output

The contact closure output can drive an external alarm system, if any
of the alarms enabled in the SETUP/ ALARMS screen is triggered. This
contact can be configured to be normally open (NO) or normally
closed (NC). For more information, see section 9.13.5, page 9-65.

Installation 2
2.8 Connecting a Power Source

The NT300D is supplied with a 2-meter (6-foot) power cable with an
in-line fuse holder. The power cable attaches to the connector on the
back panel marked PWR. The other end of the power cable must be
connected to a breaker or fuse panel. Figure 2-21 illustrates a correct
power connection.
Rada
Radar
Breaker or
Fuse Panel
Red
Black
+ - NT300D
Ground
DC Power Lug
Minimum 18 gauge wire

suitable for marine use
Ground Lug
HULL
Figure 2-21 Correct Power Connection
I Caution – The fuse protects the unit against high currents. It is

therefore necessary to use the proper power cable supplied by
Trimble when installing the NT300D.

2 Installation
I Caution – Do not connect the power cable to another device’s power

connector or splice into another power cable which has a heavy load
at its end.
I Caution – All power leads from the electrical supply to the NT300D
must be a minimum of 18 gauge wire. If long distances are required
between the breaker/fuse panel and the NT300D, larger wire (16-14
gauge) should be used to minimize voltage drop. All wire
interconnection should be carefully crimped or soldered and
individually insulated with shrink sleeving or tape. Never just twist
wires together and wrap them with electrical tape.

Installation 2
2.8.1 Connecting the Ground

The NT300D utilizes the latest techniques for reducing the generation
of radio-frequency interference (RFI). This requires connecting the
NT300D to a good ground connection, see Figure 2-22.
Nut
Flatwasher
Crimp or
Solder Lug
Flatwasher
To hull or grounding plate
Ground Lug
Figure 2-22 Ground Connection
On a wood or fiberglass boat, connect to a grounding plate of at least

3 x 3 inches. If no grounding plate exists, connect to the engine block
or a through-hull fitting. On a metal boat, simply make a good
connection to the hull. Bolt the ground wire securely to the grounding
plate with a lock washer, and crimp or solder the lug connection.
2.8.2 Installing a Fuse

Install the fuse, included in the installation kit, in the fuse holder
located in the power cable. The fuse must be a quick-acting (fast-
blow), 3 Amp fuse rated for a minimum of 32 VDC. Use a 3AG (1/4-
inch x 1.25-inch) style fuse.

2 Installation
2.8.3 Power Sources

The NT300D is compatible with both 12 and 24 VDC, negative
ground, DC power systems. It utilizes a floating power supply which
isolates its serial ports and antenna connector from the power source.
The NT300D system is protected against high currents as well as
reversed polarity via the in-line fuse. At maximum loading, the unit
uses 12W.
2.8.4 Power Interruptions

If the power source fails to provide the NT300D with power, the
receiver immediately turns off. If the power outage is shorter than 45
seconds, the unit automatically turns on again without the user having
to press the [POWER] key. If the power outage is longer than 45
seconds, the user has to press the [POWER] key on the front panel to
turn on the unit.

Installation 2
2.9 Installing the Smart Card Reader

The Smart Card Reader (SCR) can be purchased as an option to the
NT300D. It can be used for data logging and to store waypoint and
route records. This section describes the installation of the SCR. A
complete guide how to use the SCR is found in Chapter 10, Operating
the SCR.
2.9.1 Choosing a Location

The SCR does not have to be installed at the same location as the
NT300D. The limitation in the distance between the units is the
3-meter (10-foot) cable included with the SCR. It is not recommended
to install the SCR in an exposed location, since salt water can damage
the unit. Be sure to place the unit in a location where sufficient cable
slack exists between the SCR and the NT300D.
* Note – Always turn off power before connecting the SCR to the
NT300D. The NT300D cannot detect the SCR if the SCR is not
installed before turning on power.
2.9.2 Routing and Connecting the SCR Cable

Carefully consider the cable route before installing the Smart Card
Reader. The cable can under no circumstances be cut, spliced,
shortened, lengthened or modified in any way to avoid possible signal
loss and/or damage to the Smart Card Reader or the NT300D.
When routing the cable, avoid putting in kinks that could cause signal
loss. Take care to avoid routing the cable where it is subject to
extreme heat or damaging fluids such as gasoline and oil. To prevent
the cable from swinging loosely, secure it to stanchions or bulkheads
using plastic cable ties or cable clips, as appropriate. If the cable must
pass through a bulkhead or rest against any surface where chafing
might occur, wrap the cable with protective shielding such as rubber
or canvas.

2 Installation
I Caution – Turn off the power on the NT300D before connecting the
SCR cable.
I Caution – The Smart Card Reader cable is a high-quality cable,

designed to transmit high-speed signals with absolute accuracy. Do
not cut, splice, shorten, or lengthen your Smart Card Reader cable in
any way, as this may affect the reliability of your Smart Card Reader
and possibly cause damage to both the Smart Card Reader and your
NT300D. Any modification to the cable voids the warranty.
2.9.3 Installation Options

Detailed instructions for installing your Smart Card Reader are
included with the unit. Figure 2-23 through Figure 2-25 show several
methods of mounting your Smart Card Reader. The basic installation
is the same for any chosen location, see Figure 2-23.
Figure 2-23 Smart Card Reader Basic Installation

Installation 2
The Smart Card Reader may be mounted horizontally or vertically
(see Figure 2-24).
Figure 2-24 Smart Card Reader Mounting

2 Installation
You may also choose to install the Smart Card Reader in a flush-
mount, see Figure 2-25, using the optional Flush Mount Kit (P/N
80976-00) available from your authorized Trimble dealer.
Figure 2-25 SCR Flush Mounting Option (P/N 80976-00)
* Note – Make sure that the drain holes located on the underside of the
Smart Card Reader are facing downward to avoid possible water
damage to the unit. This is especially important if the unit is mounted
in a location where it could be hit by spray, such as on a flybridge.
If you choose to flush-mount the Smart Card Reader on a vertical

surface, it is important to mount the unit right side up. The side of the
Smart Card Reader with the door latch is the top side. If you choose to
flush-mount the Smart Card Reader on a horizontal surface, such as a
console, be sure to choose a location well away from spray and rain.

Installation 2
2.10 Installing the Remote Station

The Remote Station, also called the Dual Head Option, is available
for use with the NT300D. The Remote Station is used as a fully
functional second navigation station. This section describes the
installation of the Remote Station. For operational information, see
Chapter 11, Operating the Remote Station.
2.10.1 Choosing a Location

The primary NT300D station is connected to the secondary Remote
Station via a 30-meter (100 ft.), 7-conductor cable, which is supplied
with the option. The maximum cable length supported is 300 meters
(1000 ft.). If a non-Trimble cable is used, an extra I/O connector (P/N
21998) is required.
2.10.2 Routing the Remote Station Cable

When routing the cable, avoid putting kinks that could cause signal
loss. Take care to avoid routing the cable through areas where it is
subject to heat or damaging fluids such as gasoline and oil. To prevent
the cable from swinging loosely, secure it to sanchions or bulkheads
using plastic cable ties or cable clips, as appropriate. If the cable must
pass through a bulkhead or rest against any surface where chafing
might occur, wrap the cable with protective shielding such as rubber
or canvas.
I Caution – Turn off the power on both receivers before connecting the
Remote Station cable.
2.10.3 Installing the Remote Station CDU

For Remote Station CDU installation instructions, see section 2.3,
page 2-7.

2 Installation
2.10.4 Connecting the NT300D to the Remote Station

The NT300D GPS and Remote Station are interfaced together using
the serial ports. The primary NT300D can be connected using either
serial port. The secondary NT300D (Remote Station) must be
connected to Port 1. The remaining serial port on the Remote Station
is not usable and all NMEA outputs to external devices must be
terminated at the primary NT300D. Figure 2-26 shows the
connections between the receivers.
Combined
GPS/Beacon
Antenna
Primary NT300D Remote Station
Remote Station Cable
SCR
Figure 2-26 NT300D to Remote Station Connections

Installation 2
Table 2-4 shows the pin-out table for the Remote Station cable. If you
are using the cable provided by Trimble, you only have to install a
connector on the User Terminated end. If you are providing your own
cable, you will need to install connectors on both ends of the cable.
Please see section 2.6.2, page 2-26 for information about terminating
the Remote Station cable.
Table 2-4 Remote Station Pin-out Requirements
Wire User
Overmolded ConXall Pin Insulation ConXall Pin Terminated
End Number Color Number End
Receive + 1 Orange 3 Transmit +
Transmit - 2 Brown 4 Receive -
Transmit + 3 Yellow 1 Receive +
Receive - 4 Violet 2 Transmit -
Shield and 5 Drain Wire Not
Ground Connected
Shield and 5 Blue 5 Ground
Ground
Not 6 Black 6 Not
Connected Connected
Not 7 Red 7 Not
Connected Connected
* Note – The communication channel between the primary NT300D

and the secondary Remote Station uses a high-speed proprietary
protocol. Other devices cannot be parallel with this connection.
* Note – The Combined GPS/Beacon antenna must be connected to

the primary NT300D unit.

2 Installation
* Note – The SCR must be connected to the primary NT300D unit.
* Note – Serial Port 2 on the Remote Station is not usable.

Installation 2

3 Getting Started
This chapter shows you how to:
• Use the keys on the front panel.
• Display screens and menus.
• Work with data-entry fields.
• Respond when status or error messages are displayed on
screens.
You should read through this chapter to learn basic skills before
attempting to use the NT300D.
* Note – Before proceeding, see Document Conventions on page xxix

to review the document conventions used in this manual.

Getting Started 3
3.1 Working with the Front Panel

The front panel (see Figure 3-1) is the interface to the NT300D. It
displays information to the user and the user can control the receiver
by using the keypad. Each time a key is pressed, you will hear a beep
to acknowledge the action (except when Power is pressed). You have
the option of turning the key beep on or off in the SETUP/ALARM 2
screen. For more information, see section 9.7.2, page 9-27.
2 7 8
1
9
3 6 5
Figure 3-1 NT300D Front Panel Controls

3 Getting Started
3.1.1 Power Key (1)

The [Power] key turns the NT300D on and off. To turn on the receiver,
press [Power] until a beep is heard. The NT300D always displays the
title screen when turned on. To turn off the receiver, press and hold
[Power] for several seconds, until the NT300D shuts down. This delay
helps to prevent the operator from unintentionally turning off the
power.
The receiver includes an installation mode which contains some of
the more critical setup data. To enter the installation mode, turn the
power off by pressing [Power] (see instructions above). Turn the power
on again by holding down [Setup] and pressing [Power].
For information about how the NT300D handles power interruptions,
please see section 2.8.4, page 2-35.
I Caution – Be sure to place the receiver in Normal mode after

changing parameter settings in Install mode. Using the receiver in
Install mode is not recommended. To place the receiver in Normal
mode, first power the unit Off, and then power the unit On again.
3.1.2 Display (2)

The display is a backlit, 320 x 240 pixel LCD screen. The display
features a wide viewing angle and adjustable contrast and brightness,
allowing the display to be viewed under all lighting conditions.

Getting Started 3
3.1.3 Brightness and Contrast (3)

The key controls the brightness of the display back light. To

increase the brightness, press the right side of . To decrease
the brightness, press the left side of .

The key controls the display contrast. To darken the display,

press the right side of . To lighten the display, press the left
side of .
The brightness and contrast settings are retained in battery-backed
memory.
3.1.4 Numeric Keypad (4)

Keys to are used to enter numeric data in various screens.
completes operations in many fields and moves the cursor between
fields on some screens, such as the WAYPOINT and ROUTE screens.
3.1.5 Cursor Controls (5)

The cursor control keys, also called arrow keys, control the movement
of the cursor on those screens where a cursor is present. The cross-
hair cursor on the PLOT screen can also be moved with the arrow
keys. If you press two of the arrow keys simultaneously, the cross-hair
cursor can be moved diagonally across the screen.

On the SETUP, WAYPOINT, and ROUTE screens, and are used to
move the cursor between the items you wish to change. It also is used

to toggle between North and South, and East and West in the Latitude
and Longitude fields. You can use and to edit or change a given
item.

3 Getting Started
3.1.6 Function Keys (6)

The keys labeled [SETUP], [STATUS], [NAV], [SAVE], [WAYPT], and [USER]
are used to access various NT300D functions. These keys are
described in Table 3-1.
Table 3-1 Function Keys
Key Description
[SETUP] Accesses various screens which permit the user to
customize the operation of the NT300D.
[STATUS] Displays information about the operating status of the
NT300D.
[NAV] Brings up the first of two basic navigational screens
(NAV1). A second press of this button brings up the
second navigational screen ( NAV2). Continued
pressing of this button toggles between these two
screens. These screens provide navigation guidance.
[SAVE] Displays current position and time and gives the user
a choice, by softkey selection, of entering this position
into the waypoint library or automatically selecting this
position as an emergency destination, the man over-
board function.
[WAYPT] The GPS waypoint and route libraries are accessed
from this key. You can view, add, and edit waypoint
and route records using this function key. Each time
this key is pressed, you toggle between the waypoint
and route libraries.
[USER] Displays the three USER screens. Each USER screen
displays the selection of navigation information you
choose from the SETUP/USER screens. You can
toggle through the screens automatically or in round-
robin fashion by pressing [USER] multiple times.

Getting Started 3
3.1.7 Softkeys (7) and MENU Key (8)

The [MENU] key turns the menu on and off for screens with softkey
options. The action associated with each menu action is performed by
pressing the softkey immediately to its right. The five keys located to
the right of the LCD display, labeled with horizontal lines, are called
softkeys. They are called softkeys because the names of the menu
functions associated with each key change depending on the menu
currently displayed on the screen.
When a menu hides information you want to see on a screen, you can
press [MENU] to close the menu and view the entire screen. Pressing
[MENU] multiple times toggles the menu on and off.
Some screens include more than five menu options. In these cases, the
last option listed in the first menu is called More. You can press More
to display the next page of menu options. When you press More from
the last page of menu options, the first menu page is displayed again.
* Note – Throughout this manual, the terms softkey option and menu
option are used interchangeably.
In many cases, you may need to press two or more softkeys to display
the screens at the lowest level of the screen hierarchy. You can
recognize the last screen at the bottom of a screen hierarchy by the
presence of a Return softkey as the last menu option. You can press
Return to move back to the previous screen in the hierarchy.
The menu displayed on the last screen at any point in the hierarchy
contains softkey options for performing one or more actions. When
you select a softkey to perform an action, OK and Cancel are
sometimes displayed in the menu just before the action is performed.
This gives you a chance to press OK to complete the action or Cancel
to abort the action.

3 Getting Started
3.1.8 PLOT Key (9)

The key displays the PLOT screen which shows the vessel’s
current position superimposed over a Mercator Grid. The appearance
of the PLOT screen can vary depending on the layers of detail you
display on the screen.
The up and down arrows on the sides of increase or
decrease grid magnification. Lower magnifications give you a wider
view of the area surrounding the vessel at the cost of reducing detail.
Higher magnifications display more detail and give you a closer look
at the waypoints, hazards, and other details surrounding the vessel.
3.2 Working with Screens and Menus

A screen consists of a title bar, a mode indicator, a presentation
window and in many cases a menu. Figure 3-2 identifies the elements
of a screen.
Title Bar Mode Indicator
Menu
Presentation
Window
Figure 3-2 Screen Elements

Getting Started 3
3.2.1 Title Bar

All NT300D screens have a title bar (located at the top of the screen)
to identify the data displayed on the screen and to show your location
within the NT300D system of screens.
3.2.2 Mode Indicator

The current operating mode is indicated on the right side of the title
bar. Valid mode indicators are DGPS, GPS, and DR (Dead
Reckoning). Table 3-2 describes the mode indicators.
Table 3-2 Mode Indicators
Indicator Description
GPS GPS satellite information is used to compute position
solutions.
DGPS GPS satellite information and differential corrections
are used to compute position solutions.
DR Speed and heading information are used to compute
position solutions.
The NT300D always starts in DR mode and switches to GPS mode

after acquiring enough satellites to compute GPS position solutions.
I Caution – If the Mode Indicator shows DR, the position displayed on

the PLOT and NAV screens is not a satellite position solution and, as
such, may not have the accuracy you require.
3.2.3 Presentation Window

The Presentation Window displays the information for the selected

screen. If the window is separated into different areas, you can press
to move the cursor between the areas. works only when the areas
are not reserved for display-only fields.

3 Getting Started
3.2.4 Menu
Many NT300D screens have menus of softkey options which you can
display by pressing [MENU]. When the number of softkey options
exceeds the space available on a menu, More is available for
displaying additional menu pages.
One of two actions usually occurs when you press the softkey
associated with a menu option—another screen is displayed or some
action is performed. In some cases, windows or prompts may be
displayed on the screen when the NT300D requires additional
information before performing an action.

Getting Started 3
3.3 Entering Data in Fields

The various types of fields displayed on NT300D screens include:
• Display-only fields
• Multiple-choice fields
• Numeric fields
• Alphanumeric fields
Press or to select the field you want to edit. Table 3-3 shows
you how to work with the various types of fields appearing in the
Presentation Window.
Table 3-3 Field Types
Field Type Description

Display-only Displays status information only. The cursor
cannot enter display-only fields.

Multiple-choice Two or more predefined options are displayed
for you to select. Use or to highlight and

select the option you want to choose, and press
to complete the entry.

Numeric Numeric data ( through ) is accepted in the
field. Press to move the cursor under the
numeral position you want to enter or change
and press the applicable numeric key. Repeat

this step for each one of the numbers you want
to enter or change. Press to complete the

entry. In some screens, the numeric value is
changed by using and .
Alphanumeric Alphabetical or numeric data is accepted in the
field. For more information, see section 3.3.1,
page 3-11.

3 Getting Started
3.3.1 Editing Alphanumeric Fields

Move the cursor to the alphanumeric field using or , and use
or to move the cursor to the characters you want to enter or

change. Table 3-4 gives instructions for entering and changing

characters in an alphanumeric field. Press to complete the entry. In
some screens, the alphanumeric value is changed by using or .
Table 3-4 Alphabetical Character Entry
Character Description
Space Press the bottom softkey one or more times until you
see the menu with Space.
0-9 Press any combination of numeric keys on the
keypad.
A-Z Use the menu to select an alphabetical character.
Initially, the menu divides the alphabet into five menu
options listing five or more characters. Select the
option containing the letter you want to enter to
display a new menu with individual characters, then
select the softkey for the letter you want to enter.
If you want to change several letters at the end of the alphanumeric

field, press Erase to End.

Getting Started 3
3.4 Working with Messages

Several types of messages are displayed on the screen, including
confirmation messages, status messages, warning messages, and error
messages.
3.4.1 Confirmation Messages

Confirmation messages are displayed when you are about to perform
an action which could result in loss of data, influence the reception of
GPS or DGPS signals, or influence your ability to navigate on the
current route.
A confirmation message appears on the screen in the form of a small
rectangular window centered on the display screen. A menu is also
displayed with softkey options for cancelling or continuing the action.
Figure 3-3 shows a screen with a confirmation message and menu.
Figure 3-3 Sample Confirmation Message

3 Getting Started
3.4.2 Status Messages

Many of the status and navigation screens display status messages to
show the current operation performed by a monitored function, Figure
3-4.
Figure 3-4 Sample Status Message
Status messages are also displayed when some alarms are triggered.
A menu is displayed when the status message appears with an OK
softkey option for acknowledging the condition. If you do not press
OK to acknowledge the message, a time-out condition eventually
occurs and the message is cleared from the screen.

Getting Started 3
3.4.3 Warning Messages

Warning messages are displayed like confirmation messages. The
messages appear when you attempt to perform an action which the
NT300D is designed to prevent. For example, the NT300D displays a
warning message if you attempt to clear the area of memory
containing the waypoint and route libraries if the vessel is currently
navigating along a route, Figure 3-5. The message is displayed
because the deletion of the route records would make it impossible for
the vessel to continue cruising on the active route.
Figure 3-5 Sample Warning Message
The message is displayed with a single softkey for acknowledging the

warning. Read the warning message carefully, and press OK to clear
the message from the screen.

3 Getting Started
3.4.4 Error Messages

The error messages begin with the word ERROR and display a short
descriptive statement to identify the problem, Figure 3-6.
Acknowledge the message by pressing OK.
Figure 3-6 Sample Error Message

Getting Started 3

4 Configuration
This chapter gives general guidelines for configuring the NT300D and
refers you to information in other chapters for detailed configuration
instructions.
The chapter is divided into a series of configuration topics. You may
or may not need to configure the parameters described by these
topics, depending on your hardware configuration and the specific
needs of your navigation application.
* Note – Before attempting to configure the NT300D, you should

already be familiar with the basic skills covered in Chapter 3, Getting
Started, and the document conventions introduced in Document
Conventions on page xxix.
4.1 Working with the SETUP Screens

Detailed instructions for configuring the NT300D parameters are
included in Chapter 9, Setup. Figure 9-1 on page 9-2 displays the
SETUP screen hierarchy.
Most parameters on the SETUP screens can be configured while the
vessel is navigating along a route. However, access to several menu
options in the SETUP screen hierarchy are protected to prevent
unintentional changes to configuration parameters. These menus are
displayed with a grey background in Figure 9-1. The NT300D must be
placed in Install mode to access these protected menu options. For
detailed instruction, see section 3.1.1, page 3-3.

Configuration 4
4.1.1 Changing Setup Parameters

Each SETUP screen presents a set of options which you can select and
edit using the basic skills introduced in Chapter 3, Getting Started.
Refer to this information if you have difficulty displaying screens or
editing data.
4.1.2 Resetting the NT300D to Factory Default Values

The NT300D is shipped from the factory with all parameters set to
factory default values. If you are configuring your NT300D for a new
navigation application, you may want to reset all parameters to their
factory default values by clearing the applicable memory partition.
Options for resetting the NT300D memory are found in section 9.14,
page 9-70.
4.1.3 Display Options

The following NT300D display options are available:
• Display of Local time or UTC time (see section 9.3, page 9-6)
• Unit for Distance can be presented on screens in nautical
miles, kilometers, or miles (see section 9.3, page 9-6)
• Information displayed on screens can be presented in five
different languages: English, German, French, Spanish, and
Icelandic (see section 9.12, page 9-53)
• Screens can be displayed in normal or reversed video (see
section 9.3, page 9-6)

4 Configuration
4.2 Configuring I/O Ports

In order to communicate with external equipment connected to the
serial ports, you have to configure the I/O ports. You have to select the
appropriate input and output protocols (NMEA, RTCM, TSIP, or
TAIP) for the I/O ports and the correct baud rate. For detailed
instructions, see section 9.13, page 9-54.
I/O port 1 also supports a contact closure option for use as an alarm
output or a speed log signal. For more information, see
4.3 Configuring GPS Parameters

All GPS parameters are set in the SETUP/GPS screen. The default
GPS parameter settings are suitable for most applications. When the
receiver is operating in GPS mode, the GPS indicator is displayed in
the upper right corner of all NT300D screens. For detailed

Configuration 4
4.4 Configuring the Internal Beacon Receiver

The built-in, dual-channel beacon receiver can be setup in three
different radiobeacon signal acquisition modes: Auto Range, Auto
Power, and Manual. When the receiver is operating in DGPS mode,
the DGPS indicator is displayed in the upper right corner of all
NT300D screens. For detailed information about configuring the
internal beacon receiver, see section 9.8, page 9-32.
* Note – Although the NT300D features an internal beacon receiver the

unit can also accept RTCM corrections from an external source of
corrections. Those corrections are received on one of the two NT300D
serial ports.
To input RTCM corrections to one of the NT300D ports, the external

device and NT300D must use the same protocol and communication
parameters. RTCM SC-104 corrections are accepted if the NT300D
serial port is configured for RTCM input. For details on setting up the I/
O ports, see section 9.13, page 9-54.
4.5 Datum Selection

The NT300D includes support for over 180 datums. You also have the
option of creating your own datum based on a three or seven
parameter transformation. For detailed information, see section 9.4.1,
page 9-13.
4.6 Choosing a Coordinate System

The NT300D can display positions in geographical coordinates
(latitude and longitude), UTM, HK80 (Hong Kong Grid), or Decca
coordinates. For detailed information, see section 9.5.1, page 9-21.

4 Configuration
4.7 Navigation and Status Screens

The NT300D features several navigation and status screens for
monitoring the navigation of the vessel and the status of various
parameters. The navigation screens include the PLOT screen, NAV1
and NAV2 screens, and three USER screens. Among other things, the
STATUS screens include GPS, DGPS, and navigation status
information.
The PLOT screen displays a Mercator Grid with an icon representing
the vessel displayed in the grid. Various layers of detail can be
displayed on the PLOT screen to show the vessel’s predicted position,
XTE boundaries, waypoints and hazard waypoints, the vessel’s
heading, and other useful information. For details, see section 5.2,
page 5-3.
The NAV1 high-way screen displays a graphic depiction of the vessel's
relationship to the intended course. The intended course, represented
by the center lane in the graphic, is based on the active route and
current leg. Other useful indicators such as XTE and COG are
displayed to help keep the vessel navigating on the track. For details,
see section 5.3.1, page 5-8.
The NAV2 screen is a graphic depiction of a compass, showing both
the vessel’s COG and bearing to the next waypoint. A XTE bar is also
displayed on the NAV2 screen. For details, see section 5.3.2,
page 5-11.
Three screens—USER1, USER2, and USER3—display up to four lines
of navigation information defined by the user. For details, see section
5.4, page 5-13.
The STATUS screens display the current GPS, DGPS, DR, and
navigation status. The STATUS screens also allow you to plot
navigation data. For details, see Chapter 8, Status.

Configuration 4
4.8 Waypoint and Route Libraries

The NT300D features a Waypoint library for storing up to 500
waypoints and a Route library for storing up to 50 routes. The current
waypoint and route libraries are stored in NT300D memory.
Waypoint records and Leg records can be created as the vessel is
cruising or in advance. Existing records, created on earlier cruises,
can be retrieved from PC Cards using the optional Smart Card Reader
(SCR). For detailed information, see Chapter 6, Waypoints,
Chapter 7, Routes, and Chapter 10, Operating the SCR.
4.9 Dead Reckoning (DR)

The NT300D automatically switches to dead reckoning mode when
GPS information is not available. In DR mode, the NT300D can use an
external source of speed and heading information to compute
positions, or use speed and heading values entered using the keypad.
The DR indicator is displayed in the upper right corner of all screens
when the receiver is operating in dead reckoning mode. For detailed
4.10 Setting Alarms

Three Alarm screens are provided for triggering audible alarms and
messages when a GPS or navigation event occurs. For detailed
4.11 Using the Track Recorder

The NT300D track recorder records time and position information
while the vessel is navigating along a route. Four additional
navigation variables also can be stored. For instance, you can set the
track recorder to record the vessel’s COG, SOG, XTE, and beacon
status.

4 Configuration
4.12 Using a SCR (Smart Card Reader)

The optional Smart Card Reader (SCR) allows the NT300D to use PC
Cards to store track recorder data and Waypoint and Route libraries.
The SCR can accept one or two Type I PC Cards, one Type II PC
Card, or a combination of one Type I PC Card (Slot A) and one Type
II PC Card (Slot B only). For more information, see Chapter 10,
Operating the SCR.
4.13 Remote Station Operation

The Remote Station can be installed as an option to the NT300D. It is
a fully functional second navigation station that operates
independently and shares GPS, waypoint, route, and navigation data.
For more information, see Chapter 11, Operating the Remote Station.

Configuration 4

The NT300D PLOT screen displays a graphical Mercator Grid for
plotting the path of the vessel, its predicted position, XTE boundaries,
and waypoints and hazards.
The NT300D provides a graphical Compass display with options for
displaying Heads Up and North Up. User-defined navigation displays
are provided for monitoring key navigation functions and other
nautical operations. Another useful navigation screen provides a high-
way depiction of the vessel’s relationship to the intended course. This
screen also includes other user selectable navigation data.
This chapter shows you how to display and use the NT300D
Navigation displays. Instructions are also included for creating an
Emergency Destination Waypoint for man-overboard situations.
Waypoints and routes are briefly discussed in this chapter, however a
thorough discussion about these topics is included in Chapter 6,
Waypoints and Chapter 7, Routes.
* Note – Before attempting to use the Navigation Displays, review the

document conventions introduced in Document Conventions on page
xxix, and the basic skills introduced in Chapter 3, Getting Started.

Navigation Screens 5
5.1 Navigation Screens

Three keys are provided for displaying navigation and guidance
information (see Table 5-1).
Table 5-1 Navigation Screen Keys
Key Action
Displays a graphical PLOT screen on a Mercator
Grid.
[NAV] Displays the NAV1 and NAV2 screens. The NAV1
screen presents a Highway display, and the NAV2
screen presents a Steering Indicator and Cross-
Track error (XTE) display.
[USER] Displays the USER 1, USER 2, and USER 3
screens. You can configure these screens to display
the navigation and guidance information important
to your application.

5.2 PLOT Screen

The PLOT screen displays the vessel’s navigation information on a
Mercator Grid, Figure 5-1.
Figure 5-1 PLOT Screen
This information includes the current position of the vessel, track

history, waypoints and legs of the active route, XTE lines, COG
indicator, and an indicator for displaying the predicted path of the
vessel. Initially, the vessel is displayed in the center of the screen. As
the vessel approaches the edge of the screen, the vessel is
automatically centered in the screen again.
You can depict the vessel on the PLOT screen using one of several
icons, including: a marker icon, power boat icon, sail boat icon, or the
default heading indicator. The heading indicator always points to the
same direction as the COG of the vessel. The rest of the icons always
point to one direction. For more information, see section 9.3,
page 9-6.
* Note – GPS cannot provide a stable COG when the vessel is not
moving. Therefore, the COG indicator moves around at random.

5.2.1 Scaling the Mercator Grid

The Mercator Grid can be scaled up and down by pressing the right or

left side of . To increase the scale (zoom out), press the

right side of . To decrease the scale (zoom in), press the left
side of .
The longitude scale is displayed on the top of the screen, and the
latitude scale is displayed on the left side of the screen. Across the
bottom of the screen is the distance scale. The scale factor changes
value when you zoom in and out. The scales range from 0.001 to 1000
Km, Nm, or Mi. To change the unit of measure, see section 9.3,
page 9-6.
5.2.2 Panning the Mercator Grid

Use the arrow keys to pan the grid when part of the vessel's track is no
longer displayed on the PLOT screen. When you press one of the
arrow keys, a cross-hair cursor appears, and you can move the cursor
with the arrow keys.
Press Return to Boat when you are finished examining the track to
automatically pan back to the grid position where the boat icon is
located.

5.2.3 PLOT Screen Hierarchy

Figure 5-2 shows the menu options accessible from the PLOT screen.
PLOT
FULL RETURN
LAYERS GOTO
ROUTE TO BOAT
XTE
MORE TRACK WPTS RETURN
LINES
PRED
MORE COG RETURN
POS
Figure 5-2 PLOT Screen Hierarchy

Table 5-2 describes the menu options.
Table 5-2 PLOT Menu Softkey Options
Softkey Description
Layers Displays the Layers menu with options for turning
PLOT screen layers on and off. For detailed
instructions, see section 5.2.4, page 5-6.
Full Automatically scales the screen to display the full
Route route.
Go To Use the cursor to point at a preferred destination, then
press Go To create a single waypoint route. The
NT300D deactivates the current route and creates a
waypoint in the waypoint library. The navigation
screens now guide you to the selected destination.
Return Moves the vessel position icon to the center of the
to Boat PLOT screen. This option is displayed only if the cursor
is present on the screen. See section 5.2.2, page 5-4.
5.2.4 Displaying PLOT Layers

The PLOT screen contains several layers of detail and features. These
layers can be turned on and off independently to control the amount
of information displayed on the screen. You turn the layers on and off
by pressing the softkey associated with the layer you want to control.
Layer options remain highlighted when selected from the menu to
show you which layers are turned on.

Table 5-3 describes the Layer options.

Table 5-3 Layer Softkey Options
Softkey Description
XTE Lets you display a layer with the cross-track error
lines (XTE) boundary. The XTE lines are only displayed if
you have a route activated. The XTE boundary is
defined in the SETUP/ALARM 2 screen and is
illustrated on the PLOT screen with dashed lines. For
more information, see section 9.7.2, page 9-27.
COG The COG indicator shows a graphical representation
Indicator of true direction of the vessel’s motion over ground
(COG).
Track Displays your actual track on the grid as a series of
dots, allowing you to compare the actual course made
good with the planned route.
Wpts Lets you toggle between displaying all waypoints in
the area or only the Hazard and Bell waypoints. The
actual location of the waypoint is shown on the grid
with a diamond icon and an adjoining waypoint record
number.
Pred Pos The predicted position path is computed based on the
vessel’s current position, speed, course, and
acceleration. The predicted position is displayed as a
sequence of imaginary position fixes extending ahead
of the vessel for a user selectable time period of up to
999 seconds. Two settings control predicted path
computations:
The TIME LIMIT value for the HAZARD ALARM sets
the number of seconds used to predict ahead. A
maximum value of 999 seconds can be set. To set the
TIME LIMIT variable, see section 9.7.2, page 9-27.
The value entered for the COG/SOG averaging
determines how quickly the predicted position
responds to velocity changes. To set the
COG/SOG AVG variable, see section 9.5, page 9-19.

5.3 NAV Screens

The NAV1 and NAV2 screens show graphical presentations of
navigation information.
5.3.1 NAV1 Screen

The NAV1 screen (see Figure 5-3) is a graphic depiction of the vessel's
relationship to the intended course.
Figure 5-3 NAV1 Screen
The intended course, represented by the center lane in the graphic, is

based on the active route and current leg. The number and name of the
next waypoint in the active route is listed in a window in the upper
half of the NAV1 screen.
The circular symbol in the middle of the display represents the
vessel's position. The arrow anchored to the symbol is the vessel's
current COG relative to the destination. When the arrow points toward
the next waypoint, the vessel is headed in the correct direction. GPS
cannot provide a stable COG when the vessel is not moving.
Therefore, the COG indicator moves around at random.

The right or left offset of the symbol signifies the cross-track error.
When the symbol is located in the middle of the center lane, the
vessel is on course, and the cross-track error is near zero. As long as
the symbol is positioned in the center lane, the vessel is within the
XTE limit. To set the XTE limit, see section 9.7.2, page 9-27. The
relative velocity of the vessel is represented by the rate of advance of
the horizontal lines located outside the center lane.
* Note – The width of the grid always may seem the same, but the
actual distance represented on the screen is selectable. The width of
the center lane is equal to twice the cross-track error limit.
If the NT300D is configured for automatic waypoint switching, the

receiver automatically switches to the next waypoint and updates the
waypoint on the NAV1 display as the vessel reaches each waypoint in
the route. If manual switching is enabled on the SETUP/NAV screen,
you must manually advance the NT300D to the next leg as each
waypoint is passed. For more information, see section 7.6, page 7-13.

NAV1 data fields
The NAV1 display includes four display-only fields, one located in
each corner of the display. You can define the types of data displayed
in these fields.
To display the data types:
1. Press the menu option Change Display to select data types.
Table 5-4 describes the optional NAV 1 fields.
2. Press Next Field or Previous Field, or use and to
select the field you want to change.
3. Select the desired data type (see Table 5-4) by pressing
Change Field. Each time you press Change Field, the data

type changes until it scrolls to the end of the list. You can also
use and to perform the same function.
Table 5-4 Optional NAV1 Data Fields
Option Description
COG Course Over Ground
SOG Speed Over Ground
HDG Heading (from external heading source)
SPD Speed (from external speed source)
CTW Course to Waypoint
XTE Cross-Track Error
DTW Distance to Waypoint
DTD Distance to Destination
VMG Velocity Made Good
DMG Distance Made Good
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to select data types for all four fields.
5. Press Done to save your changes.

5.3.2 NAV2 Screen

The NAV2 screen (see Figure 5-4) is a graphic depiction of a compass,
showing both the vessel's course over ground (COG) and the bearing
to the next waypoint (CTW). The NAV2 screen also serves as a graphic
indicator for showing cross-track error (XTE).
Figure 5-4 NAV2 Screen
The compass consists of an inner ring and an outer ring. The COG
indicator (arrow) is shown in the inner ring; the CTW indicator
(arrow) is shown in the outer ring. When these two indicators are
aligned, the vessel is on course. The current COG measurement is
shown numerically in the center of the compass.
Toggling Compass Display Mode

The default orientation of the compass is North up, where North (0°)
is positioned at the top of the graphic. Press Head Up and North Up
to toggle the compass between Head Up and North Up.

The Steering Indicator
The steering indicator, labeled XTE, shows the vessel's cross-track
error. The black arrow shows the current cross-track error in relation
to the intended course. The intended course is indicated with a white
arrow labeled 0 and is always located in the center of the steering
indicator. When the cross-track error indicator is positioned directly
under the white arrow, the vessel is on its intended course. The scale
of the cross-track error steering indicator is listed next to the upper-
right corner of the indicator and varies depending on the actual XTE
of the vessel.

5.4 USER Screens

The NT300D features three user-configurable screens: USER1,
USER2, and USER3. Each screen displays two or four lines of
information in large, clear characters. The NT300D can automatically
sequence between the screens, or you can press [USER] to toggle
through the screens. The information displayed on each screen and
the sequencing interval are defined under the SETUP/USER screen,
Figure 5-5. For more information, see section 9.10, page 9-42.
Figure 5-5 USER1 Screen

5.5 SAVE Key

The [SAVE] key on the front panel serves two functions—it saves the
current position as a waypoint record, or it creates and activates an
emergency destination (man over-board) waypoint record.
When you press [SAVE], the current position and time are captured and
displayed on the SAVE screen (Figure 5-6).
Figure 5-6 SAVE Screen
You can press [SAVE] again to update the captured position until you
are satisfied with the result. Now you can select a menu option to
store the captured position.
The position will be stored in the datum selected in the SETUP/GPS/
DATUM screen.

Table 5-5 describes the menu options.

Table 5-5 Save Softkey Options
Softkey Description
Copy to Saves the captured latitude, longitude, and time in
Waypoint the next available waypoint record and displays the
new waypoint on the WAYPOINT screen. The time
of the captured position is automatically recorded
as the name of the waypoint. You can rename the
waypoint and change the icon by manually
entering those fields.
Emergency For emergencies such as man over-board
Location situations, the current position is saved in waypoint
record 500, the active route or destination
waypoint is canceled, and the emergency waypoint
destination is activated. Detailed instructions are
given below.
5.5.1 Creating an Emergency Destination Waypoint

When you press [SAVE] and Emergency Waypoint, the NT300D
immediately performs the following actions:
• The current position is saved in waypoint record 500 and is
assigned the name, EMERSAVE.
• The active route or destination is immediately canceled.
• The waypoint recorded in record 500 is activated as the next
waypoint destination.
• The NAV1 screen is displayed with waypoint 500
(EMERSAVE) indicated as the next destination.
All of the navigation displays now reflect the emergency waypoint as
the intended destination.

5.5.2 Cancelling an Emergency Destination Waypoint

You can cancel the Emergency Destination Waypoint in the ROUTE
screen by pressing Cancel Route.

6 Waypoints
A waypoint represents a position which is used for navigation.
Waypoints are normally user-defined, and can represent a special
location, a destination, a mid-point in a route, or the location of a
hazard. A waypoint can be a saved location, manually entered, or
calculated by entering distance and bearing relative to an existing
waypoint.
The NT300D features an extensive waypoint library consisting of 500
waypoints. Each waypoint in the library has a unique record number.
In addition to the waypoint position, the waypoint record includes a
name of up to 12 characters and a graphical icon to visually depict the
waypoint type. Once a record is added to the library, you can assign
the waypoint as a destination or a point along the route to a
destination. The waypoint library allows you to search for a particular
waypoint and sort the waypoints by number, name, or type.
This chapter shows you how to create, edit, and use waypoints. For
information about using waypoints in routes, see Chapter 7, Routes.
* Note – Before attempting to use the WAYPOINT screens, review the


Waypoints 6
6.1 WAYPOINT Screen Hierarchy

Figure 6-1 shows the WAYPOINT screen hierarchy.
WAYPOINT
FIND PAGE PAGE

GOTO MORE
EMPTY UP DOWN
FROM TO
HERE ERASE
SCR SCR
Figure 6-1 WAYPOINT Screen Hierarchy

6 Waypoints
6.2 The Waypoint Library

The WAYPOINT screen (see Figure 6-2) is divided into three parts:
• Query fields
• Waypoint fields
• Menu options
To display the waypoint library, press [WAYPT] once or twice until the
WAYPOINT screen is displayed. You can then press to move
between the Query and Waypoint fields.
Query
Fields
Menu
Waypoint
Fields
Figure 6-2 WAYPOINT Screen

Waypoints 6
6.2.1 Query Fields

The three query fields can be used to sort the records in the library, or
search the library for a specific record. You can use one of the fields
when sorting, and one or more fields when searching for a record.
Table 6-1 describes the possible ways of using the Query fields.
Table 6-1 WAYPOINT Query Fields
Field Description
NUMBER Sorts the waypoint records in numerical order when
the field is selected and no number is typed in the
field, or finds the record number matching the
numbers you type.
NAME Sorts the waypoint records in alphabetical order when
the field is selected and no characters are typed in the
field, or finds the closest match to the full or partial
record name you type in the field.
TYPE Sorts the records by type when the field is selected, or
displays the first occurrence of the record type you
select. For a definition of record types, see Table 6-3,
page 6-6.
The NAME field accepts partial record names. For example, if you are
looking for the waypoint GOLDEN GATE, you type G to display the
first record beginning with the character G. If GOLDEN GATE is not
the waypoint displayed, you can type an O after the G to narrow the
search and display the first record beginning with GO. Continue until
the waypoint you are searching for is found.

6 Waypoints
6.2.2 WAYPOINT Fields

The WAYPOINT fields in the lower part of the screen display three
consecutive records from the WAYPOINT library. Each waypoint
record includes fields for a three-digit record number, a record name,
waypoint coordinates, and a record type icon. The selected waypoint
record is marked with an arrow in the left margin. Table 6-2 describes
the record fields.
Table 6-2 WAYPOINT Record Fields
Field Description
NUM/ Displays the three-digit number assigned to the
NAME waypoint record and the user-defined name of the
waypoint. The waypoint number (1–500) is
permanently assigned to the record, regardless if
record fields are changed at a later date to define a
different record. You can enter up to 12 characters to
assign a waypoint name. To learn how to enter
waypoint names, see section 3.3, page 3-10.
POSITION Displays the coordinates of the waypoint. The
coordinates can be entered automatically using
Save or entered manually in this screen. The
coordinates are displayed and entered in the
coordinate system selected in the SETUP/NAV/
COORDS screen. To learn how to enter a position,
see section 3.3, page 3-10.
TYPE Selects one of several icons to visually classify the
type of waypoint record (lighted buoy or hazard). For
detailed descriptions of the waypoint icons, see
Table 6-3.

Waypoints 6
Table 6-3 describes the TYPE icons.
Table 6-3 WAYPOINT Icons
Icon Description
A blank box is used to identify turning points or progress
waypoints along a route where there is no particular aid
to navigation.
A fish icon marks a favorite fishing spot.
An anchor icon marks a destination or favorite

anchorage.
A bell icon identifies a non-lighted navigational bell buoy.
The Bell waypoints are always displayed on the PLOT
screen.
A lighted buoy icon identifies a lighted buoy, lighthouse,
or lighted range marker. This could also be used for red
channel markers.
An unlighted buoy icon identifies an unlighted
navigational aid, channel marker, stake, or tower. This
could also be used for green channel markers.
The skull and crossbones marks a hazard or could be
used to mark a shallow area or any spot where caution
should be exercised. The Hazard waypoints cannot be
used in a route. The Hazard waypoints are always
displayed on the PLOT screen.
* Note – The only restrictive waypoint is the Hazard. When a waypoint

is classified as a hazard, it cannot be used in a route. If the hazard
alarm is turned on, the NT300D sounds an alarm whenever the vessel
approaches a hazard waypoint.

6 Waypoints
6.2.3 Menu Options

The menu options in the WAYPOINT screen are described in Table
6-4.
Table 6-4 WAYPOINT Screen Softkeys
Softkeys Description
Go To Activates the selected waypoint record as your
next destination. The NT300D guides you to the
destination after you make the selection.
Find Empty Find the next available blank record. This is a
useful feature when you need to define a new
waypoint since it searches for and finds the next
blank waypoint record in the library.
Page Up View previous page of waypoint library.
Page Down View next page of waypoint library.
Here Writes current position of the NT300D in the
selected waypoint record. It is important to select
the waypoint record where you want to store the
waypoint information before pressing Here. If
waypoint information already exists in the selected
record, the Here function overwrites the
information. After the position is stored, the cursor
remains in the waypoint record, ready for you to
press Here again. In this manner, you can
continue to store a position for this waypoint until
you get it exactly right.
When you are satisfied with the position stored,
you can enter a name and select an icon for the
waypoint. The position is stored in the datum
selected in the SETUP/GPS/DATUM screen.

Waypoints 6
Table 6-4 WAYPOINT Screen Softkeys (Continued)
Softkeys Description
Erase Erases the current waypoint record. Be sure to
select the waypoint you want to erase before
pressing Erase. The selected record is identified
by the arrow in the left margin next to the field.
Once you erase a waypoint, the data associated
with the record number is deleted and cannot be
recovered. The waypoint cannot be erased if it is
used in the active route.
From SCR Copies the waypoint and route library from the
SCR to the internal memory of the NT300D. When
you perform this action, the existing waypoint and
route library is deleted from the NT300D. The
deleted data cannot be recovered.
To SCR Copies the waypoint and route library from the
NT300D to the SCR.
M Warning – Here writes the coordinates of the current position to the

selected record, overwriting any existing coordinates. Be sure to
select a blank record when entering a new waypoint using this
method.
M Warning – Be sure to select the correct waypoint to erase. Once

erased, the waypoint data associated with the record is permanently
deleted and cannot be recovered.
M Warning – Retrieving waypoint and route libraries from a memory

card overwrites the records in the existing waypoint and route libraries
stored in NT300D memory.

6 Waypoints
6.3 Creating Waypoint Records

There are five methods for adding waypoints to the library:
• Manual entry of waypoint coordinates. Find an empty record,
and manually enter the position, name, and icon. For details,
• Saving your present position using Here. For details, see
section 6.2, page 6-3.
• Pressing [SAVE] and Copy to Waypoint to add your present
position as a waypoint. For details, see section 5.5, page 5-14.
• Pressing [SAVE] and Emergency Location to add your
present position as waypoint record number 500. This is a
special method of creating waypoints in the event of man
over-board situations. For details, see section 5.5, page 5-14.
• Defining a new waypoint using the range and bearing from
another waypoint record. For details, see section 7.3.4,
page 7-10.
Once a waypoint is entered in the library, it may be selected as a
destination or added to a route. Routes are discussed in the next
chapter.
* Note – If you switch datum in the SETUP/GPS/DATUM screen,

previously stored waypoints will remain in the datum where they were
originally stored. Only the waypoints saved after the datum switch will
be stored in the new datum.
M Warning – Here writes the coordinates of the current position to the

selected record, overwriting any existing coordinates. Be sure to
select a blank record when entering a new waypoint using this
method.

Waypoints 6
* Note – [SAVE] is often used to enter waypoints to mark a route since

you don't have to switch back and forth between the NAV screen and
the WAYPOINT screen to enter the waypoint. Remember to rename
the waypoints when convenient, since it is difficult to recognize them
later if the names of the records are assigned their creation time.
6.4 Editing Waypoint Records

You can edit and change all information in an existing waypoint
record. Find and select the waypoint you want to edit. To learn how to
enter coordinates and waypoint names in the fields, see section 3.3,
page 3-10.

6 Waypoints
6.5 Saving and Retrieving Waypoints to/from a PC Card

The NT300D can store the entire contents of a waypoint and route
library to a file on a PC Card for archival purposes. Later when the
waypoint and route data is needed, the stored data can be transferred
from the memory card back to the NT300D. Use From SCR and To
SCR to perform these operations.
* Note – To use this feature, the optional Smart Card Reader must be
installed with the NT300D, and a PC Card must be loaded in one of
the card slots. When you use the card for the first time, you must
format it before storing waypoints.
M Warning – Retrieving waypoint and route libraries from a memory

card overwrites the records in the existing waypoint and route libraries
stored in NT300D memory.
The advantages of storing waypoints and routes on a PC Card are

among others:
• Safe backup of waypoints and routes.
• Assure no one else edits your waypoints and routes when you
are not present.
• Waypoint and route libraries can be stored on several memory
cards and shared among a fleet of vessels.
Waypoint and Route libraries can be backed up (saved) on memory
cards and retrieved from cards using the Smart Card Reader.

Waypoints 6
6.5.1 Saving a Waypoint and Route Library to a Card

To save the waypoint and route library to a memory card:
1. Display the WAYPOINT/TO SCR screen.
2. Press or to select Slot A or Slot B.
The entire Waypoint and Route Library is copied from the
NT300D to the memory card and stored in a file called
WXXXXXXX.WPT, where the letter W is followed by the
current date and a file index (for example W031597A.WPT).
3. You can rename the file by using and to place the

cursor at the point where you wish to enter a character. Then,
use and to select the desired character for that space.
Repeat the process to enter the rest of the file name.
6.5.2 Retrieving a Waypoint and Route Library

Be sure to save any information stored in the existing NT300D
Waypoint and Route library before retrieving the data from the
memory card. The retrieval action completely overwrites the records
in the existing Waypoint and Route Library and replaces them with
the records in the file you are retrieving.
To retrieve a waypoint and route library from a memory card:
1. Display the WAYPOINT/FROM SCR screen.
2. Press
or to select Slot A or Slot B. A list of files with
the *.WPT file extension is displayed on the screen.
3. Press or to select the file. The selected file has a gray
background.
4. Press OK to copy the contents of the file to the Waypoint and
Route Library on the NT300D.

7 Routes
A route consists of a series of waypoints arranged in a sequence
designed to lead to a specific destination. The imaginary lines
connecting the waypoints are called legs. The entry leg is the
imaginary line from your present position to the first waypoint in the
route. The entry leg could change every time a route is activated, if
the starting position is different.
The NT300D route library supports 50 routes, and each route can be
named and assigned a type. When a route is activated, the NT300D
guides you along the route. In addition to standard route functions,
the NT300D also includes a Search and Rescue function, which
allows the operator to easily create complex search routes.
This chapter shows you how to create, edit, and activate routes using
the NT300D. In addition, you are given instructions for using the
Search and Rescue feature.
* Note – Before attempting to use the ROUTE screens, review the


Routes 7
7.1 ROUTE Screen Hierarchy

The hierarchy of the ROUTE screens is shown in Figure 7-1.
ROUTE
USE AS CANCEL ADVANCE

EDIT MORE
ROUTE ROUTE ONE LEG
INSERT ADD ERASE RETURN
SEARCH
ERASE REVERSE MORE
ROUTE
Figure 7-1 ROUTE Screen Hierarchy

7 Routes
7.2 The Route Library

To display the route library, press [WAYPT] once or twice until the
ROUTE screen is displayed. You can store up to 50 different routes in
the route library. The routes are numbered 1 through 50. When a route
is selected, an arrow appears in the left margin to mark the selected
route. Figure 7-2 shows the ROUTE screen.
Figure 7-2 ROUTE Screen – The Route Library
The ROUTE screen displays summarized information for each route.

Each route record has four fields. You can edit the information in the
Name and Type field. To edit the information included in the route,
you have to display the ROUTE/EDIT screen.

Routes 7
Table 7-1 describes the fields on the ROUTE screen.
Table 7-1 ROUTE Record Fields
Field Description
NAME Accepts up to 12 characters when entering the record
name for the route. For detailed information about
changing this field, see section 7.3, page 7-6.
FROM Displays the record number of the first waypoint in the
route. For detailed information about changing this field,
TO Displays the record number of the final waypoint
(destination) in the route. For detailed information about
changing this field, see section 7.3, page 7-6.
TYPE Lets you select a graphical icon to visually identify the
type of route. For descriptions of the icons, see Table 7-3
on page 7-9.
The ROUTE and LEG fields in the top part of the ROUTE screen
display the active route and leg. Leg 0 represents the entry leg, from
your current position to the first waypoint in the route. If no route is
activated, the ROUTE and LEG fields display N/A (Not Available).
Once you enter a route into the library, the route can be used to travel
to your destination or it can be reversed to return to the waypoint
where you began.

7 Routes
The menu in the ROUTE screen contains several softkey options.

Table 7-2 explains the softkey options.
Table 7-2 ROUTE Screen Softkey Options
Softkey Description
Use as Route Activates the selected route.
Cancel Route Deactivates the selected route.
Advance One Proceed to the next leg in the active route.
Leg
Edit Create or edit a route. For details, see section
7.3, page 7-6 and section 7.4, page 7-11.
Erase Erase a route from the route library. For
details, see section 7.5, page 7-12.
Reverse Reverses the selected route.
Search and Creates a Search and Rescue route. See
Rescue section 7.8, page 7-14.
For detailed information about using the softkeys, see remaining

sections of this chapter.
* Note – The NT300D can store up to 500 legs. Each leg is the distance
traveled between two waypoints. These legs may be assigned to
routes in any manner. For example, you may have 50 routes each with
10 legs, you may have only one route of 500 legs, or any other
combination.

Routes 7
7.3 Creating Routes

The NT300D offers two methods for entering routes into the library.
• Manual entry of waypoints.
• Using range and bearing to define the legs.
* Note – can be used to move to the next field or skip fields when
editing the route.
Figure 7-3 shows the ROUTE screen with the menu displayed.
Figure 7-3 ROUTE Screen – Creating Routes

7 Routes
7.3.1 Manual Entry of Waypoints and Legs

1. Select a blank route with or .
2. Press Edit to display the ROUTE/EDIT screen (Figure 7-4).
The ROUTE/EDIT screen shows the record number of the
route being created and provides fields for assigning legs to
the route.
Figure 7-4 ROUTE/EDIT Screen, Manual Entry

Routes 7
To create a route:
1. Enter the first waypoint number using the numeric keypad.
2. Press or to select GC (Great Circle) or RL (Rhumb
Line).
The NT300D lets you specify the type of navigation
calculation independently for each leg in the route. Routes
with a mix of Great Circle and Rhumb Line legs are known as
composite routes. The default type of navigation calculation
is set on the SETUP/NAV screen. For more information, see
3. Press to access the next leg. After defining each leg, the
NT300D automatically calculates range and bearing for the
leg and displays these values in the RANGE and BEARING
fields.
4. Repeat the previous three steps until you finish entering every
leg in the route.
As each leg is defined, the NT300D automatically calculates
the total route distance and displays this distance in the
ROUTE DISTANCE field. The total route distance excludes
the entry leg (00).
5. Press Return to return to the ROUTE screen.
The legs are now assigned to the route. The next step in
creating a route is to assign a route name and type.
7.3.2 Assigning Route Record Names

The Route Name is edited from the ROUTE screen. Move the cursor

to the NAME field. You can enter both alphabetic and numeric

characters in the NAME field and complete the entry by pressing .
Press again to exit Route Edit mode. For more information, see

7 Routes
7.3.3 Selecting Route Types

The Route Type is edited from the ROUTE screen. Move the cursor to
the TYPE field. The field blinks when selected. Press or to
select the icon you want to assign to the route.

Table 7-3 gives descriptions of the various route icons. Complete the
entry by pressing .
Table 7-3 Route Icons
Icon Description
A blank box is used for turning points or progress
waypoints along a route where there is no particular aid
to navigation.
A fish icon marks a fishing route.
An anchor icon marks a destination or favorite

anchorage.
A bell icon identifies a non-lighted navigational bell buoy.
A lighted buoy icon identifies a lighted buoy, lighthouse,

or lighted range marker. This could also be used for red
channel markers.
An unlighted buoy icon identifies an unlighted
navigational aid, channel marker, stake, or tower. This
could also be used for green channel markers.
The skull and crossbones marks a hazard or could be
used to mark a shallow area or any spot where caution
should be exercised.

Routes 7
7.3.4 Creating Routes Using Range and Bearing

When creating a route, the NT300D allows you to define a leg by
entering range and bearing in the RANGE and BEARING fields in the
ROUTE/EDIT screen. When using this method of entering legs, the
NT300D automatically creates a waypoint and enters the coordinates
of the new waypoint in the first empty waypoint record. The
waypoints are created without a name. When the route is created, you
should add names to the waypoints included in the route. For details,
see section 6.4, page 6-10. The waypoint number is automatically
displayed in the WYPT field on the ROUTE/EDIT screen.
The position will be stored in the datum selected in the SETUP/GPS/
DATUM screen.

7 Routes
7.4 Editing Route Records

Any route leg record field in the Route library can be edited. For
instructions, see section 3.3, page 3-10.
The menu options on the ROUTE/EDIT screen are explained in Table
7-4.
Table 7-4 ROUTE/EDIT Menu Options
Option Description
Insert Inserts a new leg between two waypoints in the route.
Select the Leg record immediately below the location
where you want to insert the new Leg record. Then
press Insert.
Add Moves the cursor to the last leg in the route and allows
you to add a new waypoint at the end of the route.
Erase Erases the selected Leg from the route.
* Note – Be sure to select the correct leg to erase. If you erase a leg by
accident, you can insert it into the route again using Insert. Then
enter the data for the leg.

Routes 7
7.5 Erasing Routes

Make sure to select the route you want to erase, before pressing Erase
on the ROUTE screen. The selected record is marked with an arrow on
the left side of the record, see Figure 7-2. Once erased, the route can
not be recovered. Erasing the route does not erase the waypoints
forming the route.
If the route that you want to erase is active and used for navigation,
you can not erase it. If you want to ease the active route, you have to
first deactivate the route with Cancel Route.
M Warning – Make sure you select the right route to erase. Once
erased, the route can not be recovered.

7 Routes
7.6 Advancing Legs in a Route

The NT300D lets you control the action occurring when the vessel
arrives at a given waypoint in a route and whether or not, the route is
automatically advanced to the next leg upon arrival. You can control
the waypoint switching feature from the WPT SWITCHING field on
the SETUP/NAV screen. For more information, see section 9.5,
page 9-19.
When you activate a route, the NT300D always guides you to the first
waypoint in the route. If you activate a route midway through a trip,
the current leg indicated by the NT300D may not agree with your
intended destination. In this case, you need to manually advance the
route legs until the active leg corresponds to the intended leg. If
manual leg switching is selected on the SETUP screen, you also need
to manually advance legs within the route as each leg is completed.
Press Advance One Leg to advance to the next leg of the route. The
active leg is now listed in the LEG field at the top of the ROUTE
screen.
Verify that the active leg agrees with your intended destination. If the
active leg is not correct, press Advance One Leg again until the
active leg agrees with the intended destination.
I Caution – If Auto Waypoint Switching mode is selected in the

SETUP/NAV screen, the NT300D could advance more than one leg at
a time when Advance One Leg is pressed. If this occurs, switch to
Manual switching mode and use Advance One Leg to manually
advance to the intended leg.

Routes 7
7.7 Saving/Retrieving Routes to/from a PC Card

The NT300D can store the entire contents of a waypoint and route
library to a file on a PC Card for archival purposes. Later when the
waypoint and route data is needed, the stored data can be transferred
from the PC Card back to the NT300D. For detailed information, see
7.8 Search and Rescue

A search route is a pattern of waypoints arranged in lanes, which,
when followed, provide thorough coverage of an area. Figure 7-5
shows an example of a search route.
PLOT DR
40˚21'E
26'E
22˚35'N
3 8
7 12
11
2
5
6
9 10
30'N
13
Figure 7-5 PLOT Screen – Search and Rescue
Search routes are useful for locating lost equipment and are crucial in
rescue operations. The NT300D features a search and rescue function,
which creates a search route based on a single starting position. Once
the search pattern parameters are entered, the NT300D automatically
creates a route with the necessary waypoints.

7 Routes
To create a search route:

1. Press Search Route to display the screen shown in Figure 7-
6. The screen shows seven fields for defining the search
pattern.
Figure 7-6 ROUTE/SEARCH & RESCUE Screen
2. Select the FIRST WAYPOINT/POSITION field.

3. Enter the waypoint record number or the coordinates of the
starting position using the numeric keys.
* Note – The NT300D lets you enter the waypoint record number of the
starting position or the latitude and longitude of the starting position, if
a waypoint number does not apply.
4. Select the FIRST BEARING field, and enter the bearing for
the search using the numeric keypad.
* Note – The bearing establishes the direction from the starting

position for the search.

Routes 7
5. Select the FIRST TURN field, and choose CW (clockwise) or
CCW (counter clockwise) for the first turn. The first turn
establishes the direction of the search pattern.
6. Select the NUMBER OF LANES field, and enter the number
of lanes in the search pattern.
A search pattern is a series of lanes, identical in length and
width, arranged to provide thorough coverage of an area.
Each lane in the pattern requires two waypoints. The number
of lanes in the pattern must be less than the number of
available/not used waypoint records in the NT300D library.
The number of lanes cannot exceed 99.
7. Select the PATTERN field, and choose the ADJ (adjacent) or
ALT (alternate) search pattern.
The pattern selection controls how the lanes are ordered in
the search route, see Figure 7-7. In an adjacent pattern, the
lanes are ordered sequentially (1,2,3,4,5...), which requires
tighter turns. In an alternate pattern, the lanes are not ordered
sequentially (1,4,2,5,3...), which allows for wider turns.
Choose a pattern based on conditions and your current
situation.

7 Routes
ADJACENT
2 3 6 7 10
1 4 5 8 9
ALTERNATE
2 6 3 7
1 5 4 8
Figure 7-7 Search & Rescue Lane Patterns
8. Select the LANE SPACING field, and Enter the spacing

between lanes in the search pattern.
The lane spacing selection controls how thoroughly an area is
searched. A narrow lane spacing results in a fine pattern,
while a wider lane spacing results in a coarser pattern.
9. Select the LANE LENGTH field, and enter the lane length for
the search pattern.
The lane length, in conjunction with the lane spacing and
number of lanes, control the amount of area is covered by the
search pattern.
10. Press Create Route to allow the NT300D to create a search
route based on the parameters entered in the ROUTE/SEARCH
& RESCUE screen. This option automatically creates the
necessary waypoints and a search route and automatically
adds the records to the libraries.
11. Activate the search route like any other route.

Routes 7

8 Status
The STATUS screens offer you quick access to the operating status
and parameter settings of the NT300D. The status displays cover the
following items:
• GPS status
• DGPS corrections and reference station data
• Dead reckoning (DR) information
• Navigation status
• Internal beacon receiver status
• Smart Card Reader (SCR) information
• Track plotting functions
This chapter outlines the structure of the status displays and describes
how to access and interpret each of these displays. Some parameters
viewed in the STATUS screens are set on the SETUP screens. For more
information, see Chapter 9, Setup.
* Note – Before attempting to use the STATUS screens, you should


Status 8
8.1 STATUS Screen Hierarchy

The hierarchy of the STATUS screens is shown in Figure 8-1.
STATUS
GPS DGPS DR NAV More
INFO Return
Return
DGPS RTCM Ref Beacon

Message Return
Data Station Almanac
Return
Beacon Graph SCR More

Receiver
Execute Return
Show Incr Decr

Cursor Return
Latest Scale Scale
Figure 8-1 STATUS Screen Hierarchy

8 Status
8.2 STATUS Screens Summary

Table 8-1 summarizes the functions of the screens and softkey options
in the STATUS screen hierarchy.
Table 8-1 STATUS Screens Summary
Screen Description
STATUS Displays the time and date, port input/output
protocols, number of unused waypoint
records, number of unused route records,
and messages showing receiver status.
STATUS/GPS Displays GPS satellites tracked, SNRs,
DGPS status and DOP values.
STATUS/DGPS Displays reference station data and
corrections.
STATUS/DR Displays dead reckoning information when
the receiver is operating in DR mode.
STATUS/NAV Displays information about the active route.
STATUS/BEACON Displays the beacon receiver operating
RECEIVER status.
STATUS/GRAPH Displays graphs of data stored by the track
recorder.
STATUS/SCR Displays the SCR’s PC Card status.

Status 8
8.3 STATUS Screen

Figure 8-2 shows the STATUS screen.
Figure 8-2 STATUS Screen
Table 8-2 describes the information displayed on the screen.

Table 8-2 STATUS Fields
Field Description
First line Displays the time and date.
INPUT Displays the input function of Port 1 and 2.
OUTPUT Displays the output function of Port 1 and 2.
WAYPOINTS Displays the total number of waypoint records
available and the number of unused records in the
Waypoint Library.
ROUTES Displays the total number of route records
available and the number of unused records in the
Route Library.
Bottom lines Displays messages indicating the current status of
the NT300D. The available messages are
described in Table 8-3.

8 Status
Table 8-3 describes the messages displayed on the bottom lines of the
screen.
Table 8-3 Message on bottom lines of STATUS screen
Message Description
DOING POSN FIX The NT300D is computing GPS or DGPS
positions.
PDOP TOO HIGH PDOP is too high to compute a GPS or DGPS
position.
NO USABLE No satellite are available for computing
SATS positions.
NO GPS TIME No GPS time is available yet. Displayed when
first starting the receiver.
1 USABLE SATS One satellite is available for computing
positions.
2 USABLE SATS Two satellites are available for computing
positions.
3 USABLE SATS Three satellites are available for computing
positions.

Status 8
8.4 STATUS/GPS Screen

The STATUS/GPS screen (Figure 8-3) is a satellite plot showing the
position (elevation and azimuth) of GPS satellites relative to the
vessel's position. The vessel is located in the center of the plot, and
the vessel's current COG is shown by an arrow in the center of the
plot.
Figure 8-3 STATUS/GPS Screen
* Note – GPS cannot provide a stable COG when the vessel is not
moving. Therefore, the COG indicator moves around at random.

8 Status
The satellites are displayed as numbered icons as shown on the plot in

Figure 8-3. These icons are displayed in the plot:
• Solid black circle icons represent satellites which are
currently tracked by the NT300D and used in the position
solution.
• Half-filled circle icons represent tracked satellites which do
not meet the requirements established by GPS operating
parameters (masks) and are therefore not used in the position
solution.
• Hollow circle icons represent satellites visible above the
elevation defined by the Elevation Mask that are currently not
tracked by the NT300D.
The outer ring of the plot represents the horizon (0° elevation), and
the inner rings represent elevations of 30° and 60° respectively.
Satellites in the center of the plot are directly overhead (90°
elevation). The azimuth of a satellite is represented by the location of
the satellite's icon relative to the bearings (N, E, S and W) shown on
the plot.
The table located to the right of the plot shows the PRN number of the
satellites, the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) for each tracked satellite,
and whether or not the tracked satellites are considered in the position
solution. A U in the USE column indicates that data from the satellite
is currently included in the GPS position solution. A D indicates that
the NT300D is receiving differential correction data for the satellite.
* Note – A SNR of 45 dB-Hz is considered good and a SNR of

39 dB-Hz is considered acceptable. A satellite signal with a SNR
lower than 33 dB-Hz is considered too noisy for inclusion in a position
solution. To learn how to set the SNR mask, see section 9.4,
page 9-8.

Status 8
8.4.1 STATUS/GPS/INFO Screen

The STATUS/GPS/INFO screen (Figure 8-4) displays GPS and DGPS
status information.
Figure 8-4 STATUS/GPS/INFO Screen

8 Status
Table 8-4 describes the status information displayed on the screen.

Table 8-4 STATUS/GPS/INFO Fields
Field Description
MODE Displays the current GPS operating mode:
• 3 dimensional: 3D position fixes only
• 2 dimensional: 2D position fixes only
• Automatic-3D: Auto GPS, currently doing 3D fixes
• Automatic-2D: Auto GPS, currently doing 2D fixes
TIME Displays the time when GPS position fix is
computed.
PDOP Displays the Position Dilution of Precision value.
HDOP Displays the Horizontal Dilution of Precision value.
VDOP Displays the Vertical Dilution of Precision value.
DIFF Identifies the current DGPS operating mode:
• On: DGPS position fixes only
• Auto-On: DGPS position fixes if RTCM corrections
available or GPS position fixes if no RTCM
corrections are available
• Off: GPS position fixes only
VERSION Displays the GPS receiver firmware version.
MESSAGE Displays the GPS system message. This is
transmitted from the GPS satellites and can be used
by the system provider to relay information about the
GPS system.
For detailed information about the DOP values, see section 1.3.2,
page 1-7.

Status 8
8.5 STATUS/DGPS Screen

The STATUS/DGPS screen (Figure 8-5) displays information about
the current reference station in use.
Figure 8-5 STATUS/DGPS Screen

8 Status
Table 8-5 describes the status information displayed on the screen.

Table 8-5 STATUS/DGPS Fields
Field Description
REFSTA ID Displays the IALA station number assigned to
the radiobeacon. If an external source of
corrections is used, this number reflects the ID
number assigned to the reference station.
FREQ Identifies the frequency of the radiobeacon, in
kHz.
TYPE Identifies the type of RTCM SC-104 messages
received from the reference station ( RTCM
SC-104 Record Types 1-16).
AGE Shows the elapsed time, in seconds, since the
NT300D received the last RTCM correction
message.
STATION HLTH Shows the health status of the DGPS reference
station:
• Good - Station OK to use.
• RS not working - Reference station DGPS
corrections invalid.
• RS not monitored - No monitoring of DGPS
corrections available. Search for new
reference station, or use corrections with
caution.
F Tip – For a listing of IALA radiobeacons and DGPS reference stations,

see Appendix C, DGPS Radiobeacons.

Status 8
8.5.1 STATUS/DGPS/CORRECTIONS Screen

The STATUS/DGPS/CORRECTIONS screen (Figure 8-6) displays
detailed information about the corrections received from the reference
station. Data for two satellites is displayed on the screen at once. You
can display data for additional satellites by pressing More.
Figure 8-6 STATUS/DGPS/CORRECTIONS Screen

8 Status
Table 8-6 describes the information displayed in the fields.

Table 8-6 STATUS/DGPS/CORRECTIONS Fields
Field Description
SV Identifies the PRN of the satellites for which corrections
are received.
CORR Displays the range correction for the satellite, in meters.
PRC Displays the pseudorange correction for the satellite, in
meters.
RRC Displays the range-rate correction for the satellite, in
meters per second.
ACCY Displays the accuracy of the pseudorange correction for
the satellite, in meters.
AGE Displays the age of the pseudorange correction for the
satellite, in seconds.
For more detailed information, see section 1.3, page 1-5.

Status 8
8.5.2 STATUS/DGPS/RTCM MESSAGE Screen

The STATUS/DGPS/RTCM MESSAGE screen (Figure 8-7) lists the
contents, date, time and source (station ID) of the last RTCM Type 16
message received. This message can include notification of IALA
station failures, severe warning conditions, and other useful
information for mariners.
Figure 8-7 STATUS/DGPS/ RTCM MESSAGE Screen
The NT300D displays the following message when no RTCM Type 16

message has been received since the receiver was powered on.
No RTCM Message Received

8 Status
8.5.3 STATUS/DGPS/REF STATION Screen

The STATUS/DGPS/REF STATION screen (Figure 8-8) shows the
reference station identification number, the distance to the reference
station, and the coordinates of the reference station. The data
displayed on the screen is acquired from RTCM Type 3 records
broadcast from the reference station.
Figure 8-8 STATUS/DGPS/REF STATION Screen

Status 8
8.5.4 STATUS/DGPS/ALMANAC Screen

The IALA radiobeacons may transmit a beacon almanac message
(RTCM Type 7) which contains the identity (transmission range,
frequency, position, and health status) of neighboring differential
beacons. Press More to display additional reference stations.
Figure 8-9 STATUS/DGPS/ALMANAC Screen

8 Status

Table 8-7 STATUS/DGPS/ALMANAC Fields
Field Description
BEACON ID Shows the reference station ID number.
FREQ Shows the beacon frequency, in kHz.
LAT Shows the reference station latitude.
LON Shows the reference station longitude.
RANGE Shows the beacon transmission range. To set the
unit of measurement, see section 9.3, page 9-6.
DIST Shows the distance from the vessel to the beacon.
To set the unit of measurement, see section 9.3,
page 9-6.
HEALTH Shows the reference station health. The available
messages are:
• Normal - OK to use reference station.
• Unmonitored - No monitoring of corrections.
Search for another reference station if this is
your active station, or use with caution.
• Do Not Use - Do not use reference station.
• No Information - No health message received in
the beacon almanac message.

Status 8
8.6 STATUS/DR Screen

The STATUS/DR screen (Figure 8-10) displays DR status when the
NT300D is operating in DR mode. To setup the DR parameters, see
Figure 8-10 STATUS/DR Screen

8 Status

Table 8-8 STATUS/DR Fields
Field Description
DR START Displays the last GPS position update, in latitude
POSITION and longitude coordinates.
START TIME Displays the time when Dead Reckoning operation
began, in hours, minutes, and seconds.
TIME IN DR Displays the cumulative time since Dead
Reckoning operation began, in hours, minutes,
and seconds.
DISTANCE IN Displays the distance traveled since the start of
DR Dead Reckoning operation.
SPD/HDG Displays the source of speed and heading for
SOURCE Dead Reckoning operation.
DR SPEED Displays the current Dead Reckoning speed.
DR HEADING Displays the current Dead Reckoning heading.

Status 8
8.7 STATUS/NAV Screen

The STATUS/NAV screen (Figure 8-11) is divided into two parts. The
top part of the screen displays information about the active route and
leg. The bottom part displays information about the final destination.
Figure 8-11 STATUS/NAV Screen

8 Status

Table 8-9 STATUS/NAV Fields
Field Description
ROUTE Displays the record number of the active route.
LEG Displays the record number of the current route
leg.
NEXT Displays the record number of the next waypoint
WAYPOINT in the route.
DISTANCE Displays the distance to the next waypoint in the
route.
CTW Displays the course (heading) to the next
waypoint in the route.
ETA Displays the estimated time of arrival at the next
waypoint in the route.
TIME TO GO Displays the time remaining before reaching the
next waypoint in the route.
FINAL Displays the record number of the destination
DESTINATION waypoint.
DISTANCE Displays distance to the destination waypoint.
ETA Displays the estimated time of arrival at
destination waypoint.
TIME TO GO Displays the time remaining before reaching the
destination waypoint.
* Note – The ETA and TIME-TO-GO calculations are based on the

current course and speed of the vessel and could change if the speed
and/or course of the vessel is changed.

Status 8
8.8 STATUS/BEACON RECEIVER Screen

The STATUS/BEACON RECEIVER screen (Figure 8-12) contains
information about the operating status of the internal dual-channel
beacon receiver.
Figure 8-12 STATUS/BEACON RECEIVER Screen

Table 8-10 STATUS/BEACON RECEIVER Fields
Field Description
First field Displays the radiobeacon tracking channels:
Channel 0 and Channel 1.
MODE Displays the current radiobeacon tracking mode:
Power, Distance, or Manual. For detailed
FREQ Displays the frequency, in kHz, tracked by the
beacon channel.
RATE Displays the data modulation rate of the
radiobeacon signal, in bits per second.
SNR Displays the signal-to-noise ratio of the
radiobeacon signal, in dB-Hz.

8 Status
Table 8-10 STATUS/BEACON RECEIVER Fields

(Continued)
Field Description
LEVEL Displays the strength of the radiobeacon signal, in
dBµV/m.
EYE Displays a Trimble proprietary index which
PATTERN identifies the quality of the signal lock. An index of
15 indicates an exceptionally good signal. An
index of 2 indicates a weak signal that could suffer
from bit errors.
RTCM WER Displays the RTCM word error rate. If WER is high
and the beacon receiver is operating in automatic
mode, the receiver selects a different reference
station.
STATUS Displays the channel status. The available
messages are:
• Idle - No activity on the channel.
• WB FFT - The channel is performing a
wideband FFT. For a description, see section
9.8.1, page 9-35.
• Search - The channel is searching for a signal.
• Track - The channel has acquired a beacon
signal.
• Lock - The channel is decoding valid data.

Status 8
8.9 STATUS/GRAPH Screen

The STATUS/GRAPH screen (Figure 8-13) allows you to generate
(execute) six graphs derived from the data collected by the track
recorder. Only one graph can be shown at one time. The graph can be
displayed with data from NT300D internal memory or with data from
a file stored on the SCR. To learn how to select a data source, see
section 9.11, page 9-45. Select the graph you want to plot, and press
Execute.
Figure 8-13 STATUS/GRAPH Screen

8 Status
8.9.1 STATUS/GRAPH/EXECUTE Screen

A portion of the selected graph is plotted with the start time and end
time displayed at the bottom and the range of data along the left side,
Figure 8-14. The time is presented in local or UTC, depending on the

time setup in the SETUP screen. To update the screen, press Show

Latest. To look through the data, use and . To move the graph
up or down without changing the scale, use and .
Figure 8-14 SOG (Speed Over Ground) Graph
Table 8-11 explains the softkey options you can use while the plot is
displayed.
Table 8-11 STATUS/GRAPH/EXECUTE Softkeys
Softkey Description
Show Latest Updates the graph with the most recently recorded
data. This softkey option only works when the
displayed data is stored in NT300D internal
memory. See section 9.11, page 9-45.
Incr Scale Increases the vertical scale of the graph.
Decr Scale Decreases the vertical scale of the graph.
Cursor Displays and hides the cursor.

Status 8
Figure 8-15 shows the appearance of the STATUS/GRAPH/EXECUTE

screen when the cursor is displayed. You can move the cursor to the
left and right using and . The value of the data at the cursor
location on the graph is displayed below the graph.
Figure 8-15 STATUS/GRAPH/EXECUTE Screen Cursor
When the cursor is not displayed, you can use and to move the
current view of the graph window forward and backward to reveal
more of the recorded data. The sliding bar at the top of the graph
shows you where you are in relation to the total data amount of
recorded data.
Note – The SETUP/TRACK screen is used to enable and control the

recording of the data displayed in a graph.

8 Status
8.10 STATUS/SCR Screen

The STATUS/SCR screen (Figure 8-16) can be displayed if an optional
Smart Card Reader is connected to the NT300D. The screen shows the
status of each of the Smart Card Reader slots.
Figure 8-16 STATUS/SCR Screen

Status 8
Table 8-12 STATUS/SCR Fields
Field Description
SLOT A/ Indicates if a card is inserted in the SCR or not. If a
SLOT B card is available, MEMORY CARD is displayed. If no
card is present, the field displays SLOT IS EMPTY. If
a card is present, additional information becomes
available as noted below in this table. Slot B is the
lower slot.
BATTERY Displays the status of the battery in the PC Card.
WRITE Indicates if the PC Card is write protected or not.
PROT
FORMAT Indicates if the PC Card is formatted or not.
SIZE Displays the memory capacity of the PC Card.
AVAILABLE Displays the amount of PC Card memory available
for data storage.
For more information about the SCR, see Chapter 10, Operating the
SCR.

9 Setup
The SETUP screens allow you to tailor the NT300D to your
operational requirements. Once the NT300D is configured, it retains
its configuration in battery-backed memory. Therefore, unless you
wish to change a particular option, you may only need to configure
the NT300D once.
* Note – Before attempting to use the SETUP screens, you should


Setup 9
9.1 SETUP Screen Hierarchy

The SETUP screens hierarchical structure is shown in Figure 9-1.
SETUP
GPS NAV DR ALARMS More
Datum Coords
User Page Page Ext

Datum Up Down Datum
3 Param 7 Param
Alarm 1 Alarm 2 Alarm 3
Datum Datum
Beacon
User Track SCR More
Receiver
FFT LANGS I/O Util
User 1 User 2 User 3
Select
Reset
Data
Format A Format B Dir A Dir B
NMEA NMEA Control CC

I/O Test Output
Sentences Control
Datum
Figure 9-1 SETUP Screen Hierarchy

9 Setup
9.1.1 Protected SETUP Screens

Access to several menu options in the SETUP screen hierarchy are
protected to prevent accidental changes to the NT300D configuration.
The NT300D must be placed in Install mode to access these protected
menu options. For detailed information, see section 3.1.1, page 3-3.
The protected Setup menus are highlighted in Figure 9-1 with a grey
background. Changes to any of these menus while the vessel is
cruising along a route may result in serious consequences.
9.1.2 Changing Factory Default Values

All parameters are set to default values when the NT300D is shipped
from the factory. These factory default values are based on the needs
of the average user. For many users, a large number of these setup
parameters never require modification. However, some users may
want to fine tune these parameters to improve GPS performance in a
particular application.

Setup 9
9.2 SETUP Screen Summary

Table 9-1 summarizes the functions of the screens and softkey options
in the SETUP hierarchy.
Table 9-1 SETUP Screen Summary
Screen Function
SETUP Displays the date and time. Sets the
local time offset, units of measure,
display mode, and Boat symbol for the
PLOT screen.
SETUP/GPS Sets GPS operating parameters.
SETUP/GPS/DATUM Allows you to select a datum for
positions presented on the screen and
positions stored by the track recorder.
SETUP/GPS/DATUM/ Allows you to define a 3 or 7 parameter
USER DATUM datum transformation.
SETUP/NAV Sets navigation parameters.
SETUP/NAV/COORDS Selects the coordinate system for
displaying positions on the screen.
SETUP/DR Configures Dead Reckoning operation.
SETUP/ALARM 1,2,3 Enables or disables NT300D alarms.
SETUP/BEACON Configures the internal beacon receiver.
RECEIVER
SETUP/BEACON Performs Fast Fourier Transform
RECEIVER/FFT diagnostics.
SETUP/USER Selects data options for the three USER
screens.
SETUP/TRACK Controls the track recorder, and the
plotting of data.
SETUP/TRACK/CONFIG Configures the four user-definable track
recording channels.
SETUP/TRACK/RESET Clears the internal memory partition
used to store track recorder data.

9 Setup
Table 9-1 SETUP Screen Summary (Continued)
Screen Function
SETUP/SCR Controls the optional Smart Card
Reader.
SETUP/LANGUAGES Selects the language used to display
data on the NT300D screens.
SETUP/ I/O Sets the input and output protocols and
baud rates.
SETUP/ I/O /NMEA Selects the NMEA Talker ID and the
SENTENCE NMEA sentences output by the receiver.
SETUP/ I/O /NMEA Controls the update rate and settings of
CONTROL the NMEA sentences output.
SETUP/ I/O Configures the NT300D for contact
/CC OUTPUT closure (CC) output.
SETUP/UTIL Clears selected memory partitions or all
NT300D memory.

Setup 9
9.3 SETUP Screen

The SETUP screen is shown in Figure 9-2. The softkey options,
described in the following sections, give you access to the second
level of SETUP screens.
Figure 9-2 SETUP Screen
Table 9-2 describes the parameters displayed on the SETUP screen.

Table 9-2 SETUP Fields
Field Description
DATE Displays the current date. If a Local date is desired
instead of UTC, enter an OFFSET.
TIME Displays the current time. Select UTC if you want to
display UTC time and Local if you want to display Local
time. If Local time is selected, you must enter an
OFFSET value.
You can also choose to display the time in a 12 or 24
hour format. The 12 hour display format adds AM or
PM after the time value. For example, 1:00:00 PM in
12-hour format versus 13:00:00 in 24-hour format.

9 Setup
Table 9-2 SETUP Fields (Continued)
Field Description

OFFSET The OFFSET value is the difference in hours between
UTC (GMT) time and Local time. Use or to select
the direction of the offset (– for western longitudes and
+ for eastern longitudes). You can learn the correct
offset for your area by first selecting UTC and 12
Hours. Compare UTC with your wristwatch. The
difference is the offset.
UNITS The NT300D displays distance information in the units
selected in the UNITS field. The options are Nm
(nautical miles), km (kilometers), and Mi (miles).
AUTO Determines if the user wants to automatically change
RANGE units when the distance is smaller than 1/10 of the
main unit selected (see above).
• Off – no automatic unit switching
• m,ft – the selected unit will be used if the distance
calculation is smaller than 1/10 of the main unit
selected
DISPLAY Controls the video format of the LCD display.
• Pos Video – displays information in black against a
white background
• Neg Video – displays information in white against a
black background.
BOAT Selects the icon used to depict the vessel on the PLOT
ICON screen. The vessel’s location is identified with one of
four icons: Marker (cross-hairs), Powerboat, Sailboat,
or default Heading indicator. The Heading indicator
always points to the direction of the COG of the vessel.
The rest of the icons always point in the same
direction.

Setup 9
9.4 SETUP/GPS Screen

The SETUP/GPS screen includes parameters for configuring GPS
operating parameters. The menu option Datum is available to select
the datum for the positions displayed on the screen and the positions
stored by the track recorder in internal memory or on a SCR. For more
information about GPS parameters, see section 1.3, page 1-5.
Figure 9-3 SETUP/GPS Screen
Table 9-3 explains the fields.

Table 9-3 SETUP/GPS Fields
Field Description
GPS MODE Selects the GPS position fix mode.
• 2D – always computes a 2D position solution.
• 3D – always computes a 3D position solution
(default).
• AUTO – a 3D position solution is computed
when four or more satellites are available, and
a 2D position solution is computed when three
satellites are available.

9 Setup
Table 9-3 SETUP/GPS Fields (Continued)
Field Description
DGPS MODE Controls the use of differential correction data.
• Off – standard GPS positions are computed,
even when DGPS correction data is available.
• On – DGPS positions are computed if valid
correction data is available. In not, the NT300D
is placed in DR mode.
• AUTO – DGPS positions are computed when
valid DGPS correction data is available, and
standard GPS positions are computed when
DGPS data is not available (default).
DGPS Select to use the internal beacon receiver or an
SOURCE external source of corrections. If External is
selected, the only corrections accepted by the
GPS receiver are the ones received on one of the
serial ports (see section 9.13, page 9-54). If
Internal is selected, the GPS receiver uses the
corrections received by the internal beacon
receiver. However, if an external source of
corrections is present, the NT300D automatically
prioritizes these corrections. When the external
source of corrections is no longer available (i.e. if
you move out-of-range from a local reference
station), the NT300D automatically switches over
to use corrections from the internal beacon
receiver (default: Internal).
POS/VEL Enables or disables the Position/Velocity (P/V)
FILTER filter. The P/V filter allows the NT300D to smooth
out quick position changes. If for example, you
want a smooth transition between DGPS and GPS,
you should turn on the filter. This prevents the
receiver from doing a jump in position when the
transition happens (default: Off).

Setup 9
Field Description
MASKS Determines whether the NT300D uses the factory-
default satellite mask values or user-defined mask
values.
• Manual – user-defined values are used.
• Auto – factory-default values are automatically
used (default).
The ELEVATION, SNR, PDOP, and PDOP Switch
mask fields include two columns. The left column
accepts a Manual (user-defined) mask value and
the right column displays the AUTO (factory-
default) value. AUTO is the default selection.
Note – Exercise care when choosing user-
defined mask settings since improper values can
result in large position errors or reduce the number
of usable satellites in the constellation, making it
impossible to compute position solutions.
ELEVATION Accepts a user-defined Elevation Mask value in
the left column and displays the factory-default
Elevation Mask value in the right column (10
degrees). Satellites lower than the Elevation Mask
are not used when computing position solutions.
Although low elevation satellites can contribute to
a lower or better PDOP, the signals from these
satellites are of lower quality, since they suffer
greater tropospheric and ionospheric distortion
than the signals from higher elevation satellites.

9 Setup
Field Description
SNR Accepts a user-defined Signal-to-Noise Ratio
Mask value in the left column and displays the
factory-default value in the right column. The
default SNR Mask is set to medium (M) to
eliminate poor quality signals from satellites. Using
Low (L) SNR satellites can cause the position
accuracy to degrade. Setting the mask to High (H)
may prevent the NT300D from tracking a high
quality satellite. (L = 33 dB-Hz, M = 39 dB-Hz,
H = 45 dB-Hz).
PDOP Accepts a user-defined PDOP mask value in the
left column and displays the factory-default PDOP
mask value in the right column. Position Dilution of
Precision (PDOP) is a measure of the error caused
by the geometric relationship of the satellites used
in the position solution. Satellite constellations
which are tightly clustered or aligned in the sky
have a high PDOP and contribute to lower position
accuracy. The default PDOP mask of 8 offers a
satisfactory trade-off between accuracy and GPS
coverage time.
PDOP Accepts a user-defined PDOP Switch value in the
SWITCH left column and displays the factory-default value
in the right column (6).
The PDOP Switch establishes the trade-off
between 3D positioning and PDOP. With the PDOP
Switch set to 6, the NT300D computes a 3D
position with a PDOP below 6, and a 2D position
with a PDOP greater than 6, even when more than
three satellites are visible.

Setup 9
Field Description
ANTENNA Accepts a height value with the mean sea level
ALTITUDE (MSL) as a reference. When the screen is set to
2D mode, you should enter the height of the GPS
antenna in this field. When the receiver operates in
3D mode, this field displays the computed height
of the GPS antenna. When operating in 2D/3D
mode, this field shows the computed height when
solving 3D positions and displays the last 3D
height when it switches over to 2D positioning.
* Note – To achieve submeter accuracy, Trimble recommends you to

run the receiver in 3D mode.
* Note – If you run the receiver in 2D mode, you should enter an

ANTENNA ALTITUDE as accurately as possible to increase the
accuracy of the position.

9 Setup
9.4.1 SETUP/GPS/DATUM Screen

The NT300D can work with up to 3 different datums simultaneously.
One datum may be used for display and data storage, another datum
may be selected for Serial Port 1, and a third datum can be used for
Serial Port 2.
A datum is a geometric model of the earth, and the latitude and
longitude calculated by the NT300D are related to the selected datum.
Many navigational charts are based on a local datum. WGS-84 is used
as the default datum.
In Normal mode, you can choose a datum from the standard list of 13
datums. An extended list of over 180 datums is available when the
NT300D is powered on in Install mode. For more information, see
The SETUP/GPS/DATUM screen includes a User Datum softkey
option for defining custom datums. To toggle between the extended
list of datums, press Ext Datum. The extended selection screen
includes Page Up and Page Down for paging through the list of
datums. Press Return to complete your selection of a datum.
The SETUP/GPS/DATUM screen is used to select a datum for the
position displayed on the NT300D and the positions stored in internal
memory or on the SCR using the track recorder.
* Note – When switching datums, previously stored waypoints will

remain in the datum they were originally stored. Only waypoints saved
after the datum switch will be stored in the new datum.

Setup 9
Figure 9-4 shows the standard list of 13 datums, and Figure 9-5 shows
an example of the extended list of datums.
Figure 9-4 SETUP/GPS/DATUM Screen
Figure 9-5 Extended Listing of Datums

9 Setup
9.4.2 SETUP/GPS/DATUM/USER DATUM Screen

The SETUP/GPS/DATUM/USER DATUM screen allows you to create a
datum and add it to the standard datum list. You can create a new
datum based on a three-parameter or seven-parameter datum
transformation. See Figure 9-6 and Figure 9-7. To choose a seven-
parameter datum transformation, press Seven Param.
Figure 9-6 Three-Parameter Datum Transformation
Figure 9-7 Seven-Parameter Datum Transformation

Setup 9
Use and to select parameter fields, and enter the appropriate
parameter values based on the guidelines provided in Table 9-4 or
Table 9-5. The tables give descriptions of the parameters required for
the three-parameter and seven-parameter datum transformation.
Table 9-4 Three-Parameter Datum Transformation
Fields
Field Description
NAME Accepts a user-defined datum name consisting
of up to 18 characters. Once a user-defined
datum is created, the datum name is displayed
in the standard list of datums (short list). A dash
and a 3 is automatically appended to the end of
the name when defining a 3-parameter datum.

Individual characters within the name are
changed using and .
X AXIS/DELTA Difference in x-axis (m) between WGS-84 and
user datum.
Y AXIS/DELTA Difference in y-axis (m) between WGS-84 and
user datum.
Z AXIS/DELTA Difference in z-axis (m) between WGS-84 and
user datum.
A-AXIS Accepts the value for the semi-major axis of the
ellipsoidal or spheroidal model used to define
the datum. The default setting is 6,378,137.000
meters which is the equatorial radius of Earth at
mean sea level, based on the WGS-84 ellipsoid
model.
E-SQUARED Square of the first eccentricity of the ellipsoid.

9 Setup
* Note – The A-AXIS, Y-AXIS, and Z-AXIS fields in the User 3

parameter transformation require values to be entered with the
opposite sign to the same fields in the User 7 parameter
transformation. For example, the values X = -8, Y = +160, and Z =
+176 entered in the 3 parameter transformation would be entered as
X = +8, Y = -160, and Z = -176 in the User 7 parameter
transformation.
Table 9-5 Seven-Parameter Datum Transformation

Fields
Field Description
NAME Accepts a user-defined datum name
consisting of up to 18 characters. Once a
user-defined datum is created, the datum
name is displayed in the standard list of
datums (short list). A dash and a 7 is
automatically appended to the end of the
name when defining a 7-parameter datum.

changed using and .
X AXIS/DELTA Difference in x-axis (m) between WGS-84
and user datum.
Y AXIS/DELTA Difference in y-axis (m) between WGS-84
and user datum.
Z AXIS/DELTA Difference in z-axis (m) between WGS-84
and user datum.
X AXIS/ROTATION Rotation in x-axis (arc seconds) of local
datum with respect to WGS-84 datum.
Y AXIS/ROTATION Rotation in y-axis (arc seconds) of local
Z AXIS/ROTATION Rotation in z-axis (arc seconds) of local

Setup 9
Fields (Continued)
Field Description
SCALE Scale factor between local datum and
WGS-84 datum. The Scale Factor field
accepts values in parts-per-million (ppm).
That is, a Scale Factor of 1.0000045992
should be entered as 4.5992 ppm.
A-AXIS Accepts the value for the semi-major axis of
the ellipsoidal or spheroidal model used to
define the datum. The default setting is
6,378,137.000 meters which is the
equatorial radius of Earth at mean sea level,
based on the WGS-84 ellipsoid model.
E-SQUARED Square of the first eccentricity of the
ellipsoid.

9 Setup
9.5 SETUP/NAV Screen

The SETUP/NAV screen includes options which control the
functionality of the NAV and PLOT screens (see Figure 9-8).
Figure 9-8 SETUP/NAV Screen
Table 9-6. explains the fields displayed on the screen.

Table 9-6 SETUP/NAV Fields
Field Description
NAV CALC Controls the type of calculation used to determine
range and bearing (default: Great Circle).
Note – The NT300D offers composite routes which
are a mix of Great Circle and Rhumb Line legs. For
more information, see Chapter 7, Routes.
MAG Determines whether the NT300D displays heading,
VARIATION course, and bearing information in degrees true
(True) or degrees magnetic (Auto or Manual). To
calculate degrees magnetic, the NT300D uses an
internal magnetic variation value (Auto) or a value
entered by the user (Manual) (default: True).
MANUAL Accepts a magnetic variation value for use when
VARIATION MAG VARIATION is set to Manual.

Setup 9
Table 9-6 SETUP/NAV Fields (Continued)
Field Description
COG/SOG Accepts a number ranging from 001–999 which
AVG determines the averaging factor for COG/SOG.
Larger values indicate more averaging. A value of
1 indicates no averaging. COG/SOG averaging
uses the average of a number of points to stabilize
the COG and SOG values, providing a smoother
presentation of data with fewer moment-to-
moment fluctuations. The value also affects the
predicted position indicator on the PLOT screen
(see Figure 5-1). Suggested values range from 2–
10 for general navigation, and a value of 1 for more
precise applications (default: 1).
WPT Controls how the NT300D advances waypoints in
SWITCHING an active route. The Manual setting enables
manual switching. Manual switching is performed
in the ROUTE screen by pressing Advance One
Leg. The Auto (automatic switching) setting
requires you to select a waypoint detection type in
the MODE field (default: Auto).
MODE Determines how the NT300D advances legs
(detects waypoints) when navigating along a route
with WPT SWITCHING set to Auto.
• Circle – a leg is advanced when the vessel is
within the distance specified in RADIUS to the
Waypoint (default).
• Bisector – a leg is advanced when the vessel
crosses an imaginary line which bisects the
angle between the current leg and the next leg.
If the current leg is the last leg in the route, the
bisector line is perpendicular to the current leg.
RADIUS Specifies the distance from the waypoint where
switching should occur if Circle is selected as the
method of advancing legs.

9 Setup
9.5.1 SETUP/NAV/COORDS Screen

The SETUP/NAV/COORDS screen includes options for selecting the
coordinate system used to display data on screens, and the Decca
Chain if the Decca option is selected as the method of displaying
position data (see Figure 9-9).
Figure 9-9 SETUP/NAV/COORDS Screen

Setup 9
Table 9-7 explains the fields displayed on the screen.
Table 9-7 SETUP/NAV/COORDS Fields
Field Description
POSITION Determines which coordinate system is used to
DISPLAY display data on the NT300D screens.
L/L (DM) – geographical coordinates in degrees
and minutes. For details, see Table 9-8.
L/L (DMS) – geographical coordinates in degrees,
minutes and seconds. For details, see Table 9-8.
UTM – Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM).
HK80 – Hong Kong Grid.
Decca – a Decca chain must also be selected if
Decca coordinates are chosen.
DECCA Select the appropriate Decca chain if Decca is
CHAIN selected in the POSITION DISPLAY field.
SELECT
A detailed explanation of the latitude and longitude fields is presented

in Table 9-8.
Table 9-8 SETUP/NAV/COORDS Latitude and

Longitude Fields
** Coordinates DGPS Mode Status

L/L(DM) DDD×MM.mmm' DGPS mode = Off
DDD×MM.mmmm' DGPS mode = On, Auto
L/L(DMS) DDD×MM'SS.ss" DGPS mode = Off
DDD×MM'SS.sss" DGPS mode = On, Auto
DDD = degrees
MM = minutes
mmm = fractional minutes
SS = seconds
sss = fractional seconds

9 Setup
9.6 SETUP/DR Screen

The SETUP/DR screen (see Figure 9-10) includes options for
configuring the NT300D Navigation screens for navigating the vessel
by dead reckoning (DR). If GPS coverage is not available, the
NT300D automatically switches to dead reckoning (DR) mode. In this
mode, the NT300D updates position using speed and heading
information which is manually entered or supplied by an external
source. The NT300D also incorporates the last calculated (while still
in GPS mode) or entered set and drift values in the DR calculations.
Figure 9-10 SETUP/DR Screen

Setup 9
Table 9-9. explains the fields displayed on the screen.
Table 9-9 SETUP/DR Fields
Field Description
SPD/HDG In DR mode, the NT300D updates its position using
SOURCE speed and heading information which is manually
entered (Manual) or supplied by an external device
(External). If External is selected, you can only
change data in the DRIFT, SET, and POSITION
fields. If Manual is selected, you can make changes
in all fields.
SPEED Accepts the current vessel speed.
HEADING Accepts the current vessel heading.
DRIFT Displays the current DRIFT of the vessel. When the
NT300D is operating in GPS mode, and is supplied
with speed and heading information from an
external device, it computes drift, and displays the
value in the DRIFT field. If GPS coverage is lost, the
NT300D uses the last computed Drift or a manually
entered Drift value in the DRIFT field.
SET Displays the current SET of the vessel. When the
NT300D is operating in GPS mode, and is supplied
with speed and heading information from an
external device, it computes a Set value, and
displays the value in the SET field. If GPS coverage
is lost, the NT300D uses the last computed Set
value or a manually entered Set value in the SET
field.
POSITION Displays the starting point position in DR mode. In
DR mode, the NT300D uses the last known GPS
position as a starting point for DR updates. In GPS
mode, the POSITION field on the SETUP/DR screen
is continuously updated with the current latitude and
longitude. The DR position may also be manually
updated as the vessel approaches or passes known
landmarks.

9 Setup
9.7 SETUP/ALARM Screen

Three Alarm screens are available in the NT300D. You can toggle
between the screens with More. Each alarm can be enabled or
disabled. If an alarm is triggered, you have to press a key to silence
the audible alarm. The following sections explain the alarm screens.
9.7.1 SETUP/ALARM 1 Screen

Figure 9-11 shows the SETUP/ALARM 1 screen.
Figure 9-11 SETUP/ALARM 1 Screen

Setup 9
Table 9-10 SETUP/ALARM 1 Fields
Field Description
TIME ALARM Allows you to set an alarm to sound at the
time entered in the AT field. The time has to be
entered in 24-hour format. If you want to enter
01:00:00 PM for example, you must enter
13:00:00.
WATCH ALARM Enables or disables the watch alarm. The AT
field sets the start time of the watch alarm
using 24-hour format. The INTERVAL field sets
the time interval between alarms. For
example, if you want an alarm to sound every
20 minutes beginning at 9:40 pm, set the AT
field to 21:40:00 and the INTERVAL field to
00:20:00. When the Watch alarm is turned on,
the TIME REMAINING field indicates the time
remaining before the next alarm occurs.
KEY BEEP Sounds a beep whenever a key is pressed.
MESSAGE BEEP Sounds a beep when a message, other than
an alarm, is displayed on the screen.
(D)GPS OK MSG Displays a message when GPS or DGPS
becomes available after a drop out.
RTCM STATION Displays a message when the NT300D
MSG changes reference station.

9 Setup

Figure 9-12 shows the SETUP/ALARM 2 screen.

Setup 9
Table 9-10 describes the fields displayed on the screen.
Field Description
ANCHOR Alerts the operator when the anchor breaks
ALARM loose or is dragging. The alarm sounds if the
vessel drifts farther than the distance set in the
RADIUS field. When the alarm is turned on, the
current position of the vessel is located in the
center of the imaginary circle defined by the
RADIUS.
Note – Select a radius large enough to account
for normal drift about the anchor plus the normal
fluctuation in GPS position.
Note – When the anchor alarm sounds, it
automatically disables itself when you press OK
to acknowledge the alarm. To enable the alarm
again, you must return to the SETUP/ALARM 2
screen.
HAZARD Alerts the operator when the vessel approaches
ALARM a hazard waypoint (skull and crossbones icon).
The alarm sounds if the vessel is closer to the
hazard than the distance entered in the RADIUS
field.
Note – The circle defined by RADIUS is
displayed for all hazard waypoints shown on the
PLOT screen, even when the Hazard alarm is
disabled.

9 Setup
Table 9-11 SETUP/ALARM 2 Fields (Continued)
Field Description
TIME LIMIT The TIME LIMIT sets the number of seconds
used to predict a position ahead of time. For
more information about predicted positions, see
the information about the Pred Pos field in Table
5-3 on page 5-7.
You can set a maximum value of 999 seconds in
this field. If you enter 0 seconds, no predicted
positions are calculated. If the predicted position
falls within the circle defined by the RADIUS
field, the NT300D triggers the Hazard alarm.
WAYPOINT The Waypoint Alarm alerts the operator each
ALARM time the vessel arrives at a waypoint in the
active route. Waypoint arrival is based on the
waypoint detection mode (Circle or Bisector)
selected on the SETUP/NAV screen.
DESTINATION The Destination Alarm alerts the operator when
ALARM the vessel arrives at the destination waypoint.
Destination arrival is based on the waypoint
detection mode selected on the SETUP/NAV
screen.
RTCM 16 Alerts the operator when a RTCM SC-104 Type
ALARM 16 message is received. You can view the
message on the STATUS/DGPS/RTCM
MESSAGE screen.
XTE ALARM When the Cross-Track Error (XTE) alarm is
enabled, the NT300D sounds an alarm
whenever the vessel's cross-track error exceeds
the value in the LIMIT field. The LIMIT field sets
the XTE limit in the PLOT, NAV1 and NAV2
screens. If you use LIMIT for only this purpose,
you do not have to turn on (enable) the XTE
Alarm.

Setup 9

The SETUP/ALARM 3 screen (see Figure 9-13) is displayed only in
Install mode. The screen includes GPS and DGPS alarms. To power
on the receiver in Install mode, see section 3.1.1, page 3-3.

9 Setup

Field Description
GPS LOCK Alerts the operator when the receiver can no
ALARM longer compute positions because it lost lock on
too many satellites. For example, if the receiver
is setup to compute only 3D positions, the alarm
sounds when less than 4 satellites are available.
DGPS LOCK Alerts the operator when no corrections are
ALARM available to calculate a DGPS position.
CORRECTION Accepts a threshold value, in seconds, for the
AGE LIMIT maximum age of pseudorange corrections
(PRCs). An alarm is triggered when the
threshold is exceeded. Valid values range from
15 to 90 (default: 30). For more information, see
Pseudorange Correction Age (PRC Age) on
page 1-12.
REFERENCE Monitors the health of the active reference
STATION station. If the reference station indicates
HEALTH anything but a good health, the alarm sounds.
ALARM The health status of the reference station can be
checked on the STATUS/DGPS screen (see
section 8.5, page 8-10). For more information,
see Reference Station Health Monitoring on
page 1-12

Setup 9
9.8 SETUP/BEACON RECEIVER Screen

The fields on the SETUP/BEACON RECEIVER screen includes the
setup parameters for the internal dual-channel beacon receiver (see
Figure 9-14). For a detailed descriptions of the beacon receivers, see
The DGPS alarms and limits are set using the SETUP/ALARM 3
screen. The DGPS controls are set in the SETUP/GPS screen.
Figure 9-14 SETUP/BEACON RECEIVER Screen

9 Setup

Table 9-13 SETUP/BEACON RECEIVER Fields
Field Description
SEARCH The dual-channel beacon receiver can be set to
MODE 3 different tracking modes: Auto Distance, Auto
Power, and Manual mode. Table 9-14 includes a
description of each mode.
Manual Freq. If Manual Search Mode is selected, Channel 0
(Channel 0) attempts to lock onto the frequency entered in
this field.
Manual Freq. If Manual Search Mode is selected, Channel 1
(Channel 1) attempts to lock onto the frequency entered in
this field.
Table 9-14 describes the Search Mode options

Table 9-14 Search Mode Options
Option Description
Auto Enables the dual-channel beacon receiver to use
Dist distance to the reference station (beacon) as the primary
criteria for selecting a reference station. The Auto
Distance mode requires an RTCM beacon almanac
(RTCM Type 7) to be transmitted by the reference
station. The beacon almanac includes transmission
range, frequency, and the position of neighboring
beacons.The internal beacon receiver sorts the list of
beacons from the almanac by distance. Channel 0 locks
onto the closest beacon and Channel 1 locks onto the
second closest beacon. If the quality of the closest
beacon is reduced, the beacon receiver automatically
switches to Channel 1. The list of beacons constantly
gets sorted while the vessel is moving to make sure that
the beacon receiver is always tracking the two closest
beacons. If Auto Dist is selected and no almanac is
available, the NT300D automatically switches to Auto
Power mode. The STATUS/BEACON RECEIVER screen
displays the current status.

Setup 9
Table 9-14 Search Mode Options (Continued)
Option Description
Auto Enables the dual-channel beacon receiver to use the
Power strongest beacons. This mode does not require a
beacon almanac (RTCM Type 7) to be broadcast by the
reference station. Channel 0 locks onto the strongest
beacon, decodes RTCM corrections, and feeds the
corrections to the GPS receiver. Channel 1 continuously
scans the frequency band for a better and stronger
beacon. If a stronger beacon is found, Channel 1 locks
onto that beacon, and starts to decode RTCM
corrections. Channel 1 then takes over from Channel 0
and feeds the corrections to the GPS receiver. Channel
0 is now continuously scanning the frequency band for a
better and stronger beacon (default).
Manual In Manual mode, the beacon receiver only tracks the
frequencies you have manually entered in the Manual
Freq (Channel 0) and Manual Freq (Channel 1) fields.
Two separate frequencies may be entered. The channel
which is tracking the best quality beacon automatically
feeds corrections to the GPS receiver. If you want only
one frequency to be tracked, you can enter the same
frequency in both fields.
For a listing of radiobeacons and their broadcast frequencies, see

Appendix C, DGPS Radiobeacons.
* Note – In areas where the service provider of differential corrections

does not transmit a beacon almanac, Auto Dist mode cannot be
used. If Auto Dist (Auto Distance) mode is selected and no beacon
almanac is available, the NT300D automatically switches to Auto
Power mode. You can view the mode currently used by the beacon
receiver from the STATUS/BEACON RECEIVER screen (see section
8.8, page 8-22).

9 Setup
9.8.1 SETUP/BEACON RECEIVER/FFT Screen

The SETUP/BEACON RECEIVER/FFT screen lets you perform FFT
(Fast Fourier Transform) diagnostics to test the frequency distribution
and strength of radiobeacon signals (see Figure 9-15).
M Warning – Never select this option when navigating using DGPS

corrections. Selecting FFT disables reception and use of RTCM data.
No DGPS positions are computed.
Figure 9-15 SETUP/BEACON RECEIVER/FFT Screen

Enter the center frequency for the FFT plot in the FFT FREQUENCY
field, and press to complete the entry.
The FFT frequency should be the broadcast frequency of the
radiobeacon used to acquire DGPS corrections. For a listing of known
radiobeacons and their broadcast frequencies, see Appendix C, DGPS
Radiobeacons.

Setup 9
Select the FFT MODE field, and choose one of the FFT plotting
modes described in Table 9-15.
Table 9-15 FFT MODE Options
Option Description
WB Selects FFT Wideband mode. The FFT plot shows the
relative strengths of signal sources within the Medium
Frequency (MF) band used by the beacons (283.5 kHz
to 325.0 kHz). Wideband FFT plots are useful for
isolating sources of electrical interference and
equipment grounding problems which might influence
or prevent the reception of radiobeacon signals. For a
sample plot, see Figure 9-15.
NB Selects FFT Narrowband mode with signal squaring
disabled. Produces a plot showing relative signal
strengths within ±170 Hz of the selected center
frequency. For a sample plot, see Figure 9-16. The 0.0
frequency represents the FFT frequency entered in the
FFT Frequency field.
NBSQ Selects FFT Narrowband mode with signal squaring
enabled. Produces signal peaks which are separated
in frequency by the broadcasting beacon’s data
transmission rate. For example, in Figure 9-17, the
broadcast beacon is transmitting data at 100 bits per
second. The 0.0 frequency represents the FFT
frequency entered in the FFT Frequency field.
Press Return after analyzing the FFT plot.

9 Setup
Figure 9-16 Narrowband FFT Plot
Figure 9-17 Narrowband FFT Plot with Squaring On

Setup 9
9.9 SETUP/SCR Screen

The SETUP/SCR Screen (see Figure 9-18) displays the current status
of the two Smart Card Reader slots. If a slot contains a PC Card, the
status of the card is displayed on the screen.
Figure 9-18 SETUP/SCR Screen

9 Setup
Table 9-16 describes the fields on the screen.

Table 9-16 SETUP/SCR Fields
Field Description
SLOT A or Indicates if a card is inserted in the SCR or not. If a
SLOT B card is available, MEMORY CARD is displayed. If
no card is present, the field displays SLOT IS
EMPTY. If a card is present, additional information
becomes available as noted below in this table.
Slot B is the lower slot.
BATTERY Indicates the status of the battery in the PC Card.
WRITEPROT Indicates if the PC Card is write protected or not.
FORMAT Indicates if the PC Card is formatted or not.
SIZE Displays the memory capacity of the PC Card.
AVAILABLE Displays the amount of PC Card memory available
for data storage.
To store data on the SCR or to display data from the SCR, see section
9.11, page 9-45.

Setup 9
9.9.1 SETUP/SCR/FORMAT Screen

Memory cards fresh from the package are not ready for immediate
use. The cards must be formatted before the Smart Card Reader and
other PC Card readers can read and write data.
Formatting a previously used card permanently erases all old data
stored on the card. This feature is useful for erasing old data.
However, you need to use this feature with caution, since you could
accidentally erase data you want to keep. It is impossible to format
write-protected memory cards. A PC with a PC Card reader and DOS
Version 4.0 or higher can also be used to format memory cards.
When you attempt to format a PC Card, a confirmation message is
displayed (see Figure 9-19) as a precaution. You must acknowledge
the message before you can format the card. If no card is detected in
the slot you want to format, a message appears indicating that the
selected card cannot be formatted.
Figure 9-19 SEUP/SCR/FORMAT Screen
M Warning – The Smart Card Reader only recognizes the root directory
on memory cards. Formatting a card destroys all data in all directories
and sub-directories.

9 Setup
9.9.2 SETUP/SCR/DIR Screen

If a PC Card is present in the SCR, you can display the files stored on
the card with this option. The SCR only detects the root directory, so
the files are not displayed if they are stored in a subdirectory. Figure
9-20 shows the screen.
Figure 9-20 SETUP/SCR/DIR Screen
You can press and to scroll through the list of files. If you want

to delete a file, press Delete. Make sure to select the file (highlighted
with grey background) you want to delete with or before
pressing Delete. The deleted file cannot be recovered once it is
deleted.
M Warning – Once you delete a file, the data is permanently erased and
can no longer be retrieved. Be sure to select the file you want to erase
before pressing Delete.

Setup 9
9.10 SETUP/USER Screen

The SETUP/USER screen (see Figure 9-21) is used to set the number
of information lines displayed on the USER screens, the USER screen
cycling method, and the cycle time for switching between USER
screens.
Figure 9-21 SETUP/USER Screen
Table 9-17 describes the cycling types.

Table 9-17 DISPLAY CYCLING TYPE
Option Description
None Automatic cycling is disabled, but the screens can be
manually cycled by pressing [USER].
All Cycles all USER screens automatically. Each screen is
displayed for as many seconds as entered in the
DISPLAY CYCLE TIME field.
1&2 Cycles the USER 1 and USER 2 screens automatically.
Only Each screen is displayed for as many seconds as
entered in the DISPLAY CYCLE TIME field.

9 Setup
9.10.1 SETUP/USER/USER 1, 2, 3 Screens

The SETUP/USER/USER 1, 2, 3 screens are used to select the different
types of navigation data displayed on the USER screens, Figure 9-22.
Figure 9-22 SETUP/USER/USER 1 Screen
The number of items you can choose depend on the number of lines

you selected for display on the screen. To select individual items,
press or to highlight the item, then press to choose the item.
Selected items are displayed in reversed video.
The list of selections are described in Table 9-18.
Table 9-18 Navigation Data Selections
Lines
Item Occupied Description
Position 2 or 3 Positions are displayed in the coordinate
system selected from the SETUP/NAV/
COORD screen (see section 9.5.1,
page 9-21).
Date 1 Day of Month, Month and Year
Time 1 Time of Day (hh:mm:ss)
COG 1 Course Over Ground
SOG 1 Speed Over Ground

Setup 9
Table 9-18 Navigation Data Selections (Continued)
Lines
Item Occupied Description
XTE 1 Cross-Track Error
PNU 1 Position Uncertainty
DTW 1 Distance To Waypoint (Range)
DTD 1 Distance To Destination
CTW 1 Course to Waypoint (Bearing)
ALT 1 Altitude (when 3D GPS is available)
TTG 1 Time To Go
ETA 1 Estimated Time of Arrival
Set 1 Direction of Current
Drift 1 Speed of Current
Speed 1 Speed through the Water
Heading 1 Heading (direction the vessel is pointed)
DMG 1 Distance Made Good to Waypoint
VMG 1 Velocity Made Good to Waypoint
* Note – If you select Position, two lines are required in latitude and
longitude, UTM, and HK80 mode, and three lines are required for
Decca mode.

9 Setup
9.11 SETUP/TRACK Screen

The SETUP/TRACK screen (see Figure 9-23) enables or disables the
Track Recorder. When enabled, the Track Recorder performs time or
distance monitoring by plotting and recording GPS data as the vessel
is navigated along a route. The track data can be stored in NT300D
memory or externally on a PC Card using the optional Smart Card
Reader (SCR).
If you set REC TO SCR to ON, an additional window is displayed for
entering the name of the file used to store data on the PC Card. You
also have the option of selecting a card slot. The track recorder file
includes the data described in Table 9-19. Four of these variables are
user-defined. For more information, see section 9.11.1, page 9-50.
Table 9-19 Data Stored in Track Recorder
Data
Latitude
Longitude
Date
Time
Number of satellites used
PDOP
Navigation Mode:
1 = DR
2 = GPS
3 = DGPS
GPS State:
1 = 3D Manual
2 = 2D Manual
3 = 3D Auto
4 = 2D Auto

Setup 9
Table 9-19 Data Stored in Track Recorder (Continued)
Data
DGPS State:
1 = On Manual
2 = Off Manual
3 = On Auto
4 = Off Auto
User defined Channel 1
The recorded track data can be viewed on the STATUS/GRAPH screen.

For more information, see section 8.9, page 8-24.
* Note – The bar at the bottom of the screen indicates the amount of
memory used and the amount of memory available for track
recording. This bar represents NT300D memory if you selected the
option for storing data in internal memory. If you selected the option
for storing track data using the SCR, the bar represents the amount of
memory used on the PC Card.

9 Setup
Figure 9-23 shows the SETUP/TRACK screen.
Figure 9-23 SETUP/TRACK Screen
M Warning – When internal memory is used to store track data and

internal memory becomes full, the NT300D progressively overwrites
the oldest track data as it continuously stores new track data.
* Note – You can use the SCR and PC Cards to continuously store all
recorded track data without overwriting data. When a PC Card
becomes full, the receiver does not overwrite the old data—you
simply replace the full card with and empty card to continue recording
track data.

Setup 9
Table 9-20 SETUP/TRACK Fields
Option Description
TRACK Enables or disables the track recorder.
REC
REC TO Selects the option for storing track data:
SCR
• If OFF is selected, the track data is stored in
NT300D memory. When internal memory is full, the
track recorder progressively overwrites the oldest
data in memory as it continuously records track
data.
• If ON is selected and a PC Card is loaded in the
SCR slot, the track data is stored on the PC Card. If
you select this option, a window is displayed for
selecting the SCR slot containing the PC Card. A
file is automatically created and assigned the name
TXXXXXXX.TRK. The letter T is followed by the
current date and file index (For example,

T031597A.TRK). To change the automatically
created name, use and to place the cursor

under the first character position in the name field.
Use and to select the desired character.
Repeat the procedure until all the characters of the
file name are selected. Press OK to complete the
operation and to begin recording track data to the
memory card. When a PC Card becomes full, an
error message is displayed on the screen, and you
need to insert a new PC Card in the slot to store
additional track data. The receiver does not
overwrite the data stored on a PC Card.
REC Sets the track recorder to record data based on Time
RATE or the Distance traveled by the vessel. The setting you
MODE select in this field determines the type of data, time or
distance, accepted by the REC RATE field.

9 Setup
Table 9-20 SETUP/TRACK Fields (Continued)
Option Description
REC Sets the time interval or the distance travelled by the
RATE vessel in between track recorder position entries. If
REC RATE MODE is set to Time, this field accepts the
time value in seconds between track recorder entries.
If REC RATE MODE is set to Distance, this field
accepts the distance traveled between track recorder
entries.
TRACK Sets the source of the track data displayed on the
DISPLAY STATUS/GRAPH screen. If Current is selected, the
track data is retrieved from NT300D memory. If SCR is
selected, the track data is retrieved from a file stored
on a PC Card. A PC Card must be inserted into a SCR
slot before selecting this option. When SCR is
selected, a window with a listing of recorded files is
displayed. Select the card slot containing the file you
want to display on the STATUS/GRAPH screen, then
finish by pressing OK (see Figure 9-24).
Figure 9-24 SETUP/TRACK/DISP Screen

Setup 9
9.11.1 SETUP/TRACK/CONFIG Screen

The SETUP/TRACK/CONFIG screen allows you to select the
navigation data you want to record on track recording channels 1
through 4. You select the four data types from a window containing
the list of navigation data generated by the receiver. For information
about the additional data recorded, see Table 9-19 on page 9-45.
The following procedure explains how to change the user-defined
data stored by the track recorder. If you are storing data on the SCR,
first set REC TO SCR to Off from the SETUP/TRACK screen to close
the file.
1. Display the SETUP/TRACK screen, then press Select Data to
display the following message:
Internal track plot will be erased.
Continue?
This message affects internal memory. If you have any data
stored in NT300D internal memory, the data is going to be
erased. If you intend to store the information on a PC Card
and do not care about data stored in internal memory,
continue.
I Caution – All data in internal memory is erased when selecting new

data recording settings.

9 Setup
2. Press OK to display the SETUP/TRACK/CONFIG screen (see

Figure 9-25).
SETUP/TRACK/CONFIG DR
Use Up/Down Arrows to select a

Track1 COG track, right arrow to change the
data stored on the selected track.
Track2 SOG
Track3 ALT
Track4 DTD
Figure 9-25 SETUP/TRACK/CONFIG Screen
3. Select one of the four track channels, and press to display

the screen shown in Figure 9-26.
Figure 9-26 SETUP/TRACK/CONFIG/EDIT Screen

Setup 9
4. Select one of the options described in Table 9-21.
Table 9-21 Track Data Recording Options
Option Description
COG Course Over Ground
SOG Speed Over Ground
ALT Altitude (if 3D GPS is available)
DTD Distance To Destination
CTW Course To Waypoint (bearing)
DTW Distance To Waypoint
XTE Cross-track Error
DMG Distance Made Good to Waypoint
VMG Velocity Made Good to Waypoint
SPD Vessel Speed Made Good
HDG Vessel Course Heading
SET Direction of Current
DFT Speed of Current
BCN Internal Beacon Receiver Parameters (SNR, WER,
Signal Level, Bit Rate, Beacon Frequency, operation
mode, tracking status, and eye pattern)
5. Press Return to return to the SETUP/TRACK/CONFIG screen.

6. Repeat the previous steps to edit another tracking channel.
7. Press Return to return to the SETUP/TRACK screen.
9.11.2 SETUP/TRACK/RESET Screen

A Reset softkey option is provided on the SETUP/TRACK screen
(Figure 9-28) that clears the four track recorder channels. You can
choose Reset to clear the tracking data before activating a new route.
The screen refreshes and the bar graph at the bottom of the screen is
reset to zero.

9 Setup
9.12 SETUP/LANGUAGES Screen

The SETUP/LANGUAGES screen allows you to select the language
used to present data on the NT300D screens (Figure 9-27).
The NT300D is shipped from the factory configured for the English
language. The NT300D firmware supports English, French, Spanish,
German, and Icelandic. After making your selection, press Return to
acknowledge your choice.
Figure 9-27 SETUP/LANGUAGES Screen
* Note – You can contact a local Trimble distributor to learn about the
availability of other language options not available on the NT300D you
are using.

Setup 9
9.13 SETUP/ I/O Screen

The SETUP/ I/O screen allows you to select and configure the input
and output protocols and baud rates for the two NT300D serial ports.
You can also set a separate position datum for each I/O port. To access
the SETUP/ I/O screens, you must power on the receiver in Install
mode. For more information see section 3.1.1, page 3-3.
Figure 9-28 SETUP I/O Screen
The two serial ports can be configured independently. You have to

select the port number you want to configure before changing the
input and output fields. The communication parameters for both ports
are fixed at 8 data bits, no parity, and 1 stop bit.
* Note – If you need information about the TSIP and TAIP protocols,
contact your local dealer.

9 Setup
The input, output, and Remote Station fields are described in Table
9-22, Table 9-23, and Table 9-24.
Table 9-22 INPUT Options
Option Description
None No data is input.
NMEA The NT300D listens for a subset of NMEA-0183
sentences from external devices. NMEA
sentences accepted by the NT300D are
discussed in Appendix B, NMEA-0183
Sentences.
REMOTE Select if you want to configure the serial port for
STATION remote display operation. When selected, the
output protocol for the same port is
automatically configured for remote display
operation.
RTCM RTCM SC-104 is the industry standard format for
communicating differential GPS correction data.
When operating in differential GPS mode using
an external source of corrections, select RTCM
for the port connected to the source of the
differential corrections.
TSIP The NT300D inputs Trimble Standard Interface
Protocol (TSIP) command packets.
TAIP The NT300D inputs Trimble ASCII Interface
Protocol (TAIP) commands and queries.

Setup 9
Table 9-23 OUTPUT Options
Option Description
None No data is output.
NMEA The NT300D outputs NMEA-0183 sentences to
external devices. The sentences available are
viewed in Figure 9-30 and discussed in
Appendix B, NMEA-0183 Sentences.
REMOTE Selected if you want the serial port to be
STATION configured for remote display operation. When
selected, the input protocol for the same port is
automatically configured for remote display
operation.
RTCM Selected if you want the NT300D to output the
corrections it received from the reference
station. The pass-through feature passes
corrections through that are received by the
internal Beacon receiver. This pass-through
feature is useful if other GPS receivers onboard
the vessel need RTCM correction data.
TSIP The NT300D outputs Trimble Standard Interface
Protocol (TSIP) report packets.
TAIP The NT300D outputs Trimble ASCII Interface
Protocol (TAIP) reports.

9 Setup
Table 9-24 REMOTE SELECT Options
Option Description
REMOTE Primary - If the output protocol is set to Remote
SELECT Station, the NT300D acts as the primary unit. Primary
can be selected for both Port 1 and Port 2.
Secondary - When selected, the port protocol is
automatically set to Remote Station and the receiver
acts as the secondary unit. Secondary can be
selected only for Port 1.
For additional information on how to operate with a
Remote Station, see Chapter 11, Operating the
Remote Station.

Setup 9
9.13.1 SETUP/I/O /I/O TEST Screen

The SETUP/I/O /I/O TEST screen (Figure 9-29) allows you to view the
data transmitted and received on the selected port.
Figure 9-29 SETUP/I/O /I/O TEST
* Note – The communication parameters for serial ports are fixed at 8

data bits, no parity, and 1 stop bit.

9 Setup
9.13.2 SETUP/ I/O /NMEA SENTENCES Screen

The SETUP/ I/O /NMEA SENTENCES screen (Figure 9-30) provides
options for selecting the Talker ID and the selection of NMEA
sentences output by the NT300D.
Figure 9-30 SETUP/ I/O /NMEA SENTENCE 1 (Port 2)

Screen
The port selected for configuration on the SETUP/ I/O screen is

displayed in the title bar.

Setup 9
Select one of the Talker ID options listed in Table 9-25. The TALKER
ID identifies the source of NMEA output sentences.
Table 9-25 TALKER ID Options
Option Description
GP Selects the Global Positioning System (GPS) as the
source for NMEA sentences (default).
LG Selects Loran/GPS as the NMEA sentence source.
LC Selects Loran C as the NMEA sentence source. The LC
Talker ID allows the NT300D to communicate with older
equipment (pre-GPS), which does not support the other
Talker IDs.
II Selects Integrated Instrumentation as the NMEA
sentence source.

Select the NMEA MESSAGES field, and choose one or more NMEA
sentences to output. toggles the NMEA sentences On or Off. For
detailed descriptions for the NMEA sentences, see Appendix B,
NMEA-0183 Sentences.

9 Setup
9.13.3 SETUP/ I/O /NMEA CONTROL Screen

The SETUP/ I/O /NMEA CONTROL screen lets you specify the NMEA
sentence output interval (max. once per second). It also allows you to
control how often a position NMEA sentence (GGA or GLL) is
output. You have the option to output positions at the same output rate
as the rest of the NMEA sentences (max. once per second) or five
times per second. If you select NMEA Version 1.5, the screen also
gives you options for turning off NMEA checksums and setting the
numeric precision of NMEA position messages. The changes made in
this screen affect the serial port currently selected for configuration.
Figure 9-31 shows the screen.
Figure 9-31 SETUP/ I/O /NMEA CONTROL 2 (Port 2)
* Note – The NT300D electronics restricts simultaneous use of 19200

baud and 38400 baud on the same serial port. If this combination of
settings is selected, a warning is displayed and the baud rate is not
changed.

Setup 9
Table 9-26 describes the fields on the SETUP/ I/O /NMEA CONTROL
screen.
Table 9-26 SETUP/ I/O /CONTROL Fields
Field Description
OUTPUT Sets how often NMEA sentences are output by the
RATE NT300D. A value of 1 outputs sentences once per
second, a value of 2 outputs sentences every
other second, and so on (default: 1).
POSITION Sets how often the NMEA position sentences
OUTPUT (GGA or GLL) are output by the NT300D:
RATE
• 5 Hz: Five times per second.
• Output Rate: Same rate as the other NMEA
sentences (default).
NMEA Determine the NMEA version used to output
OUTPUT messages:
VERSION
• Version 1.5
• Version 2.1 (default)
NMEA Includes or excludes NMEA checksums:
CHECKSUM
• Off – Checksums are not included in messages
(VERSION 1.5
• On – Checksums are included in messages
ONLY)
(default)
NMEA Determines the numeric precision of NMEA
PRECISION position messages:
(VERSION 1.5 • Standard – GLL message includes 2 decimals
ONLY) and GGA message includes 3 decimals
• Precision – GGA and GLL messages include 4
decimals (default)
* Note – Higher baud rates increase data throughput on the serial

ports, especially in cases when the port is heavily loaded by
numerous NMEA sentence or if you select the 5 Hz rate.

9 Setup
* Note – The GGA and GLL NMEA messages include 5 decimals when
operating with NMEA Version 2.1.
9.13.4 SETUP/ I/O CONTROL/DATUM Screen

The NT300D can work with up to 3 different datums simultaneously.
One datum may be used for display and data storage, another datum
may be selected for Serial Port 1, and a third datum can be used for
Serial Port 2.
The SETUP/ I/O CONTROL/DATUM screen is used to select a datum
for the NMEA position sentences (GGA and GLL) transmitted on the
selected serial port.
You may want to output positions in WGS-84 on Port 1 and in RT90
on Port 2. Since different datums result in different positions, you are
recommended to output the DTM NMEA sentence together with the
position sentence. This makes it easier to identify the datum used to
output the position.
A datum is a geometric model of the earth, and the latitude and
longitude calculated by the NT300D are related to the selected datum.
Many navigational charts are based on a local datum. WGS-84 is used
as the default datum.
In normal mode, you can choose a datum from the standard list of 13
datums. An extended list of over 180 datums is available when the
NT300D is powered on in Install mode. For more information, see
The datum screen includes a User Datum softkey option for defining
custom datums. To toggle between the extended list of datums, press
Ext Datum. The extended selection screen includes Page Up and
Page Down for paging through the list of datums. Press Return to
complete your selection of a datum.

Setup 9
* Note – To assure submeter accuracy in DGPS mode, select WGS-84.

Datum conversions rely on conversion parameters which do not
always guarantee precise conversions.
Figure 9-32 shows the standard list of 13 datums, and Figure 9-33
shows the extended list of datums.
Figure 9-32 SETUP/ I/O CTRL 1/DATUM screen
Figure 9-33 Extended Listing of Datums

9 Setup
9.13.5 SETUP/ I/O /CONTROL/DATUM/USER DATUM Screen

The SETUP/ I/O /CONTROL/DATUM/USER DATUM screen allows
you to create a datum and add it to the standard datum list. You can
create a new datum based on a three-parameter or seven-parameter
datum transformation. See Figure 9-34 and Figure 9-35. To choose a
seven-parameter datum transformation, press Seven Param.
Figure 9-34 Three-Parameter Datum Transformation
Figure 9-35 Seven-Parameter Datum Transformation

Setup 9
Use and to select parameter fields, and enter the appropriate
parameter values based on the guidelines provided in Table 9-27 or
Table 9-28. The tables give descriptions of the parameters required
for the three-parameter and seven-parameter datum transformation.
Table 9-27 Three-Parameter Datum Transformation
Fields
Field Description
NAME Accepts a user-defined datum name consisting
of up to 18 characters. Once a user-defined
datum is created, the datum name is displayed
in the standard list of datums (short list). A
dash and a 3 is automatically appended to the
end of the name when defining a 3-parameter
datum.

changed using and .
X AXIS/DELTA Difference in x-axis (m) between WGS-84 and
user datum.
Y AXIS/DELTA Difference in y-axis (m) between WGS-84 and
user datum.
Z AXIS/DELTA Difference in z-axis (m) between WGS-84 and
user datum.
A-AXIS Accepts the value for the semi-major axis of the
ellipsoidal or spheroidal model used to define
the datum. The default setting is 6,378,137.000
meters which is the equatorial radius of Earth
at mean sea level, based on the WGS-84
ellipsoid model.
E-SQUARED Square of the first eccentricity of the ellipsoid.

9 Setup

Fields
Field Description
NAME Accepts a user-defined datum name
consisting of up to 18 characters. Once a
user-defined datum is created, the datum
name is displayed in the standard list of
datums (short list). A dash and a 7 is
automatically appended to the end of the
name when defining a 7-parameter datum.

changed using and .
X AXIS/DELTA Difference in x-axis (m) between WGS-84
and user datum.
Y AXIS/DELTA Difference in y-axis (m) between WGS-84
and user datum.
Z AXIS/DELTA Difference in z-axis (m) between WGS-84
and user datum.
X AXIS/ROTATION Rotation in x-axis (arc seconds) of local
Y AXIS/ROTATION Rotation in y-axis (arc seconds) of local
Z AXIS/ROTATION Rotation in z-axis (arc seconds) of local
SCALE Scale factor between local datum and
WGS-84 datum.
A-AXIS Accepts the value for the semi-major axis of
the ellipsoidal or spheroidal model used to
define the datum. The default setting is
6,378,137.000 meters which is the
equatorial radius of Earth at mean sea level,
based on the WGS-84 ellipsoid model.
E-SQUARED Square of the first eccentricity of the
ellipsoid.

Setup 9
9.13.6 SETUP/ I/O /CC OUTPUT Screen

Aside from functioning as a serial port, Port 1 also can be configured
to output a normally-open or normally-closed contact-closure signal.
This output has the option of functioning as a 200 pulse per nautical
mile speed log output or as an output signal for triggering an external
alarm. If Port 1 is configured to output an alarm signal, the signal is
sent whenever any of the alarms enabled on the SETUP/ALARM 1, 2,
or 3 screens are triggered. The contact-closure output setting is
selected on the SETUP/ I/O /CC OUTPUT screen (see Figure 9-36).
Figure 9-36 SETUP/ I/O /CC OUTPUT Menu

9 Setup
Table 9-29 describes the SETUP/ I/O /CC OUTPUT field options.
Table 9-29 SETUP/ I/O /CC OUTPUT Field Options
Option Description
Contact • 200 PPNM - Outputs a speed log signal of 200
Closure pulse per nautical mile (PPNM) signal to the speed
Output log, based on GPS-measured speed over ground
(SOG). This provides an alternative to a
conventional log, since it is very accurate and is
immune to many of the errors which plague
conventional logs. The log signal is automatically
output when the NT300D has a valid GPS or DGPS
fix and a measured SOG above 0.3 knots. A test
signal is available to calibrate external equipment.
• Alarm - NO: Relay contacts are normally open
when no alarm event is triggered and closed when
an alarm is triggered. See the following note.
• Alarm - NC: Relay contacts are normally closed
when no alarm event is triggered and open when
an alarm is triggered. See the following note.
Test 200 A test option is available for verifying the connection
PPNM with interface devices. The test can be performed
simulating 2 or 20 knots.
Disable – No test performed.
2 Kn – Test performed simulating 2 knots.
20 Kn – Test performed simulating 20 knots.
* Note – The speed log output or alarm contact closure circuit is rated
for 150 mA maximum. Make sure the load does not exceed this value
or the relay contacts may be damaged. Do not use a highly inductive
load. Higher loads require an external relay. For more details, see

Setup 9
9.14 SETUP/ UTIL Screen

The SETUP/UTIL screen (Figure 9-37) includes three options for
clearing selected parts of internal memory, or all memory. The
softkey for displaying the screen only appears when the receiver is
started in Install mode. For more information, see section 3.1.1,
page 3-3.
Figure 9-37 SETUP/UTIL Screen

9 Setup
Press the numeric key associated with the memory clearing action and
follow the instructions displayed on the screen. Table 9-30 describes
the memory clearing options.
Table 9-30 Memory Clearing Options
Option Key Description

Clear
WPT/RTE
Clears the Waypoint and Route libraries. All
Waypoint and Route records are
Memory permanently erased when this command is
executed.
Note – If a route is active when the
command is executed, an error message is
displayed on the bottom of the screen,
indicating that you cannot erase the active
route. You must exit the screen to clear the
message and deactivate the route before
trying again.
Clear CDU
Memory
Clears the SETUP screens and applies the
factory default parameter settings. Does not
clear the Waypoint or Route libraries.
Clear All
Memory
Clears the Waypoint and Route libraries and
the CDU memory, and applies the factory
default settings.

Setup 9

The optional Smart Card Reader (SCR) allows the NT300D to store
waypoint and route libraries, and track recorder data on PC Cards.
Since the Smart Card Reader is a separate module, it can be mounted
in a protected location to shelter the delicate PC Cards from exposure
to the environment.
The Smart Card Reader requires no separate power connection, and
draws power directly from the NT300D. A single cable is used to
transfer power and data between the SCR and the NT300D.
Installation of the SCR is described in section 2.9, page 2-36.
Instructions for setting up and monitoring the SCR are described in
section 9.9, page 9-38 and section 8.10, page 8-27 respectively.
* Note – Before attempting to configure and operate the SCR, you

should already be familiar with the basic skills covered in Chapter 3,
Getting Started, and the document conventions introduced Document

Operating the SCR 10
10.1 Opening the SCR Door

The SCR door is held secured by a locking latch which presses the
door against a rubber gasket, sealing the slot openings.
To open the SCR door:
1. Flip the locking latch out of the way by pressing in and up
against the door with your thumb, see Figure 10-1.
Figure 10-1 Opening the Smart Card Reader’s Door
2. Open the door.

10.2 Closing the SCR Door

To close the SCR door:
1. Swing the door shut.
2. Lower the locking latch in place.
3. Press in on the latch until you hear it click into place.
10.3 Inserting and Removing Cards

The SCR can accept one or two Type I PC Cards or a combination of
one Type I PC Card (Slot A) and one Type II PC Card (Slot B only).
To insert a card:
1. Open the door.
2. Slide the card into the desired slot, see Figure 10-2.
Slot A is the top slot, and slot B is the bottom slot as shown in
Figure 10-2. If inserted correctly, the card should slide
smoothly all the way into the slot.
Ejector Button
for Slot A Card
Slot A
Slot B Ejector Button

for Slot B Card
Figure 10-2 Smart Card Reader Slots

If the card is upside down or inserted improperly, the card cannot
engage the electrical connection inside the slot. If this happens,
remove the card completely, flip it over, and insert it again. When the
card is correctly installed and seated in its slot, the card slot ejector
button pops out.
To remove a card:
1. Press gently on the ejector button until the card pops out.
2. Grasp the card and slide it out of the SCR.
I Caution – If a card does not slide in or out smoothly, or if it does not

go all the way into its slot, do not force it. Doing so could damage both
the card and the Smart Card Reader.
The door to the SCR should be kept closed at all times except when
inserting or removing cards in order to avoid corrosion of electrical
contacts inside the SCR. When closing the door, check to make sure
the cards and gasket are properly seated.

10.4 Memory Cards

Static Random Access Memory (SRAM) cards are required in order
to store data. Other types of PC Cards, such as FLASH memory cards,
may be used if the NT300D only needs to retrieve data from the card.
For example, the waypoint and route libraries saved to an SRAM card
by the NT300D could be copied onto FLASH memory cards using a
PC. The FLASH cards could then be distributed to multiple vessels for
use as read-only media, allowing multiple NT300D units or other
units in the NT series to use the same waypoint and route information.
SRAM cards typically have a Write Protect switch. This switch
operates similarly to the write-protect tab on a PC floppy diskette.
Setting the switch to the Write Protect position protects cards from
accidental erasure. If an attempt is made to save data to a write-
protected memory card, an error shows on the NT300D display. Refer
to the instructions included with your memory card for the location
and operation of the Write Protect switch.
All SRAM cards require a battery to maintain their memory contents.
Most cards use a replaceable lithium battery. Some SRAM cards may
have two batteries to allow one to be changed while the other battery
maintains the card's data contents. Refer to the instructions included
with your memory card for battery types and replacement procedures.
SRAM memory cards may be formatted while in a Smart Card Reader
connected to a NT300D, or while in a PC RAM slot in a PC. The
NT300D requires that any memory card used with the Smart Card
Reader be formatted using DOS Version 4.0 or higher.

10.4.1 Standard PC Cards from Various Manufacturers

Any size memory card from 32 Kbytes to the maximum allowed by
the PC Card standard may be used by the Smart Card Reader. Since a
Waypoint and Route library for the NT300D consumes approximately
20 Kbytes of memory, choose an SRAM card with a higher than
minimum capacity. Like a floppy diskette, there is a fixed amount of
the total memory capacity not available to the user, since some space
is required to store DOS directory information.
All data stored on SRAM cards by the NT300D is in DOS format and
is accessible using a standard PC RAM slot on a PC.
* Note – The Smart Card Reader only uses the root directory of a
memory card. Sub-directories, if created, may exist on a memory
card written by a PC, but these sub-directories cannot be accessed
by the NT300D.
10.5 Configuring the SCR and Formatting PC

Cards
For detailed information, see section 9.9, page 9-38.
10.6 Monitoring the Status of the SCR

For detailed information, see section 8.10, page 8-27.
10.7 Saving/Retrieving Waypoints and Routes

Waypoint and Route libraries can be backed up (saved) on memory
cards and retrieved from cards using the Smart Card Reader. For
detailed information, see section 6.5, page 6-11.

10.8 Recording and Displaying Track Data

The SETUP/TRACK screen includes an option for storing navigation
data on the SCR. You can also display the stored data on the STATUS/
GRAPH screen. For detailed instructions, see section 9.11, page 9-45
and section 8.9, page 8-24.
10.9 Caring for the SCR

The inside of the Smart Card Reader should be inspected periodically
for dirt or other internal debris. The outside of the SCR around the
door areas should be periodically wiped down. The drain holes,
located on the bottom of the Smart Card Reader, should be
occasionally cleaned to avoid blockage.
Should salt water enter the Smart Card Reader you may, in an
emergency, use fresh water to flush out the contamination. If this
becomes necessary, unplug the Smart Card Reader from the NT300D,
and make sure that the power is off before attempting to flush out the
Smart Card Reader. The Smart Card Reader should then be taken to
an authorized Trimble Service Center as soon as possible for
inspection and any necessary repairs.
I Caution – Do not attempt to flush out your Smart Card Reader until
you disconnect the cable from the NT300D. The SCR no longer
receives power when the cable is disconnected. If the SCR is flush-
mounted, remove it before flushing it out to prevent water from
seeping behind the panel and into electrical connections.

10.9.1 Caring for the Cards

All PC Cards must be stored in a location away from extreme
temperatures and the corrosive effects of seawater and high humidity.
High temperatures reduce battery life in memory cards. Although the
card sockets utilize gold plating for reliable connections, the effects of
corrosion reduce the life expectancy of PC Cards.
The cards should be wiped down periodically with a soft cloth to
remove any deposits and other buildups. Immediately wipe down the
cards if they are exposed to condensation and other sources of
moisture. Refer to the directions included with your memory card for
more information about caring for your card.

11 Operating the Remote
Station
The Remote Station can be installed as an option to the NT300D. It is
a fully functional second navigation station that operates
independently and shares GPS, waypoint, route, and navigation data.
Installation of the Remote Station is described in section 2.10,
page 2-40. Instructions for setting up the Remote Station are
described in section 9.13, page 9-54.
Once configured for Remote Station, the operations that can be
performed at either the primary NT300D unit or secondary Remote
Station include:
• Display of all navigation screens
• Display of all status screens
• Setting and editing all waypoints
• Setting and editing all routes
• Setting and changing all general operating parameters
The operations that can only be performed locally at each unit
include:
• Plotting the storage of vessel data on SCR or internal memory
• Connection and operation of the SCR
• Selection of languages, coordinate systems, and units

Operating the Remote Station 11
The operations that can be performed at the primary NT300D unit
include:
• Setting and changing interfacing parameters of Serial Port 2
on the primary unit
* Note – Serial Port 2 on the Remote Station is not usable.

The following tables contain information on the physical
specifications and operating characteristics of the NT300D receiver,
combined GPS/Beacon antenna, and Smart Card Reader.
Table A-1 NT300D Receiver Physical Specifications
Dimensions 26 cm W x 18 cm H x 5 cm D
(10 in. W x 7 in. H x 2 in. D)
Weight 4 lbs.
Power 12 and 24 volt systems (-10%, +30%), 12 Watts maximum
Fuse Fast-blow, 3 Amp rated for 32 Volts minimum. Use 3AG style
fuse
Temperature Operating: 0°C to +55°C (32°F to +131°F)
Storage: –20°C to +60°C (–4°F to +140°F)
Humidity 95% non-condensing
Environmental IEC945
Mounting Gimbal mount standard or optional flush mount
Keypad Rubber, backlit, high temperature tactile feedback
LCD Display 0.36 mm dot pitch, 320 X 240 pixel, 5.8 in. (14.7 cm) diagonal,
monochrome, Cold Cathode Fluorescent (CCFL) adjustable
backlight, transflective.
Certifications CE Mark
IEC945 Compliant
Russian type approval
Polish type approval
NT300D Operation Manual A-1

Technical Specifications A
Table A-2 Combined GPS/Beacon Antenna Physical Specifications
Weight 2 lb. 8 oz. (1,134 grams) with pole adapter

2 lb. 2 oz. (964 grams) without pole adapter
Temperature Operating: –40°C to +65°C (-40°F to +149°F)

Storage: -40°C to +100°C (-40°F to +212°F)
Antenna Cable 75 ohm, quad-shield RG-59 coaxial cable with maximum
allowable cable loss of 10dB @ 1.5 GHz, marine Type F
connectors (0.50 in. (1.27 cm) diameter), and a drive voltage of
9 volts
Table A-3 Smart Card Reader (SCR) Option Physical Specifications
Dimensions 18 cm W x 10 cm H x 4 cm D
(7 in. W x 4 in. H x 1.5 in. D)
Weight 2lb. (907g) with mounting bracket
Cable 10-foot, 18 Conductor Shielded Ý 0.30 in. (0.76cm).

Connectors: 18 pin CONXALL CDU end, hardwired SCR end ∅
1.06 in. (2.69 cm)
Temperature Operating: 0°–55°C (32°–131°F)

Storage: -20°–60°C (-4°–140°F)
Power <400mW Active Maximum (derived from CDU) <200mW Standby
(typical)
Table A-4 Remote Station Physical Specifications
Remote See NT300D Physical Specifications, Table A-1, page A-1.

Station
Remote Supplied: 30m (100 ft.)
Station Cable Maximum: 300m (1000 ft.)
A-2 NT300D Operation Manual

Table A-5 NT300D Receiver Operating Characteristics
GPS Receiver 12 channel parallel
Position Update Rate Up to 5 times per second on the serial ports with a
latency of less than 2/10 of a second and 1 time per
second on the display.
GPS Acquisition Time < 30 second warm start
Differential GPS RTCM SC-104, version 2.1, record types 1, 2, 3, 7, 9, 16
Languages English, German, French, Spanish, Icelandic
Alarms Anchor, Watch, Cross Track Error, Destination,

Waypoint, Hazard, Time, GPS Lock, DGPS Lock
Coordinate Systems Geographical coordinates (latitude and longitude), UTM,
HK80, Decca
Datums More than 180 predefined datums and user-definable

datum using a 3 or 7 parameter conversions
Serial Ports 2 independent RS-422 ports, 7-pin CONXALL connector
Output Protocols NMEA 0183, RTCM, TAIP, TSIP, Remote Station
Input Protocols NMEA 0183, RTCM, TAIP, TSIP
RTCM SC-104 Version 2.1
NMEA Version: 1.5 and 2.1

Input: MSK, HDG, and VHW sentences
Output: ALM, APA, APB, BOD, BWC, BWR, CFG, DTM,
GGA, GLL, GRS, GSA, GST, GSV, HSC, MSS, RMC, RMB,
VDR, VTG, WCV, WPL, XTE, ZDA, and ZLZ sentences
Transmit: 10 NMEA loads (2.0 mA per load).
Receive: 1 NMEA load.

Table A-5 NT300D Receiver Operating Characteristics (Continued)
Speed Output PPNM: 200 (fixed)

Type: Contact Closure, Form 1A (single pole, normally
open)
Pulse Width: 85 ms. minimum closure
Current: 150 mA maximum
Protection: Over-current, self-resetting upon removal of
overload
Resistance: Closed, 6 Ohms maximum, Open,
500 kOhm minimum
External Alarm Type: Contact Closure, Form 1A (single pole, normally

open) or Contact Closure, Form 1B single pole, normally
closed (user selectable)
Current: 150 mA maximum
Protection: Over-current, self-resetting upon removal of
overload
Resistance: Closed, 6 Ohms maximum, Open, 500
kOhms minimum
Firmware Flash memory, field upgradeable
Warranty 1 year
Additional 1 or 4 year extended warranty options are
available
* Note – The NT300D may be configured for a speed log output or an

external alarm output.

Table A-6 Smart Card Reader (SCR) Option Operating

Characteristics
Slots 2 PC Card slots. The SCR can accept one or two Type I PC Cards or
a combination of one Type I PC Card (Slot A) and one Type II PC
Card (Slot B only).
Memory Supports PC Cards from various manufacturers. Any size memory
Card card from 32 KBytes to the maximum allowed by the PC Card
Capacity standard may be used. SRAM cards are required in order to store
data. Other types of PC Cards, such as FLASH memory cards may
be used if the NT300D only needs to retrieve data from the card.
Examples: LAT/LON, COG/SOG, GPS state and Time every 5
seconds for 3 days requires 1MB. One block of 500 waypoints and 50
routes takes up approximately 20KB


The NT300D can output a selection of NMEA-0183 sentences. The
receiver supports both NMEA Version 1.5 and 2.1.
B.1 NMEA-0183 Sentence Structure

NMEA-0183 sentences are strings of comma-delimited text. Figure
B-1 shows the structure of an NMEA-0183 sentence.
Asterisk Delimiter
Comma Delimiter
$GPZDA,220320.0,26,06,1997,00,00*52
Sentence ID
Field 1
Field 2
Field 3
Field 4
Field 5
Field 6
Checksum
Figure B-1 Sample ZDA Sentence Structure
NT300D Operation Manual B-1

NMEA-0183 Sentences B
Each NMEA sentence includes a sentence ID to distinguish the

sentence from other NMEA sentences in the data stream. The actual
data included in NMEA-0183 sentences is placed in fields. An NMEA
sentence contains several fields, and each field is preceded by a
comma character. The sample sentence in Figure B-1 contains six
fields. The NMEA sentences include a checksum value which is
useful for checking the integrity of the data included in the sentence.
The sentence structure of the sample ZDA sentence, shown below and
the sentence fields are described in Table B-1:
$GPZDA,220320.0,26,06,1997,00,00*52
Table B-1 Sample ZDA Sentence Structure
Field Description
1 Time, in UTC. (220320.0 in the sample sentence)
2 Day, 01 to 31. (26 in the sample sentence)
3 Month, 01 to 12. (06 in the sample sentence)
4 Year. (1997 in the sample sentence)
5 Local time zone offset from GMT, 00 to ±13 hours. (00 in
the sample sentence)
6 Local time zone offset from GMT, minutes. Fields 5 and 6,
together, yield the total offset. For example, if field 5 is -5
and field 6 is 15, local time is 5 hours and 15 minutes
earlier than GMT. (00 in the sample sentence)
The NMEA-0183 sentence examples in this chapter are Version 2.1

and presented in the format shown in Table B-1. The structure of each
sample sentence is shown in the paragraphs preceding the sentence
structure table.
The numbers in the Field column represent the sentence fields in left-
to-right order. Field 1 is the first field following the first comma
delimiter. In the sample sentence, field 1 contains the UTC Time value
(220320.0). The last field in the sentence is preceded by the last
comma in the sentence (00 in the sample sentence).
B-2 NT300D Operation Manual

B.1.1 Symbols and Delimiters

All sentences conform to the NMEA-0183 Version 1.5 and 2.1 format.
Symbols and delimiters are used to identify or separate the various
kinds of data included in the sentence.
NMEA-0183 sentences always begin with a dollar sign character ($)
followed by a talker ID code and a sentence ID code. For the sample
ZDA sentence, GP is the talker ID, and ZDA is the sentence ID.
The string of comma delimited text immediately following the
sentence ID code is composed of fields containing data. Each field is
followed by a comma character (,). For the sample sentence, the data
fields are shown below:
220320.0,26,06,1997,00,00
The first field contains the UTC time value (220320.0), the second
field contains the Day value (26), and so on.
NMEA-0183 sentences include a checksum value which is preceded
by an asterisk character (*). Checksums are required for Version 2.1
but are optional for Version 1.5. For more information about
checksum values, see section B.1.2, page B-4.
NMEA-0183 sentences are always terminated with a carriage return
and line feed. The carriage return and line feed pair marks the end of
the sentence.

B.1.2 Checksum Values

The NT300D conforms to NMEA-0183 Version 2.1 which states that
checksums are mandatory for all sentences. Checksum values are
always included in output sentences, but are optional for input
sentences.
The receiver also conforms to NMEA-0183 Version 1.5 where
checksums are declared optional.
Checksum values are used to verify the integrity of the data included
in the sentence. The sample sentence, shown in Table B-1, includes a
checksum value. An asterisk character (*) is used to delimit the last
data field from the checksum value (52 in the sample sentence).
The checksum is the 8-bit exclusive OR of all characters in the
sentence, between but not including the $ and * delimiters. Commas
are also included. The hexadecimal result is converted to two ASCII
characters (0-9, A-F). The most significant character appears first.
B.1.3 Field Formats

The data values included in fields meet the format specifications
established for the NMEA-0183, Version 1.5 and 2.1 standards.

Null Fields
Null fields are included in some NMEA sentences when no data is
available for a particular field. Null fields are empty and are usually
reserved for transmitting data on a periodic or irregular basis. The
comma delimiter for the Null field is immediately followed by the
comma delimiter for the next field in the sentence string.
The inclusion of Null fields in a sentence is important because many
NMEA sentences contain a fixed number of fields. NMEA sentence
interpreters (software for processing NMEA sentences) expect to find
a fixed number of fields in these sentences, and specific kinds of data
in each field. The sentence processing software assumes that no data
is available for a particular field when a Null field is encountered
while interpreting a sentence.
Talker ID Codes
The Talker ID code identifies the source of the data (GPS, Loran C,
Sounder). The NMEA-0183 standard defines 35 Talker ID codes. The
Talker ID codes available for NMEA-0183 output from the NT300D
are described in Table B-2.
Table B-2 Supported Talker ID Codes
Code Description
GP GPS
LG Loran C/ GPS
LC Loran C
II Integrated Instrumentation
* Note – Older marine electronic equipment, designed prior to the

introduction of GPS may only accept the LC Talker ID. The NT300D is
designed to support the LC Talker ID to remain compatible with older
equipment interfaces.

Latitude and Longitude Values

The latitude and longitude values included in NMEA sentences are
presented in degrees, minutes, and decimal minutes. Latitude is
presented as ddmm.mmmmm in a single field, and longitude is
presented as dddmm.mmmmm in a single field. Within the field,
degree values are in dd or ddd format, and minutes and fractions of
minutes are in mm.mmmmm format.
Latitude and longitude direction values (north, south, east, or west)
are placed in a separate field. Direction is a single character: N, S, E,
or W for North, South, East, or West.
The datum for latitude and longitude output on the respective serial
port depends on the datum selected in the SETUP/ I/O /CONTROL/
DATUM screens. The DTM sentence can be enabled to report the
datum on the positions output in GGA and GLL sentences. For
detailed information, see section 9.13.2, page 9-59.
Time Values
Time values are in UTC (Universal Time Coordinated), and are
inserted in sentence strings in hhmmss.ss format, where hh is hours
(from 00–23), mm is minutes, and ss.ss is seconds and fractions of
seconds.
Other Values
The NMEA-0183 standard established the format of the data included
in sentence fields.

B.1.4 Custom NMEA Sentences

The NMEA-0183 Interface Standard also permits the use of custom
device-dependent sentences. The NT300D subset of NMEA sentences
includes several of these custom sentences. Figure B-2 shows the
structure of a custom NMEA sentence.
Asterisk Delimiter
Comma Delimiter
Dollar Sign Delimiter
$PTNLR,ERTL,5,1,001,C,*01
Proprietary (Custom)
Manufacturer's Code
Function Code
Field 1: Sentence ID
Field 2
Field 3
Field 4
Field 5
Checksum
Figure B-2 Custom NMEA Sentence Structure
Trimble custom NMEA sentences always begin with the dollar sign
($) delimiter, the Proprietary Code (P), the Manufacturer’s Code
(TNL), a single-letter function code which classifies the function
performed by the sentence, and a comma character followed by a 3 or
4 letter Sentence ID (,ERTL in the example).

The function codes or the omission of a function code are described

in more detail in Table B-3.
Table B-3 Custom NMEA Function Codes
Code Description
A Identifies the sentence as an acknowledgment.
C Identifies the sentence as a command.
Q Identifies the sentence as a query operation.
R Identifies the sentence as a report.
The omission of a function code indicates that the
sentence is a status report containing receiver
configuration information.
Custom NMEA sentences also include a checksum value, preceded by

an asterisk (*) delimiter. Checksum values are always included in
custom output sentences, but are optional for custom input sentences.
For more information about checksum values, see section B.1.2,
page B-4.

B.2 NMEA Sentence Summary

Table B-4 summarizes the standard and custom NMEA-0183
sentences supported by the NT300D and identifies the page number
where you can find detailed information about each sentence. The
Type column indicates whether the sentence is input to the receiver or
output from the receiver.
Table B-4 Supported NMEA-0183 Sentences
Code Function Type Page

ALM GPS Almanac Data Output B-16
APA Autopilot Sentence "A" Output B-18
APB Autopilot Sentence "B" Output B-19
BOD Bearing from Origin to Destination Output B-21
BWC Bearing and Distance to Waypoint – Great Output B-22
Circle
BWR Bearing and Distance to Waypoint – Rhumb Output B-23
Line
DTM Datum Reference Output B-24
GGA GPS Fix Data Output B-25
GLL Position Data Output B-26
GPQ NMEA Sentence Query Input B-12
GRS GPS Range Residuals Output B-27
GSA GPS DOP and Active Satellites Output B-28
GST GPS Pseudorange Noise Statistics Output B-29
GSV GPS Satellites in View Output B-30
HDG Heading, Deviation and Variation Input B-14
HSC Heading to Steer Command Output B-31
MSK Beacon Receiver Settings Input B-13
MSS Beacon Receiver Signal Status Output B-32
R00 Route Information Output B-33
RMB Recommended Minimum Navigation Output B-34
Information

Table B-4 Supported NMEA-0183 Sentences (Continued)

RMC Recommended Minimum Specific GPS Data Output B-36
VDR Set and Drift Output B-38
VHW Water Speed and Heading Input B-15
VTG Course Over Ground and Ground Speed Output B-39
WCV Waypoint Closure Velocity Output B-40
WPL Waypoint Location Output B-41
XTE Cross-Track Error Output B-42
ZDA Time and Date Output B-43
ZLZ Time of Day Output B-44
PTNL,CFG,0 Product Information Record Output B-45
PTNL,CFG,1 GPS Record Output B-46
PTNL,CFG,2 Navigation Record Output B-48
PTNL,CFG,3 Serial Port Record Output B-50
PTNL,CFG,4 NMEA Record (Part 1) Output B-52
PTNL,CFG,5 NMEA Record (Part 2) Output B-52
PTNLA,ERTI Create Route Acknowledgment Output B-53
PTNLC,ERTI Create Route Command Input B-54
PTNLQ,ERTI Route Query Input B-56
PTNLR,ERTI Route Report Output B-57
PTNLA,ERTL Create Leg Acknowledgment Output B-58
PTNLC,ERTL Create Leg Command Input B-59
PTNLQ,ERTL Leg Query Input B-60
PTNLR,ERTL Leg Report Output B-61
PTNLA,EWPI Waypoint Configuration Acknowledgment Output B-62
PTNLC,EWPI Waypoint Configuration Command Input B-63
PTNLQ,EWPI Waypoint Query Input B-64
PTNLR,EWPI Waypoint Report Output B-65
PTNLQ,NRTI Route Library Status Query Input B-66

Table B-4 Supported NMEA-0183 Sentences (Continued)

PTNLR,NRTI Route Library Status Report Output B-67
PTNLQ,NRTL Leg Library Status Query Input B-68
PTNLR,NRTL Leg Library Status Report Output B-69
PTNLQ,NWPI Waypoint Library Status Query Input B-70
PTNLR,NWPI Waypoint Library Status Report Output B-71
PTNLR,SRTI Route Search Report Output B-72
PTNLS,SRTI Route Search Input B-73
PTNLR,SWPI Waypoint Search Report Output B-74
PTNLS,SWPI Waypoint Search Input B-75
PTNLQ,VERS Receiver Information Query Input B-76
PTNLR,VERS Receiver Information Report Output B-77

B.3 Standard NMEA Input Sentences

The NMEA sentences input by the NT300D are described in the
following sections. All sentences described conform to the
NMEA-0183 Version 2.1 format.
GPQ Input Sentence
NMEA Sentence Query
This query sentence lets you query any NMEA sentence supported by
the NT300D. The receiver answers by sending the requested NMEA
sentence. The sentence structure is shown below, and Table B-5
describes the sentence fields.
$GPGPQ,GGA
Table B-5 GPQ Sentence Fields
Field Description
1 NMEA Sentence ID

MSK Input Sentence

Beacon Receiver Settings
The MSK sentence configures the two beacon channels in the
NT300D. Both channels are programmed with the same settings,
input by the MSK sentence. The sentence structure is shown below,
and Table B-6 describes the sentence fields.
$GPMSK,287.0,M,,A,
Table B-6 MSK Sentence Fields
Field Description
1 Sets radiobeacon frequency if Beacon receiver is set to
Manual Frequency mode. Range: 283.5 kHz to 325.0 kHz
2 Sets Auto or Manual frequency selection:
A: Auto
M: Manual
If auto is specified, the previous field value is ignored
Note – Also sets the Beacon receiver to Auto Distance
mode. If no almanac is available, the Beacon receiver is
automatically set to Auto Power mode. For detailed
information about the different Beacon acquisition modes,
see Table 9-14, page 9-33.
3 Null field
Note – This field normally includes the radiobeacon bit
rate. However the NT300D ignores the data in the field
and automatically detects the bit rate of beacon signals.
4 Auto or Manual bit rate selection:
A: Auto (Always set to Auto - see Field 3)
5 Not used

HDG Input Sentence
Heading, Deviation and Variation
The HDG sentence contains heading, deviation, and magnetic
variance information. The sentence structure is shown below, and
Table B-7 describes the sentence fields.
$GPHDG,52.5,1.2,E,0.0,W*4C
Table B-7 HDG Sentence Fields
Field Description
1 Magnetic Sensor Heading, in degrees
2 Magnetic Deviation, in degrees
3 Variance Sense:
E: East
W: West
4 Magnetic Variation, in degrees
5 Variance Sense:
E: East
W: West

VHW Input Sentence

Water Speed and Heading
The VHW sentence reports the vessel’s water speed and heading. The
sentence structure is shown below, and Table B-8 identifies the VHW
sentence fields.
$GPVHW,218.0,T,219.1,M,1.0,N,1.8,K*33
Table B-8 VHW Sentence Fields
Field Description
1 Heading (true), in degrees
2 T: degrees true
3 Heading (magnetic), in degrees
4 M: degrees magnetic
5 Speed, in knots
6 N: knots
7 Speed, in kilometers per hour
8 K: km/hr

B.4 Standard NMEA Output Sentences

The NMEA sentences output by the NT300D are described in the
following sections. All sentences described conform to the
NMEA-0183 Version 2.1 format.
ALM Output Sentence
GPS Almanac Data
The ALM sentence contains the GPS week number and the satellite
health and complete almanac data for one satellite. This message is
transmitted on the following occasions:
• When the ALM sentence is first turned on, it is immediately
transmitted for all satellites
• When the ALM sentence is queried with the $GPGPQ,ALM
query, it is transmitted for all satellites
• When a change in the satellite almanac occurs, the ALM
sentence is transmitted for the satellites affected by the
change
The ALM sentence is scheduled to output once per second.
Therefore, the receiver requires 32 seconds to output the almanac data
for all 32 satellites.
The sentence structure is shown below, and Table B-9 identifies the
ALM sentence fields.
$GPALM,1,1,03,698,00,6ae6,1d,779f,fdef,a10d68,6469a6,7c1f62,
5f5839,*43

Table B-9 ALM Sentence Fields
Field Description
1 Total number of ALM sentences for this cycle
2 Sentence sequence number
3 SV PRN number (01 to 32)
4 GPS week number
5 SV health status
6 Eccentricity
7 Almanac reference time
8 Inclination angle
9 Rate of right ascension
10 Root of semi-major axis
11 Argument of perigee
12 Longitude of ascension node
13 Mean anomaly
14 A f0, clock parameter
15 A f1, clock parameter

APA Output Sentence
Autopilot Sentence "A"
The APA sentence contains navigation information commonly used
by autopilots. The sentence structure is shown below, and Table B-10
identifies the APA sentence fields.
$GPAPA,A,A,0.002,R,N,V,,344.5,M,0014*41
Table B-10 APA Sentence Fields
Field Description
1 Blink and SNR:
A: Valid
V: Invalid
2 Cycle Lock:
A: Valid
V: Invalid
3 Magnitude of cross-track error
4 Direction to steer:
L: Left
R: Right
5 Cross-track error unit:
N: Nautical Miles
6 Status:
A: Arrival circle centered
V: Arrival circle not centered
7 Status:
A: Perpendicular passed at waypoint
V: Perpendicular not passed at waypoint
8 Magnetic bearing from origin waypoint to destination
waypoint
9 M: Magnetic
10 Destination waypoint number

APB Output Sentence

Autopilot Sentence "B"
The APB sentence contains navigation information commonly used
by autopilots. The sentence structure is shown below, and Table B-11
identifies the APB sentence fields.
$GPAPB,A,A,0.002,R,N,V,,0.0,T,0014,312.1,T,312.1,T*5D
Table B-11 APB Sentence Fields
Field Description
1 Status:
A: Valid data
V: General warning flag when a reliable fix is not
available
2 Status:
A: Valid data or not used
V: Loran-C cycle lock warning flag
3 Magnitude of cross-track error
4 Direction to steer:
L: Left
R: Right
5 Cross-track error unit:
N: Nautical Miles
6 Status:
A: Arrival circle centered
V: Arrival circle not centered
7 Status:
A: Perpendicular passed at waypoint
V: Perpendicular not passed at waypoint
8 Bearing from origin waypoint to destination waypoint
9 M: Magnetic
T: True

Table B-11 APB Sentence Fields (Continued)
Field Description
11 Bearing present position to destination
12 M: Magnetic
T: True
13 Heading-to-steer to destination waypoint
14 M: Magnetic
T: True

BOD Output Sentence

Bearing from Origin to Destination
The BOD sentence contains navigation information between the
origin waypoint and destination waypoint. The sentence structure is
shown below, and Table B-12 identifies the BOD sentence fields.
$GPBOD,0.0,T,344.5,M,0014,0001*45
Table B-12 BOD Sentence Fields
Field Description
1 True Bearing
2 T: True
3 Magnetic Bearing
4 M: Magnetic
6 Origin waypoint number

BWC Output Sentence
Bearing and Distance to Waypoint – Great Circle
The BWC sentence includes bearing and distance to a specified
waypoint from present position, based on Great Circle calculations.
BWC sentence fields.
$GPBWC,154005.1,3723.5747,N,2202.6711,W,312.1,T,296.5,M,001.900,N,
0014*30
Table B-13 BWC Sentence Fields
Field Description
1 UTC time of bearing
2 Waypoint Latitude
3 Direction of Latitude:
N: North
S: South
4 Waypoint Longitude
5 Direction of Longitude:
E: East
W: West
6 True Bearing
7 T: True
8 Magnetic Bearing
9 M: Magnetic
10 Distance to waypoint
11 M: Nautical Miles
12 Waypoint number

BWR Output Sentence

Bearing and Distance to Waypoint – Rhumb Line
The BWR sentence includes bearing and distance to a specified
waypoint from present position, based on Rhumb Line calculations.
BWR sentence fields.
$GPBWR,154005.1,3723.5747,N,2202.6711,W,288.3,T,272.7,M,002.400,N,
0012*29
Table B-14 BWR Sentence Fields
Field Description
1 UTC time of bearing
2 Waypoint Latitude
N: North
S: South
E: East
W: West
6 True Bearing
7 T: True
8 Magnetic Bearing
9 M: Magnetic
10 Distance to waypoint
11 M: Nautical Miles
12 Waypoint number

DTM Output Sentence
Datum Reference
The DTM sentence identifies the local geodetic datum. Latitude,
longitude, and altitude offsets from the reference datum and the
selection of the reference datum, if not WGS-84, are also included in
the sentence. The sentence is used to identify the datum of the
position reported by the GGA and GLL sentences. The sentence
structure is shown below, and Table B-15 identifies the DTM sentence
fields.
$GPDTM,W84,,0.0,N,0.0,E,0.0,W84*6F
Table B-15 DTM Sentence Fields
Field Description
1 Local datum
2 Local datum subdivision code
3 Latitude offset in minutes North or South
4 Longitude offset in minutes East or West
5 Altitude offset in meters
6 Reference datum

GGA Output Sentence

GPS Fix Data
The GGA sentence contains the time, position, and fix related data.
GGA sentence fields.
$GPGGA,220320.0,3723.47759,N,12202.23865,W,2,06,1.3,20.34,M,
-25.67,M,4.0,0266*7A
Table B-16 GGA Sentence Fields
Field Description
1 UTC time of position fix
2 Latitude in DDMM.MMMMM format
N: North
S: South
4 Longitude in DDDMM.MMMMM format
E: East
W: West
6 GPS Quality indicator:
0: Fix not valid
1: GPS fix
2: DGPS fix
7 Number of SVs in use (00 to 12)
8 HDOP
9 Antenna height, MSL reference
10 M: Indicates the altitude is in meters
11 Geoidal separation
12 M: Indicates that the geoidal separation is in meters
13 Age of differential GPS data record (Type 1) or a null field
when DGPS is not used
14 Base station ID (0000 to 1023)

GLL Output Sentence
Position Data
The GLL sentence specifies the position fix, time of position fix, and
status. The sentence structure is shown below, and Table B-17
identifies the GLL sentence fields.
$GPGLL,3723.47759,N,12202.23865,W,220320.0,A*23
Table B-17 GLL Sentence Fields
Field Description
1 Latitude in DDMM.MMMMM format
N: North
S: South
3 Longitude in DDDMM.MMMMM format
E: East
W: West
5 UTC time of position fix
6 A: Data valid (set if NT300D outputs GPS or DGPS data)
V: Data not valid

GRS Output Sentence

GPS Range Residuals
The GRS sentence is used to support the Receiver Autonomous
Integrity Monitoring (RAIM). The sentence structure is shown below,
and Table B-18 describes the sentence fields.
$GPGRS,220320.0,0,-0.8,-0.2,-0.1,-0.2,0.8,0.6,,,,,,,*55
Table B-18 GRS Sentence Fields
Field Description
1 UTC time of GGA position fix
2 0: Residuals used to calculate position given in the
matching GGA line
1: Residuals recomputed after the GGA position was
computed
3-14 Range residuals for satellites used in the navigation
solution, in meters

GSA Output Sentence
GPS DOP and Active Satellites
The GSA sentence identifies the GPS position fix mode, the SVs used
for navigation, and the DOP values. The sentence structure is shown
below, and Table B-19 identifies the GSA sentence fields.
$GPGSA,M,3,06,17,21,22,23,26,,,,,,,2.5,1.3,2.2*3D
Table B-19 GSA Sentence Fields
Field Description
1 Mode:
M: Manual, forced to operate in 2D or 3D
A: Automatic, 3D/2D
2 Mode:
1: Fix not available
2: 2D
3: 3D
3–14 ID's of SVs used in position fix (null for unused fields)
15 PDOP
16 HDOP
17 VDOP

GST Output Sentence

GPS Pseudorange Noise Statistics
The GST sentence is used to support Receiver Autonomous Integrity
Monitoring (RAIM). The sentence structure is shown below, and
$GPGST,220320.0,1.3,0.8,0.5,166.1,0.8,0.5,1.6,*4F
Table B-20 GST Message Fields
Field Description
1 UTC time of GGA fix
2 RMS value of the standard deviation of the range inputs
to the navigation process (range inputs include
pseudoranges and DGPS corrections)
3 Standard deviation of semi-major axis of error ellipse, in
meters
4 Standard deviation of semi-minor axis of error ellipse, in
meters
5 Orientation of semi-major axis of error ellipse, in degrees
from true north
6 Standard deviation of latitude error, in meters
7 Standard deviation of longitude error, in meters
8 Standard deviation of altitude error, in meters

GSV Output Sentence
GPS Satellites in View
The GSV sentence identifies the number of SVs in view, the PRN
numbers, elevation, azimuth and SNR values. The sentence structure
is shown below, and Table B-21 identifies the GSV sentence fields.
$GPGSV,2,1,07,06,54,136,49,17,65,347,51,21,24,224,45,22,28,285,46*75
$GPGSV,2,2,07,23,62,217,50,26,33,082,47,03,07,314,28,,,,*4F
Table B-21 GSV Sentence Fields
Field Description
1 Total number of sentences of this type in this cycle
2 Sentence number
3 Total number of SVs visible
4 SV PRN number
5 Elevation in degrees, 90° maximum
6 Azimuth, degrees from true north, 000° to 359 °
7 SNR, 00 to 99 dB-Hz (null when not tracking)
8-11 Information about second SV, same format as
fields 4 to 7
12-15 Information about third SV, same format as
fields 4 to 7
16-19 Information about fourth SV, same format as fields 4 to 7

HSC Output Sentence

Heading to Steer Command
The HSC sentence indicates the heading to steer. The sentence
structure is shown below, and Table B-22 describes the sentence
fields.
$GPHSC,288.3,T,272.7,M*57
Table B-22 HSC Sentence Fields
Field Description
1 True heading to steer
2 T: True
3 Magnetic heading to steer
4 M: Magnetic

MSS Output Sentence
Beacon Receiver Signal Status
The MSS sentence identifies the status of the beacon signal, including
the beacon signal strength, beacon signal-to-noise ratio (SNR),
beacon frequency, and beacon bit rate. The sentence structure is
shown below, and Table B-23 describes the sentence fields.
$GPMSS,25.5,17.3,287.0,100*4F
Table B-23 MSS Sentence Fields
Field Description
1 Signal Strength (SS), dB ref: 1 µV/m
2 Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR), dB-Hz
3 Beacon Frequency, 283.5 to 325.0 kHz
4 Beacon Bit Rate (25, 50, 100, 200) bits per second

R00 Output Sentence

Route Information
The R00 sentence outputs information from the previous waypoint, as
well as the next four destination waypoints of the route. It is followed
by the WPL sentence which provides additional waypoint
information. The sentence structure is shown below, and Table B-23
describes the sentence fields.
$GPR00,0001,0003,0015,0132,0002,,,,,,,,,*41
Table B-24 R00 Sentence Fields
Field Description
1 Route Number, 00 only
2 Waypoint Number
3-6 Destination Waypoint
7-15 Null Fields

RMB Output Sentence
Recommended Minimum Navigation Information
The RMB sentence contains navigation data from the present position
to a destination waypoint. The RMB sentence always accompanies
the RMC sentence when a destination is active. When the RMB
sentence is turned on, the sentence is output once per second
regardless of whether or not the OUTPUT RATE is set to a different
rate on the SETUP/ I/O /CONTROL screen.
* Note – Steering direction in XTE is opposite of the direction shown on

the display. The display shows which side on the track you are on.
* Note – The RMB sentence is automatically turned on when the RMC

sentence is turned on from the SETUP/ I/O NMEA SENTENCE screen.
However, the sentence is only output when a destination is active.
* Note – When the RMB sentence is turned on, the sentence is output
once per second regardless of whether or not the OUTPUT RATE is
set to a different rate on the SETUP/ I/O /CONTROL screen.

The sentence structure is shown below, and Table B-25 describes the
sentence fields.
$GPRMB,A,0.0020,L,0001,0065,3723.47805,N,2202.23985,W,2.540,19.3,
07.50,V*33
Table B-25 RMB Sentence Fields
Field Description
1 Data status:
A: Data Valid
V: Navigation Receiver Warning
2 Cross-Track error, in nautical miles
3 Steering direction:
L: Left
R: Right
4 Origin waypoint ID
5 Destination waypoint ID
6 Destination waypoint latitude
7 Latitude direction:
N: North
S: South
8 Destination waypoint longitude
9 Longitude direction:
E: East
W: West
10 Range to destination, in nautical miles
11 Bearing to destination, in degrees
12 Destination closing velocity, in knots
13 Arrival status:
A: Arrival circle entered or perpendicular panned
V: Not entered or panned

RMC Output Sentence
Recommended Minimum Specific GPS Data
The RMC sentence identifies the UTC time, status, latitude, longitude,
speed over ground (SOG), date, and magnetic variation of the position
fix. When the RMC sentence is turned on, the sentence is always
output once per second regardless of whether or not the OUTPUT
RATE is set to a different rate on the SETUP/ I/O /CONTROL screen.
* Note – When the RMC sentence is turned on, the sentence is always
output once per second regardless of whether or not the OUTPUT
RATE is set to a different rate on the SETUP/ I/O /CONTROL screen.

sentence fields.
$GPRMC,230510,A,3723.4782,N,12202.2393,W,000.04,271.9,040199,15.6,
E*6B
Table B-26 RMC Sentence Fields
Field Description
1 UTC time of the position fix
2 Status:
A: Valid
V: Navigation Receiver Warning (V is output whenever
the receiver suspects something is wrong)
3 Latitude coordinate
4 Latitude direction:
N: North
S: South
5 Longitude coordinate
6 Longitude direction:
W: West
E: East
7 Speed Over Ground (SOG) in knots
8 Track Made Good, True, in degrees
9 Date in dd/mm/yy format
10 Magnetic Variation, in degrees
11 Direction of magnetic variation:
E: Easterly variation from True course (subtracts from
True course)
W: Westerly variation from True course (adds to True
course)

VDR Output Sentence
Set and Drift
The VDR sentence contains the direction towards which a current
flows (Set) and the speed (Drift) of the current. The sentence structure
is shown below, and Table B-27 identifies the VDR sentence fields.
$GPVDR,0000,T,0344,M,0.00000,N*2D
Table B-27 VDR Sentence Fields
Field Description
1 True direction
2 T: True
3 Magnetic direction
4 M: Magnetic
5 Current speed
6 N: Knots

VTG Output Sentence

Course Over Ground and Ground Speed
The VTG sentence identifies the actual track made good and speed
over ground. The sentence structure is shown below, and Table B-28
identifies the VTG sentence fields.
$GPVTG,339.2,T,323.7,M,000.78,N,001.45,K*4F
Table B-28 VTG Sentence Fields
Field Description
1 Course, in degrees True
2 T: True
3 Course, in degrees Magnetic
4 M: Magnetic
5 Speed over ground in knots
6 N: Speed over ground, in knots
7 Speed over ground, in kilometers/hour
8 K: Speed over ground, in kilometers/hour

WCV Output Sentence
Waypoint Closure Velocity
The WCV sentence contains the component of the velocity vector in
the direction of the waypoint, from present position—sometimes
called "Speed Made Good" or "Velocity Made Good". The sentence
structure is shown below, and Table B-29 identifies the WCV sentence
fields.
$GPWCV,000.00,N,0014*2C
Table B-29 WCV Sentence Fields
Field Description
1 Velocity component
2 N: Knots
3 Waypoint number

WPL Output Sentence

Waypoint Location
The WPL sentence contains the location of a specified waypoint. The
sentence structure is shown below, and Table B-30 identifies the WPL
sentence fields.
$GPWPL,3723.5747,N,2202.6711,W,0014*6B
Table B-30 WPL Sentence Fields
Field Description
1 Waypoint Latitude
N: North
S: South
E: East
W: West
5 Waypoint number

XTE Output Sentence
Cross-Track Error
The XTE sentence reports the vessel’s cross-track error. The sentence
structure is shown below and Table B-31 describes the sentence
fields.
$GPXTE,A,A,0.050,L,N*5E
Table B-31 XTE Sentence Fields
Field Description
1 A: Valid (fixed)
2 A: Valid (fixed)
3 Cross-track Error, in nautical miles
4 Direction to Steer:
L: Left
R: Right
5 N: Nautical mile units
* Note – Steering direction in XTE is opposite of the direction shown on

the display. The display shows which side on the track you are on.

ZDA Output Sentence

Time and Date
The ZDA sentence identifies UTC time, day, month, and year, local
zone number and local zone minutes. The sentence structure is shown
below and Table B-32 identifies the ZDA sentence fields.
$GPZDA,220320.0,26,06,1997,00,00*52
Table B-32 ZDA Sentence Fields
Field Description
1 UTC time, in hhmmss.s format
2 Day
3 Month
4 Year
5 Local Zone Hours (- for East Longitude)
6 Local Zone Minutes

ZLZ Output Sentence
Time of Day
The ZLZ sentence reports the UTC and Local Time. The sentence
structure is shown below, and Table B-33 describes the sentence
fields.
$GPZLZ,220320.0,220320.1,00*77
Table B-33 ZLZ Sentence Fields
Field Description
1 UTC time, in hhmmss.s format
2 Local Time
3 Local Zone Hours (- for East Longitude)

B.5 Custom NMEA Configuration Sentences

These sentences allow the user to keep informed about the current
receiver configuration settings. Changes in the settings are reported in
the CFG sentences. Output of the CFG sentences is enabled from the
SETUP/ I/O /NMEA SENTENCE screen. Once enabled, the CFG
sentences are output once every 10 seconds.
PTNL,CFG,0 Output Sentence
Product Information Record
The PTNL,CFG,0 sentence reports the NT300D product name,
firmware version, and release numbers. The sentence structure is
shown below, and Table B-34 describes the sentence fields.
$PTNL,CFG,0,NT300D,0.01D,290797,7141000012,02*03
Table B-34 PTNL,CFG,0 Sentence Fields
Field Description
1 Sentence ID: CFG
2 Record number: 0
3 Product Name
4 Code Version Number
5 Code Date, in ddmmyy format
6 Product Serial Number
7 TNL Version Number

GPS Record
The PTNL,CFG,1 sentence reports the NT300D GPS parameters. The
sentence structure is shown below, and Table B-35 describes the
sentence fields.
$PTNL,CFG,1,1,2,1,10,04,008.0,006.0,10,04,008.0,006.0,00020.1*6A
Field Description
1 Sentence ID: CFG
2 Record number: 1
3 GPS mode:
0: 2D
1: 3D
2: Auto 2D/3D
4 DGPS mode:
0: Off
1: On
2: Auto
5 Manual or Default Mask Settings:
0: Use Manual (user-defined) mask values
1: Use Default (factory) mask values
6 Default Elevation Mask indicator
7 Default SNR Mask indicator, in AMUs
2: Low
4: Medium
8: High
8 Default PDOP Mask value
9 Default PDOP Switch value
10 Manual Elevation Mask value

Table B-35 PTNL,CFG,1 Sentence Fields (Continued)
Field Description
11 Manual SNR Mask value, in AMUs
2: Low
4: Medium
8: High
12 Manual PDOP Mask value
13 Manual PDOP Switch value
14 Manual antenna height, in meters

Navigation Record
The PTNL,CFG,2 sentence reports the NT300D navigation settings.
sentence fields.
$PTNL,CFG,2,W84,,001,0,,,0,2,1.0,E,0,0,2,300.0,300.0*7A
Field Description
1 Sentence ID: CFG
2 Record number: 2
3 Local geodetic datum country code, see IHO Publication
S-60
4 Local datum country subdivision code
5 COG/SOG Average
6 Position/Velocity Filter:
0: Off
1: On
7 Logging constant
8 Gyro heading, degrees True
9 Navigation Calculation Method:
0: Great Circle
1: Rhumb Line
10 Magnetic Variation
0: True
1: Auto
2: Manual
11 Manual Variation:
E: East
W: West

Field Description
12 Speed and Heading Selection:
0: Manual
1: External
13 Beacon Source:
0: Internal
1: External
14 Beacon Search Mode:
0: Automatic
1: Manual
2: Auto Power
3: Auto Distance
15 Beacon Channel 0 Manual Search Frequency, in kHz
16 Beacon Channel 1 Manual Search Frequency, in kHz

Serial Port Record
The PTNL,CFG,3 sentence reports the status of the NT300D serial
interface parameters. The sentence structure is shown below, and
$PTNL,CFG,3,1,01,00,11,11,001,1,A,A,2,GP*4C
Field Description
1 Sentence ID: CFG
2 Record number: 3
3 Serial Port Number
4 Serial Port Input Selection:
0: No selection
1: NMEA-0183
3: RTCM
5: TSIP
6: TAIP
5 Serial Port Output Selection:
0: No selection
2: NMEA-0183
12: RTCM
13: TSIP
14: TAIP
6 Serial Port Input Baud Rate:
6: 1200 bps
8: 2400 bps
9: 4800 bps
11: 9600 bps
12: 19200 bps
13: 38400 bps

Field Description
7 Serial Port Output Baud Rate:
6: 1200 bps
8: 2400 bps
9: 4800 bps
11: 9600 bps
12: 19200 bps
13: 38400 bps
8 Serial Port NMEA Output Rate, in seconds
9 Position Output Rate:
0: 5 Hz
1: NMEA output rate
10 A: (Fixed)
11 A: (Fixed)
12 Serial Port Output NMEA-0183 Version Number
2: Version 2.1 (fixed)
13 Serial Port Output NMEA Talker ID

NMEA Record (Part 1)
The PTNL,CFG,4 and 5 sentences report the NMEA sentences
selected for output. PTNL,CFG,5 is automatically output when
PTNL,CFG,4 cannot report all of the NMEA sentences selected for
output. The PTNL,CFG,4 sentence structure is shown below, and
Table B-38 describes the sentence fields. The structure of the
PTNL,CFG,5 sentence is identical.
$PTNL,CFG,4,2,05,GGA,VTG,ZDA,XTE,DTM*24
Field Description
1 Sentence ID: CFG
2 Record number: 4 or 5
3 Serial port number (1 or 2)
4 Number of NMEA sentences selected for output
5-17 NMEA Output Acronyms of sentences to output

NMEA Record (Part 2)
The structure of the PTNL,CFG,5 sentence is identical to the
PTNL,CFG,4 sentence. The sentence is automatically output when
PTNL,CFG,4 cannot report all of the NMEA sentences selected for
output.

B.6 Custom NMEA Sentences

Trimble has developed a number of custom NMEA sentences for use
with the NT300D receiver.
PTNLA,ERTI Output Sentence
Create Route Acknowledgment
The PTNLA,ERTI sentence acknowledges a PTNLC,ERTI sentence.
The sentence structure is shown below, and Table B-39 explains the
sentence fields.
$PTNLA,ERTI,A*0C
Table B-39 PTNLA,ERTI Sentence Fields
Field Description
1 Sentence ID: ERTI
2 A: Acknowledged
N: Not Acknowledged

PTNLC,ERTI Input Sentence
Create Route Command
The PTNLC,ERTI sentence sends a command to the receiver to create
a route. The sentence is acknowledged with a PTNLA,ERTI sentence.
This sentence should be followed by one or more PTNLC,ERTL
sentences which include commands for inserting waypoints into the
new route.
M Warning – This sentence overwrites existing information in the

specified route record. Be sure to select a route record that is known
to be blank or a record you no longer need.
sentence fields.
$PTNLC,ERTI,024,TEST ROUTE,2
Table B-40 PTNLC,ERTI Sentence Fields
Field Description
1 Sentence ID: ERTI
2 Route Number
3 Route Label (maximum of 12 characters)
4 Route Type:
1: No type
2: Fishing
3: Bell
4: Anchor
5: Buoy
6: Dark Buoy
7: Hazard

* Note – This sentence only sets the name and type of the new route.
To add waypoints to the route, one or more PTNLC,ERTL sentences
must be issued to send commands for defining waypoint records.

PTNLQ,ERTI Input Sentence
Route Query
The PTNLQ,ERTI sentence queries the receiver for the contents in a
specific route. The receiver responds with the PTNLR,ERTI report
explains the sentence fields.
$PTNLQ,ERTI,2
Table B-41 PTNLQ,ERTI Sentence Fields
Field Description
1 Sentence ID: ERTI
2 Route Number

PTNLR,ERTI Output Sentence

Route Report
The PTNLR,ERTI sentence reports the contents of the route library
record in response to the PTNLQ,ERTI sentence. The sentence
structure is shown below, and Table B-42 explains the sentence fields.
$PTNLR,ERTI,2,WORK 2,4,003*54
Table B-42 PTNLR,ERTI Sentence Fields
Field Description
1 Sentence ID: ERTI
2 Route Record Number
3 Route Label (maximum of 12 characters)
4 Route Type:
1: No type
2: Fishing
3: Bell
4: Anchor
5: Buoy
6: Dark Buoy
7: Hazard
5 Number of legs in route

PTNLA,ERTL Output Sentence
Create Leg Acknowledgment
The PTNLA,ERTL sentence acknowledges the PTNLC,ERTL
$PTNLA,ERTL,A*09
Table B-43 PTNLA,ERTL Sentence Fields
Field Description
1 Sentence ID: ERTL
2 A: Acknowledged
N: Not Acknowledged

PTNLC,ERTL Input Sentence

Create Leg Command
The PTNLC,ERTL sentence adds a waypoint to the end of the
specified route record. The sentence structure is shown below, and
Table B-44 explains the sentence fields.
$PTNLC,ERTL,024,001,C
Table B-44 PTNLC,ERTL Sentence Fields
Field Description
1 Sentence ID: ERTL
2 Route Number
3 Waypoint Number
4 Calculation Type:
C: Great Circle
L: Rhumb Line

PTNLQ,ERTL Input Sentence
Leg Query
The PTNLQ,ERTL sentence queries the receiver for the contents of a
leg in a route. The receiver responds by sending a report in the
PTNLR,ERTL sentence. The sentence structure is shown below, and
$PTNLQ,ERTL,2,1
Table B-45 PTNLQ,ERTL Sentence Fields
Field Description
1 Sentence ID: ERTL
2 Route number
3 Leg number

PTNLR,ERTL Output Sentence

Leg Report
The PTNLR,ERTL sentence reports the contents of the route leg
record requested with a PTNLQ,ERTL query. The sentence structure
is shown below, and Table B-46 describes the sentence fields.
$PTNLR,ERTL,5,1,001,C*01
Table B-46 PTNLR,ERTL Sentence Fields
Field Description
1 Sentence ID: ERTL
2 Route record number
3 Leg record number within route
4 Waypoint record number
5 Calculation Type:
C: Great Circle
L: Rhumb Line

PTNLA,EWPI Output Sentence
Waypoint Configuration Acknowledgment
The PTNLA,EWPI sentence acknowledges a PTNLC,EWPI
command. The sentence structure is shown below, and Table B-47
$PTNLA,EWPI,A*0D
Table B-47 PTNLA,EWPI Sentence Fields
Field Description
1 Sentence ID: EWPI
2 A: Acknowledged
N: Not Acknowledged

PTNLC,EWPI Input Sentence

Waypoint Configuration Command
The PTNLC,EWPI sentence sends a command to the receiver to
change or create a waypoint. The sentence is acknowledged with a
PTNLA,EWPI sentence. The sentence structure is shown below, and
M Warning – This sentence overwrites existing information in the

specified waypoint record.
$PTNLC,EWPI,028,TEST,3722.123456,N,12202.002317,W,2
Table B-48 PTNLC,EWPI Sentence Fields
Field Description
1 Sentence ID: EWPI
2 Waypoint Number
3 Waypoint Label (maximum of 12 characters)
4 Latitude, in degrees, minutes and decimal minutes
5 N: North
S: South Latitude
6 Longitude in Degrees, minutes and decimal minutes
7 E: East
W: West Longitude
8 Waypoint Type:
1: No type
2: Fishing
3: Bell
4: Anchor
5: Buoy
6: Dark Buoy
7: Hazard

PTNLQ,EWPI Input Sentence

Waypoint Query
The PTNLQ,EWPI sentence queries the NT300D for information
about the specified waypoint. The receiver responds by sending the
report in the PTNLR,EWPI sentence. The sentence structure is shown
below, and Table B-49 describes the sentence fields.
$PTNLQ,EWPI,001
Table B-49 PTNLQ,EWPI Sentence Fields
Field Description
1 Sentence ID: EWPI
2 Waypoint record number

PTNLR,EWPI Output Sentence

Waypoint Report
The PTNLR,EWPI sentence is sent in response to a PTNLQ,EWPI
query for information about a waypoint. The sentence structure is
shown below, and Table B-50 describes the report fields.
$PTNLR,EWPI,009,TEST ,3722.123449,N,12202.123450,W,2*64
Table B-50 PTNLR,EWPI Sentence Fields
Field Description
1 Sentence ID: EWPI
2 Waypoint Number
3 Waypoint Label (12 characters)
4 Latitude in Degrees, Minutes, and Decimal Minutes
5 Latitude Direction:
N: North
S: South
6 Longitude in Degrees, Minutes, and Decimal Minutes
7 Longitude Direction:
E: East
W: West Longitude
8 Waypoint Type:
1: No type
2: Fishing
3: Bell
4: Anchor
5: Buoy
6: Dark Buoy
7: Hazard

PTNLQ,NRTI Input Sentence

Route Library Status Query
The PTNLQ,NRTI sentence queries the receiver for the current status
of the route library. The receiver responds with the PTNLR,NRTI
report sentence. The sentence structure is shown below, and Table
B-51 shows the sentence fields.
$PTNLQ,NRTI
Table B-51 PTNLQ,NRTI Sentence Fields
Field Description
1 Sentence ID: NRTI

PTNLR,NRTI Output Sentence

Route Library Status Report
The PTNLR,NRTI sentence reports the current status of the route
library. The sentence structure is shown below, and Table B-52
$PTNLR,NRTI,050,046*7F
Table B-52 PTNLR,NRTI Sentence Fields
Field Description
1 Sentence ID: NRTI
2 Maximum number of routes in the Route library
3 Number of blank routes available

PTNLQ,NRTL Input Sentence

Leg Library Status Query
The PTNLQ,NRTL sentence queries the receiver for the status of the
leg library. The receiver responds by sending the report in the
PTNLR,NRTL sentence. The sentence structure is shown below, and
Table B-53 shows the sentence fields.
$PTNLQ,NRTL
Table B-53 PTNLQ,NRTL Sentence Fields
Field Description
1 Sentence ID: NRTL

PTNLR,NRTL Output Sentence

Leg Library Status Report
The PTNLR,NRTL sentence reports the status of the leg library. The
sentence structure is shown below, and Table B-54 explains the
sentence fields.
$PTNLR,NRTL,500,485*70
Table B-54 PTNLR,NRTL Sentence Fields
Field Description
1 Sentence ID: NRTL
2 Maximum number of leg records in the leg library
3 Number of leg records available

PTNLQ,NWPI Input Sentence

Waypoint Library Status Query
The PTNLQ,NWPI sentence queries the receiver for the status of the
waypoint library. The sentence structure is shown below, and Table
B-55 shows the sentence fields.
$PTNLQ,NWPI
Table B-55 PTNLQ,NWPI Sentence Fields
Field Description
1 Sentence ID: NWPI

PTNLR,NWPI Output Sentence

Waypoint Library Status Report
The PTNLR,NWPI sentence reports the Status of the waypoint library.
sentence fields.
$PTNLR,NWPI,500,491*71
Table B-56 PTNLR,NWPI Sentence Fields
Field Description
1 Sentence ID: NWPI
2 Maximum number of waypoint records in the waypoint
library
3 Number of blank waypoint records available

PTNLR,SRTI Output Sentence

Route Search Report
The PTNLR,SRTI sentence is sent by the receiver in response to a
PTNLS,SRTI sentence. The sentence contains the first valid (not
empty) route record based on the search criteria set in the
PTNLS,SRTI sentence. The sentence structure is shown below, and
$PTNLR,SRTI,002*7A
Table B-57 PTNLR,SRTI Sentence Fields
Field Description
1 Sentence ID: SRTI
2 First valid route record meeting the search criteria set by
the PTNLS,SRTI sentence

PTNLS,SRTI Input Sentence

Route Search
The PTNLS,SRTI sentence queries the receiver to search for the first
route record with valid route information. The search starts at the
route record specified in the query. The receiver responds with the
PTNLR,SRTI report sentence. The sentence structure is shown below,
and Table B-58 explains the sentence fields.
$PTNLS,SRTI,001
Table B-58 PTNLS,SRTI Sentence Fields1
Field Description
1 Sentence ID: SRTI
2 Number of Route record from which to begin search

PTNLR,SWPI Output Sentence

Waypoint Search Report
The PTNLR,SWPI sentence is sent by the receiver in response to a
PTNLS,SWPI sentence. The sentence contains the first valid (not
empty) waypoint record based on the search criteria specified in the
PTNLS,SWPI sentence. The sentence structure is shown below, and
$PTNLR,SWPI,009*70
Table B-59 PTNLR,SWPI Sentence Fields
Field Description
1 Sentence ID: SWPI
2 First valid waypoint record meeting the search criteria
specified in the PTNLS,SWPI sentence

PTNLS,SWPI Input Sentence

Waypoint Search
The PTNLS,SWPI sentence queries the receiver to search for the first
waypoint record with valid waypoint information. The search starts at
the waypoint record stated in the query. The receiver responds with
the PTNLR,SWPI report sentence. The sentence structure is shown
below, and Table B-60 explains the sentence fields.
$PTNLS,SWPI,001
Table B-60 PTNLS,SWPI Sentence Fields
Field Description
1 Sentence ID: SWPI
2 Number of waypoint record from which to begin the search

PTNLQ,VERS Input Sentence

Receiver Information Query
The PTNLQ,VERS sentence queries the receiver for the product
name, firmware version and release numbers. The receiver responds
by sending the report in the PTNLR,VERS sentence. The message
structure is shown below, and Table B-61 shows the sentence fields.
$PTNLQ,VERS
Table B-61 PTNLQ,VERS Sentence Fields
Field Description
1 Sentence ID: VERS

PTNLR,VERS Output Sentence

Receiver Information Report
The PTNLR,VERS sentence reports the receiver’s product name,
firmware version, and release numbers in response to the
PTNLQ,VERS sentence. The message structure is shown below, and
$PTNLR,VERS,NT300D,0.04,220897,4084817755,02*14
Table B-62 PTNLR,VERS Sentence Fields
Field Description
1 Sentence ID: VERS
2 Product name
3 Code version number
4 Code date, in ddmmyy format
5 Product serial number
6 TNL version number


C DGPS Radiobeacons
Table C-1 is the April 1996 listing of DGPS radiobeacons compiled
by Trimble Navigation limited. You can also find the latest version of
the table on the Trimble web site (www.trimble.com).
* Note – The list of radiobeacon stations changes on an irregular basis

as new stations become active. For an updated list of the radiobeacon
stations in the United States, acquire a copy of the latest USCG list
from the U.S. Coast Guard Web Site at the following address:
http://www.navcen.uscg.mil/dgps
For an international update, refer to the following publication:

DGNSS Reference and Transmitting Stations in the Maritime Radio
Navigation Band, Issue 4 - April 1996, collated and published by the
International Association of Lighthouse Authorities (IALA).
NT300D Operation Manual C-1

DGPS Radiobeacons C
Table C-1 Worldwide DGPS Radiobeacon List, April 1996
Nominal Range ID #
Bit
Freq Rate at
Name Lat/Lon (kHz) (bits/s) Km (µV/m) Ref Bcn
Australia
Cape Schanck 38 30 S 314 100 220 50 000 700
144 53 E
Karrantha 20 45 S 304 100 200 50 001 701
116 27 E
Horn Island 10 36 S 320 200 250 50 002 702
142 17 E
Belgium
Oostende 51 14 N 311.5 100 70 50 640 420
002 55 E 641
Bermuda
St. David’s 32 22 N 323 100 320 950
Head 064 38 W
Brazil
Abrolhos, 17 58 S
Bahia 038 42 W
Calcanhar, Rio 05 10 S
Grande do 035 29 W
Norte1
Canivete 00 31 N
050 25 W
Moela, San 24 03 S
Paulo 046 16 W
Rio Grande, 32 09 S
Rio Grande do 052 06 W
Sul1
1 Planned site.
2 Not part of proposed DGPS operational network.
3 Encrypted
C-2 NT300D Operation Manual

C DGPS Radiobeacons
Table C-1 Worldwide DGPS Radiobeacon List, April 1996 (Continued)
Nominal Range ID #
Bit
Freq Rate at
Santa Marta, 28 38 S
Santa 048 49 W
Catarina1
Sao Marcos, 02 29 S
Maranhao 018 08 W
Sao Tome, Rio 22 03 S
de Janeiro1 041 03 W
Canada
Point Atkinson 49 19 N 320.0 200 170 75 304 907
BC 123 15 W 305
Race Rocks 48 18 N 309.0 100 75 75
BC2 123 32 W
Triple Island 54 17 N 308.0 100 90 75
BC2 130 52 W
Alert Bay BC 50 35 N 309.0 200 450 75 300 909
126 55 W 301
Amphitrite 48 55 N 315.0 200 350 75 302 908
Point BC 125 32 W 303
Partridge 45 14 N 295.0 200 300 75 326 939
Island NB 066 03 W 327
Point 47 40 N 319.0 200 300 75 332 936
Escuminiac NB 064 47 W 333
Cape Race 46 39 N 315.0 200 525 75 338 940
NFLD 053 04 W 339
Pistolet Bay 51 29 N 317.0 100 310 75 342 944
NFLD 055 48 W 343
1 Planned site.
3 Encrypted

DGPS Radiobeacons C
Nominal Range ID #
Bit
Freq Rate at
Port Aux 47 34 N 290.0 200 350 75 340 942
Basques NFLD 059 09 W 341
Western Head 43 59 N 312.0 100 110 75 334 935
NS 064 39 W 335
Fox Island NS 45 19 N 307.0 200 300 75 336 934
061 04 W 337
Point Petrie ON 43 50 N 303.0 100 115 75
077 09 W
Wiarton ON 44 42 N 303.0 200 250 75 310 918
081 08 W 311
Cardinal ON 44 47 N 306.0 200 300 75 308 919
075 25 W 309
Lauzon PQ 46 48 N 309.0 200 330 75 316 927
071 09 W 317
St. Jean sur 45 19 N 296.0 200 330 75 312 929
Richelieu PQ 073 18 W 313
Trois Rivieres 46 23 N 321.0 200 170 75 314 928
PQ 072 27 W
Denmark
Blaavandshuk 55 34 N 298.0 100 90 50 705 452
008 05 E 706
Hammer Odde 55 18 N 289.0 100 90 50 700 451
014 45 E 701
Skagen 57 45 N 298.0 100 90 50 710 453
010 35 E 711
1 Planned site.
3 Encrypted

C DGPS Radiobeacons
Nominal Range ID #
Bit
Freq Rate at
Estonia
Ristna 58 56 N 307.0 200 200 50 840 530
022 04 E
Finland
Mantyluoto 61 36 N 298.0 200 250 50 601 401
021 28 E
Outokumpu 62 41 N 293.5 200 70 50 603 403
026 01 E
Porkkala 59 58 N 285.0 200 250 50 600 400
024 23 E
Puumala 61 24 N 301.5 200 70 50 602 402
028 14 E
Turku 60 26 N 304.0 200 200 50 604 404
022 13 E
France
Cap Bear 42 31 N 304.5 100 90 50 468 338
003 08 W
Cap Ferret 44 39 N 287.0 100 90 50 466 336
001 15 W
Gatteville 49 42 N 297.5 100 90 50 460 330
001 16 W
Les Baleines 46 15 N 299.5 100 90 50 464 334
001 34 W
Porquerolles 42 59 N 314.5 100 130 50 469 339
006 12 E
1 Planned site.
3 Encrypted

DGPS Radiobeacons C
Nominal Range ID #
Bit
Freq Rate at
Saint Mathieu 48 20 N 291.5 100 90 50 462 332
004 46 W
Germany
Helgoland 54 11 N 313.0 200 130 50 822 491
007 53 E 823
Wustrow 54 20 N 314.5 200 90 50 820 490
012 23 E 821
Hong Kong
Kau Yi Chau 22 17 N 289.0 200 500 20
114 04 E
Iceland
Bjargtangar 65 30 N 289.0 100 350 20 624 412
024 32 W 625
Djupivogur 64 39 N 295.5 100 310 20 630 415
014 17 W 631
Raufarhofn 66 27 N 301.5 100 350 20 628 414
015 57 W 629
Reykjanes 63 49 N 292.5 100 430 20 622 411
022 42 W 623
Skagata 66 07 N 304.5 100 350 20 626 413
020 06 W 627
Skardsfjara 63 31 N 313.0 100 380 20 632 416
017 59 W 633
Ireland
Mizen Head3 51 27 N 300.5 100 129 50 660 430
009 49 W
1 Planned site.
3 Encrypted

C DGPS Radiobeacons
Nominal Range ID #
Bit
Freq Rate at
Tory Island3 55 16 N 313.5 100 129 50 670 435
008 15 W
Japan
Turugisaki 35 08 N 309.0 100 or 200 100
139 40 E 200
Daiohsaki 34 16 N 288.0 100 or 200 100
136 54 E 200
Korea
Yongdo 35 02 N 300.0 100 185 75 720 660
129 34 E 721
Palmido 37 21 N 313.0 100 185 75 722 661
126 30 E 723
Komundo 34 00 N 287.0 100 185 75 724 662
127 19 E 725
Chumunjin 37 53 N 295.0 100 185 75 726 663
128 50 E 727
Ochongdo 36 07 N 295.0 100 185 75 728 664
125 58 E 729
Chukto 34 13 N 290.0 100 185 75 730 665
125 58 E 731
Changgigot 36 04 N 310.0 100 185 75 732 666
129 34 E 733
Latvia
Ventspils1 57 22 N 308.5
021 31 E
1 Planned site.
3 Encrypted

DGPS Radiobeacons C
Nominal Range ID #
Bit
Freq Rate at
Netherlands
Ameland 51 18 N 299.5 100 100 50 655 428
005 04 E 656
Hoek Van 51 59 N 287.5 100 100 50 650 425
Holland 004 07 E 651
Norway
Andenes 69 19 N 284.5 100 70 50 794
016 07 E
Faerder 59 01 N 288.0 100 70 50 780 500
010 31 E
Halten 64 10 N 313.5 100 70 50 790 510
009 24 E
Fruholmen 71 06 N 309.5 100 70 50 797
023 59 E
Lista 58 06 N 301.0 100 70 50 783 503
006 34 E
Sklinna 65 12 N 288.5 100 70 50 791 511
010 55 E
Skomvaer 67 24 N 300.0 100 70 50 793 513
011 52 E
Svinoey 62 19 N 293.5 100 70 50 788 508
005 16 E
Torsvaag 70 14 N 291.5 100 70 50 796 516
019 30 E
Utsira 59 18 N 307.0 100 70 50 785 505
004 52 E
1 Planned site.
3 Encrypted

C DGPS Radiobeacons
Nominal Range ID #
Bit
Freq Rate at
Utvaer 61 02 N 300.0 100 70 50 787 507
004 30 E
Vardoe 70 23 N 307.0 100 70 50 800 520
031 09 E
Poland
Dziwnow 54 01 N 288.0 100 130 50 481
014 44 E
Rozewie 54 49 N 311.0 100 130 50 482
018 20 E
Russia
Baltisk1 54 38 N 312.5 100 001
019 54 E
Shepelevskiy1 59 59 N 298.5 100 002
029 09 E
Set. Navolock1 69 24 N 318.5 100 003
033 30 E
Dgedinsky1 65 13 N 298.5 100 004
036 49 E
Canin-Nose1 68 38 N 285.5 100 005
043 18 E
Tonky1 69 51 N 303.5 100 006
061 06 E
Sterlegov1 75 24 N 318.5 100 007
088 45 E
Andrea1 76 44 N 291.5 100 008
110 27 E
1 Planned site.
3 Encrypted

DGPS Radiobeacons C
Nominal Range ID #
Bit
Freq Rate at
Camenka1 69 28 N 318.5 100 009
161 14 E
Yarangai1 69 54 N 291.5 100 010
170 32 E
Russian Cat1 64 34 N 315.5 100 011
178 33 E
Caraginsky1 58 33 N 301.5 100 012
163 33 E
Africa1 56 11 N 291.5 100 013
163 21 E
Petropavlovsky 52 53 N 291.5 100 014
1 158 42 E
Vasiliera1 50 00 N 294.5 100 015
155 23 E
Alevina1 58 50 N 303.5 100 016
151 21 E
Crutogorova1 55 05 N 300.5 100 017
155 35 E
Elizarova1 54 25 N 318.5 100 018
143 43 E
Corsakovsky1 46 37 N 312.5 100 019
142 48 E
Gamov1 42 33 N 306.5 100 020
131 13 E
Astranhnasky1 44 28 N 291.5 100 021
048 01 E
1 Planned site.
3 Encrypted

C DGPS Radiobeacons
Nominal Range ID #
Bit
Freq Rate at
Anapsky1 44 53 N 315.5 100 022
037 18 E
Vize1 79 30 N 294.5 100 023
076 59 E
Oleniy1 72 35 N 294.5 100 024
077 39 E
Enisey1 68 25 N 315.5 100 025
086 18 E
Begichev1 47 31 N 300.5 100 026
112 15 E
Stolbovoy1 74 10 N 306.5 100 027
135 27 E
Cotelny1 75 59 N 310.5 100 028
137 53 E
Indygirsky1 71 16 N 324.5 100 029
150 17 E
Vrangelia1 70 59 N 309.5 100 030
178 29 E
Dedgneva1 66 01 N 303.5 100 031
169 43 E
Van-der-Linda1 45 35 N 312.5 100 032
149 24 E
Spain
Machichaco1 43 27 N 285.0 100/ 200 40 500 350
002 45 W 200 501
Cabo Penas1 43 39 N 297.0 100/ 130 34 502 351
005 51 W 200 503
1 Planned site.
3 Encrypted

DGPS Radiobeacons C
Nominal Range ID #
Bit
Freq Rate at
Estaca de 43 47 N 310.0 100/ 240 30 504 352
Bares1 007 41 W 200 505
Cabo 42 53 N 289.0 100/ 300 28 506 353
Finisterre1 009 16 W 200 507
Rota1 36 38 N 302.5 100/ 250 36 508 354
006 23 W 200 509
Ceuta1 35 54 N 311.5 100/ 135 50 510 355
005 18 W 200 511
Malaga1 36 43 N 304.5 100/ 140 47 512 356
004 25 W 200 513
Cabo de Gata1 36 43 N 297.5 100/ 150 45 514 357
002 11 W 200 515
Cabo de Palos1 37 38 N 313.5 100/ 140 47 516 358
000 41 W 200 517
Cabo de la 38 44 N 284.5 100/ 135 50 518 359
Nao1 000 14 E 200 519
Cala Figuera1 39 27 N 286.0 100/ 135 50 520 360
002 31 E 200 521
Mahon1 39 52 N 292.5 100/ 230 50 522 361
004 18 E 200 523
Castellon1 39 58 N 311.0 100/ 135 50 524 362
000 01 E 200 525
Cabo Salow1 41 03 N 289.0 100/ 120 56 526 363
001 10 E 200 527
Cabo San 41 53 N 290.5 100/ 120 56 528 364
Sebastian1 003 12 E 200 529
1 Planned site.
3 Encrypted

C DGPS Radiobeacons
Nominal Range ID #
Bit
Freq Rate at
La Entallada1 28 13 N 292.5 100/ 250 63 530 365
013 56 W 200 531
Tenerife1 28 30 N 287.5 100/ 250 63 532 366
016 30 W 200 533
Sweden
Almagrundet 59 09 N 287.0 200 88 50 464
019 10 E
Bjuroklubb 64 29 N 303.5 200 103 50 461
021 35 E
Hjortens Udde 58 38 N 297.0 200 74 50 467
012 40 E
Hoburg 56 55 N 302.0 200 74 50 465
018 09 E
Kullen 56 18 N 293.5 200 103 50 466
012 27 E
Orskar 60 32 N 291.5 200 74 50 463
018 23 E
Jarnos 63 29 N 306.5 200 103 50 462
019 39 E
United Kingdom
Butt of Lewis3 58 31 N 289.5 100 129 50 684 444
006 16 W
Flamborough 54 06 N 302.5 100 129 50 687 447
Head3 000 04 W
Girdleness3 57 08 N 311.5 100 129 50 686 446
002 03 W
1 Planned site.
3 Encrypted

DGPS Radiobeacons C
Nominal Range ID #
Bit
Freq Rate at
Lizard3 49 57 N 284.0 100 129 50 681 441
005 12 W
North 51 22 N 310.5 100 129 50 688 448
Foreland3 001 26 W
Point Lynas3 53 24 N 304.5 100 129 50 682 442
004 17 W
Rinns of Islay3 55 40 N 293.5 100 129 50 683 443
006 31 W
St. Catherine’s 50 34 N 293.5 100 129 50 680 440
Point3 001 17 W
Sumburgh 59 51 N 304.5 100 129 50 685 445
Head3 001 16 W
Nash Point 51 24 N 299.0 100 129 50 689 449
003 33 W
United States – Atlantic and Gulf Coasts
Mobile Point, 30 14 N 300.0 100 275 75 026 813
AL 088 01 W 027
Cape 38 46 N 298.0 200 290 75 010 805
Henlopen, DE 075 05 W 011
Cape 28 28 N 289.0 100 200 75 018 809
Canaveral, FL 080 33 W 019
Egmont Key, 27 36 N 312.0 200 340 75 024 812
FL 082 46 W 025
Key West, FL 24 00 N 286.0 100 175 75 022 811
023
Miami, FL 25 44 N 322.0 100 195 75 020 810
021
1 Planned site.
3 Encrypted

C DGPS Radiobeacons
Nominal Range ID #
Bit
Freq Rate at
English Turn, 29 53 N 293.0 200 275 75 028 814
LA 029
Chatham, MA 41 40 N 325.0 200 155 75 004 802
069 57 W 005
NAS 43 53 N 316.0 100 160 75 000 800
Brunswick, ME 069 57 W 001
Fort Macon, 34 42 N 294.0 100 210 75 014 807
NC 076 41 W 015
Portsmouth 43 04 N 288.0 100 160 75 002 801
Harbor, NH 070 43 W 003
Sandy Hook, 40 28 N 286.0 200 160 75 008 804
NJ 074 01 W 009
Montauk Point, 41 04 N 293.0 100 210 75 006 803
NY 071 52 W 007
San Juan, PR 18 30 N 295.0 100 200 75 034 817
066 33 W 035
Charleston, SC 32 45 N 298.0 100 240 75 016 808
079 51 W 017
Aransas Pass, 27 50 N 304.0 100 180 75 032 816
TX 097 04 W 033
Galveston, TX 29 20 N 296.0 100 290 75 030 815
094 44 W 031
Cape Henry, 36 56 N 289.0 100 210 75 012 806
VA 076 00 W 013
United States – Great Lakes Region
Cheboygan, MI 45 39 N 292.0 200 130 75 112 836
084 28 W 113
1 Planned site.
3 Encrypted

DGPS Radiobeacons C
Nominal Range ID #
Bit
Freq Rate at
Detroit, MI 42 18 N 319.0 200 160 75 116 838
083 06 W 117
Neebish Island, 46 19 N 309.0 200 100 75 110 835
MI 084 09 W 111
Saginaw Bay, 43 38 N 301.0 100 140 75 114 837
MI 083 50 W 115
Whitefish Point, 46 46 N 318.0 100 160 75 108 834
MI 084 57 W 109
Youngstown, 43 13 N 322.0 100 240 75 118 839
NY 078 58 W 119
Milwaukee, WI 43 00 N 297.0 100 225 75 106 833
087 53 W 107
Sturgeon Bay, 44 48 N 322.0 100 175 75 104 832
WI 087 19 W 105
Upper 47 13 N 298.0 100 210 75 102 831
Keweenaw, WI 088 37 W 103
Wisconsin 46 42 N 296.0 100 65 75 100 830
Point, WI 092 01 W 101
United States – Inland Rivers Region
Millers Ferry, 32 05 N 320.0 200 240 75 160 865
AL 087 23 W 161
Rock Island, IA 42 00 N 311.0 200 240 75 156 863
091 54 W 157
St. Paul, MN 44 18 N 317.0 200 240 75 158 864
091 54 W 159
Kansas City, 39.07 N 305.0 200 160 75 164 867
MO 095 24 W 165
1 Planned site.
3 Encrypted

C DGPS Radiobeacons
Nominal Range ID #
Bit
Freq Rate at
St. Louis, MO 38 37 N 322.0 200 190 75 154 862
089 46 W 155
Vicksburg, MS 38 37 N 313.0 200 190 75 150 860
089 45 W 151
Sallisaw, OK 35 22 N 299.0 200 160 75 162 866
094 45 W 163
Memphis, TN 35 28 N 310.0 200 190 75 152 861
090 12 W 153
United States – Alaska, Pacific Coast, and Hawaii
Annette Island, 55 04 N 323.0 100 275 75 278 889
AK 131 36 W 279
Cape 60 14 N 292.0 100 290 75 288 894
Hinchinbrook, 146 38 W 289
AK
Cold Bay, AK 55 11 N 289.0 100 290 75 296 898
162 42 W 297
Gustavus, AK 58 25 N 288.0 100 275 75 284 892
135 41 W 285
Kenai, AK 60 41 N 310.0 100 275 75 292 896
151 21 W 293
Kodiak, AK 57 37 N 313.0 100 290 75 294 897
152 12 W 295
Potato Point, 61 03 N 298.0 100 160 75 290 895
AK 146 42 W 291
Cape 40 26 N 292.0 100 290 75 270 885
Mendicino, CA 124 24 W 271
1 Planned site.
3 Encrypted

DGPS Radiobeacons C
Nominal Range ID #
Bit
Freq Rate at
Point Blunt, CA 37 51 N 310.0 200 95 75 268 884
122 25 W 269
Point Arquello, 34 34 N 321.0 100 290 75 264 882
CA 120 38 W 265
Point Loma, CA 32 40 N 302.0 100 290 75 262 881
117 15 W 263
Pigeon Point, 37 11 N 287.0 100 290 75 266 883
CA 122 23 W 267
Kokole Point, 20 14 N 285.0 200 485 75 260 880
HI 155 53 W 261
Upolu Point, HI 20 15 N 285.0 100 275 75 258 879
155 53 W 259
Fort Stevens, 46 12 N 287.0 100 290 75 272 886
OR 123 57 W 273
Robinson 47 23 N 323.0 200 95 75 274 887
Point, WA 122 22 W 275
Whidbey 48 19 N 302.0 100 145 75 276 888
Island, WA 122 42 W 277
1 Planned site.
3 Encrypted

Glossary
This section defines technical terms and abbreviations used in this manual. It includes
terms from the field of GPS technology, but not terms from navigation or surveying.
2D Two dimensional.
3D Three dimensional.
2D solution Two dimensional position solution. Solves for latitude and

longitude.
3D solution Three dimensional position solution. Solves for latitude,

longitude, and height.
acquisition The process of searching for and locking onto a satellite

signal. A GPS receiver acquires all available satellites when
it is powered up, and acquires additional satellites as they
become available.
almanac Information about NAVSTAR satellite orbits, Keplerian

elements, clock corrections, atmospheric delay parameters,
and health status that is transmitted by each satellite. The
NT300D uses this information for satellite acquisition. Also
refers to the Beacon Almanac transmitted from a
radiobeacon. The beacon almanac includes the identity
(transmission range, frequency, and position) of neighboring
beacons.
ASA American Standards Association.
ALT Altitude.
NT300D Operation Manual Glossary-1

Glossary
altitude The height calculated by the NT300D. The height can be

referenced to the WGS-84 ellipsoid or to mean sea level.
auto GPS mode The GPS position fix mode where a GPS receiver
automatically switches between 2D and 3D position fix
mode, depending of the number of satellites available.
azimuth (azm) The angle between true north and the bearing of a satellite
or other celestial object relative to the observer.
Bearing Horizontal direction from one point to another.
CDU Control/Display Unit.
Coarse/ A pseudorandom noise code with a repetition period of 1

Acquisition code millisecond, modulated onto the GPS L1 signal. This code
(C/A code) yields good acquisition properties, but moderate absolute
positioning fixes. It is subject to Selective Availability,
which reduces the accuracy of position fixes by introducing
random errors in the position data.
COG Course Over Ground.
correction See Pseudorange Correction.
CTW Course to Waypoint.
datum A model of the earth consisting of an ellipsoid and an origin.

A specifically oriented reference ellipsoid. GPS is based on
the WGS-84 datum.
DFT Drift or speed of current.
Glossary-2 NT300D Operation Manual

Glossary
DGPS DGPS employs two or more receivers. One receiver, called

(differential GPS) the reference station is located at a known point to
determine the errors in the pseudoranges to the satellites.
These errors, called pseudorange corrections, are usually
transmitted by a radiobeacon transmitter. An unlimited
number of mobile NT300Ds receive the data at unknown
locations within the transmission range of the reference
station.
The pseudorange corrections (PRCs) are computed by
determining the differences between the actual and
computed ranges to the tracked satellites. The coordinates of
the mobile receivers can then be computed by applying the
received PRCs to the mobile unit’s observed ranges. This is
done in real time.
DOP (Dilution of A description of the purely geometric contribution of the

Precision) uncertainty of position. See also HDOP, PDOP, VDOP.
DMG Distance Made Good.
Drift Speed of current.
DTD Distance to Destination.
DTW Distance to Waypoint.
Dual Head Option See Remote Station.
elevation (elev) The angle from the horizon to the observed position of a
satellite.
elevation mask A parameters specifying the minimum elevation of a

satellite to be used for positioning.
ellipsoid A mathematical figure generated by rotating an ellipse on its

minor axis.

Glossary
ephemeris A set of data that predicts the position of a celestial object as

a function of time. Each satellite periodically transmits its
own ephemeris, uploaded by the Control Segment. The
plural is ephemerides.
ETA Estimated Time of Arrival.
FFT Fast Fourier Transform.
FFT diagnostics Fast Fourier Transform diagnostics. FFT diagnostic plots are
used to isolate sources of noise emissions which could
influence the reception of radiobeacon signal broadcasts.
GC Great Circle.
GMT (Greenwich An obsolete term replaced by UTC in scientific literature.

Mean Time)
GPS (Global A system that consists of a Space Segment, Control

Positioning Segment, and User Segment. NAVSTAR is an example of a
System) GPS.
GPS time A measure of time used internally by the NAVSTAR system.

GPS time is based on UTC, but does not add periodic “leap
seconds” to correct for changes in the Earth's period of
rotation. As of 1 July 1997, GPS time was 12 seconds ahead
of UTC.
HAE Height above ellipsoid.
HDG Heading.
Heading Direction the vessel is pointed.
HDOP A measure of the magnitude of DOP errors in latitude and

(Horizontal longitude.
Dilution of
Precision)

Glossary
km kilometers.
MF Medium Frequency (283.5 to 325.0 kHz).
Mi Miles.
MSL This represents a average sea level observed over a long

(Mean Sea Level) period of time.
NAVSTAR GPS The formal name of the global positioning system used by
the NT300D. NAVSTAR is an acronym for NAVigation
Satellite for Timing And Ranging.
NC Normally Closed.
Nm Nautical Miles.
NMEA National Marine Electronics Association.
NMEA-0183 A standard established by the National Marine Electronics

Association (NMEA) that defines electrical signals, data
transmission protocol, timing, and sentence formats for
communicating navigation data among marine navigation
instruments. The NT300D receiver can output several
standard NMEA-0183 messages.
NO Normally Open.
PDOP mask A receiver parameter specifying a maximum PDOP value

for positioning. When the geometric orientation of the
satellites yields a PDOP greater than the mask value, the
receiver stops calculating position fixes.
PDOP (Position A description of the purely geometric contribution to the

Dilution of uncertainty of position.
Precision)
position mode A receiver's mode of computing a GPS position fix. The

possible positioning modes are auto 2D/3D, 2D, and 3D.

Glossary
PRN Pseudorandom Number.
pseudorange The apparent distance from a satellite to a receiver,

computed as the product of apparent signal propagation
time and the speed of light. Differences between
pseudorange and real range are caused by offsets between
the satellite and receiver clocks, by propagation delays, and
by other errors.
PRC Pseudorange corrections are computed by determining the

(Pseudorange differences between the actual and computed ranges to
Correction) tracked satellites.
radiobeacon A commercial or government-owned transmitter for

broadcasting RTCM SC-104 corrections to DGPS receivers
such as the NT300D. A reference station at the radiobeacon
site receives GPS signals from satellites and sends
pseudorange corrections to the radiobeacon for transmission
to receivers within the broadcast range.
radiobeacon One of the two NT300D Beacon channels used to track

channel radiobeacon signals.
RAIM Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring.
RRC (Range rate A correction term describing the change in a satellite's

correction) signal errors over time.
reference station A receiver that operates at a known, fixed location, and

generates corrections describing the errors in each SV signal
tracked by the receiver.
Remote Station A secondary NT300D unit, connected directly to the

NT300D, for navigation from a second location on the
vessel. The Remote Station shares most of the same
functionality offered by the primary unit. The Remote
Station is sometimes referred to as the Dual Head Option.

Glossary
RFI Radio-Frequency Interference.
RL Rhumb Line.
RTCM Radio Technical Commission for Maritime Services.
RTCM SC-104 A standard format for differential GPS corrections; used to

transmit corrections from a reference station to roving GPS
receivers.
search mode The NT300D supports three radiobeacon search modes—

Auto Power, Auto Range, and Manual mode.
Set Direction of Current.
SOG Speed Over Ground.
SPD Speed.
SV Space vehicle; specifically, a GPS satellite.
TAIP Trimble ASCII Interface Protocol.
TSIP Trimble Standard Interface Protocol.
TTG Time to Go.
user datum User-defined datum. The NT300D supports 3-parameter and

7-parameter user-defined datum conversions.
UTC (Universal Local solar mean time at the Greenwich meridian.

Time
Coordinated)
UTM Universal Traverse Mercator.
VDOP (Vertical A measure of the magnitude of DOP errors in the height

Dilution of component of a position fix.
Precision)

Glossary
VMG Velocity Made Good.
WER Word Error Rate.
WGS-84 World Geodetic System (1984), the Datum used by GPS.
XTE Cross Track Error.

Index
Numerics A
12-channel GPS receiver 1-2 A-AXIS field
200 PPNM seven parameter datum 9-18, 9-67
output 2-26 three parameter datum 9-16, 9-66
types of tests 9-69 accuracy
24-hour time format 9-26 criterions 1-8
2D factors affecting
definition Glossary-1 elevation mask 1-11
position 1-9 environmental factors 1-9
position fix mode 9-8 number of visible
solution Glossary-1 satellites 1-9
2D/3D PDOP mask 1-10
position fix mode 9-8 position fix mode 1-11
3D SNR mask 1-11
altitude 1-9 GPS 1-7
definition Glossary-1 distance between
number of visible satellites 1-9 receivers 1-7
PDOP mask 1-10 multipath 1-7
position 1-9 number of satellites 1-7
position fix mode 9-8 PDOP 1-7
solution Glossary-1 rate of corrections 1-7
4000DS receiver 1-8 satellite elevations 1-7
4000MSK DGPS Reference Station 1-8 SNR 1-7
4000RS receiver 1-8 optimal 1-9
7-pin connector kit 2-26 reference station
receiver type 1-7
ACCY field 8-13
acquisition
NT300D Operation Manual Index-1

Index
radiobeacon signal 1-14 data entry 3-10

satellites Glossary-1 fields 3-10
Add softkey 7-11 editing 3-11
Advance One Leg softkey 7-5, 7-13 ALT
advancing a route leg 7-13 definition Glossary-1
age option
corrections 1-12 SETUP/USER/USER 1, 2
AGE field 8-11, 8-13 and 3 screens 9-43
alarm altitude 1-9, Glossary-2
Anchor 9-28 analog-to-digital
configuration 4-6 conversion
Correction Age Limit 9-31 beacon 1-14
Destination 9-29 wide-band 1-14
DGPS Lock 9-31 ANCHOR ALARM field 9-28
GPS Lock 9-31 Anchor icon
Hazard 5-7, 9-28 ROUTE screen 7-9
Key Beep 9-26 WAYPOINT screen 6-6
Message Beep 9-26 antenna 2-17
RTCM 16 9-29 cable
settings 4-6 50 meter 1-4
Time 9-26 connecting 2-17
Time Limit 9-29 installation 2-4
Watch 9-26 length 2-4
Waypoint 9-29 optional 2-4
XTE (Cross-Track Error) 9-29 preparing cable ends 2-17
Alaska/Canada datum 9-14 routing 2-17
ALM output sentence B-16, B-17 securing 2-18
almanac configuration
beacon Glossary-1 combined 1-15, 2-3
GPS B-16 connectors 2-18
satellite Glossary-1 electrical interference 2-14
alphabetical GPS 2-3
character entry 3-11 housing 2-16
data 3-10 installation 2-13
fields 3-11 cable 2-17
alphanumeric connectors 2-18
data 3-10 direct mount 2-16
Index-2 NT300D Operation Manual

Index
pole mount 2-14 H-Field Loop antenna 1-15

mount I/O processing 1-14
direct 2-16 prefiltering 1-13
pole 2-14 radiobeacon database 1-14
ANTENNA ALTITUDE field 9-12 receiver
APA output sentence B-18 Auto Power mode 4-4
APB output sentence B-19 Auto Range mode 4-4
ARPA 2-30 external corrections 4-4
arrow keys 3-4 internal 1-13
ASA Glossary-1 Manual mode 4-4
AT field 9-26 receiver configuration 4-4
audience xxvi receiver modes 4-4
Australian datum 9-14 wide-band conversion 1-14
auto 2D/3D Beacon Bit Rate field B-32
position fix mode 1-11, 9-8 Beacon Frequency field B-32
Auto Dist option 9-33 bearing Glossary-2
auto GPS mode Glossary-2 Bearing and Distance to Waypoint -
Auto Power mode 4-4, 9-34 Great Circle sentence B-22
Auto Range mode 4-4 Bearing and Distance to Waypoint -
Auto Waypoint Switching mode 7-13 Rhumb Line sentence B-23
automatic BEARING field 7-8, 7-10
gain control 1-13 Bearing from Origin to Destination
waypoint switching 9-20 sentence B-21
Autopilot Sentence "A" B-18 Bell icon
Autopilot Sentence "B" B-19 ROUTE screen 7-9
AVAILABLE field 9-39 WAYPOINT screen 6-6
averaging Blank icon
COG/SOG 5-7 ROUTE screen 7-9
azimuth Glossary-2 WAYPOINT screen 6-6
Boat icon 5-3, 9-7
BOAT ICON field 9-7
B BOD output sentence B-21
back panel 1-3, 2-23, 2-24 brightness 3-4
backlighting 1-2 Brightness key 3-4
BATTERY field 9-39 BWC output sentence B-22
beacon BWR output sentence B-23
analog-to-digital conversion 1-14

Index
C Clear CDU Memory field 9-71

Clear WPT/RTE Memory
C/A code 1-2, 1-3
command 9-71
definition Glossary-2
clock
cable
dither error 1-6
antenna
errors 1-6
preparation 2-19
Coarse/Acquisition code 1-2, 1-3
routing 2-17
COG
avoiding hazards 2-17
direct path 2-17
field
calculation type
NAV1 screen 5-10
Great Circle B-61
indicator 4-5, 5-3, 5-7
Rhumb Line B-61
softkey 5-7
Cancel Route softkey 5-16, 7-5, 7-12
option
carrier-phase
SETUP/USER/USER 1, 2
filtering 1-2
and 3 screens 9-43
measurements 1-3
COG/SOG averaging 5-7
cautions xxx
COG/SOG AVG
CDU
field 9-20
back panel 2-23
variable 5-7
control keys 3-2
combined antenna 1-15
cable
excessive cold tolerance 2-7
routing 2-17
excessive heat tolerance 2-7
description 1-15
front panel 2-5
feature 1-4
gimbal mount 2-5
installation 2-3
installation 2-1, 2-5, 2-6, 2-7
mount 2-13
overview 2-5
direct 2-16
performance 2-7
pole 2-14
reliability 2-7
communication protocols 1-3
vibration 2-7
compass
CE-Mark compliance 1-3, 2-1
display 5-1
Change Display softkey 5-10
display mode 5-11
Change Field softkey 5-10
NAV2 screen 4-5
character entry
complex routes 7-1
fields 3-11
compliance
circuit protection 2-33
CE-mark 1-3
Clear All Memory field 9-71

Index
IEC945 1-3 numeric 3-4

configuration Plot key 3-7
antenna 1-15 Power key 3-3
beacon receiver 4-4 softkeys 3-6
coordinate system selection 4-4 summary 3-5
GPS parameters 4-3 Control/Display Unit
I/O ports 4-3, 9-54 back panel 2-23
NT300D 4-1 control keys 3-2
overview 4-1 description 2-5
PC Card 9-41 excessive cold tolerance 2-7
route library 4-6 excessive heat tolerance 2-7
SCR 4-7 front panel 2-5
serial ports 4-3 installation 2-1, 2-6, 2-7
SETUP screens 4-1 installation kit 2-5
SETUP/USER screens 9-42 overview 2-5
track recorder 4-6 performance 2-7
waypoint library 4-6 reliability 2-7
Confirmation 3-12 vibration 2-7
confirmation messages 3-12 CONXALL connector
constellation of satellites 1-9 installation 2-26
Contact Closure Output field 9-69 coordinate system
contact closure outputs 2-30 Decca 4-4
external alarm 2-30, 2-31 geographical 4-4
normally closed 2-31 HK80 4-4
normally open 2-31 selecting 4-4
PPNM A 2-30 UTM 4-4
PPNM B 2-30 Copy to Waypoint softkey 5-14, 5-15,
pull-up resistor 2-30 6-9
speed log 2-30, 2-31 copyrights ii
contrast 3-4 CORECTION AGE LIMIT field 9-31
Contrast key 3-4 CORR field 8-13
control keys 3-2 corrections
arrow 3-4 age
Brightness 3-4 default 1-12
Contrast 3-4 limit 1-12
function keys 3-5 definition Glossary-2
Menu key 3-6 external 1-2

Index
internal 1-2 entering in fields 3-10

prioritizing 1-2 database
Course Over Ground and Ground Speed route 4-6
sentence B-38, B-39, B-40, B-41 waypoint 4-6
Course Over Ground field 5-10 Date
Course to Waypoint local 9-6
field option
NAV1 screen 5-10 SETUP/USER/USER 1, 2
Create Leg Acknowledgment and 3 screens 9-43
sentence B-58 SETUP/USER/USER 1,2
Create Leg Command sentence B-59 and 3 screens 9-43
Create Route Acknowledgment UTC 9-6
sentence B-53 DATE field 9-6
Create Route Command sentence B-54 datum
Cross-Track Error definition Glossary-2
field extended list 9-14
NAV1 screen 5-10 selection 4-4
plotted vessel position 5-9 standard list 9-14
sentence B-42 transformation
steering indicator 5-12 seven parameter 9-15
XTE alarm 9-29 three parameter 9-15
CTW Datum Reference sentence B-24
definition Glossary-2 day display 4-2
field 8-21 dead reckoning
NAV1 screen 5-10 configuration 4-6
option overview 1-13
SETUP/USER/USER 1, 2 See DR 4-6
and 3 screens 9-43 Decca
cursor chain selection 9-22
controls 3-4 parameter setting 9-22
Return to Boat softkey 5-6 DECCA CHAIN SELECT field 9-22
Cursor softkey 8-25 Decr Scale softkey 8-25
custom Trimble NMEA sentences B-7 default
PRC age 1-12
default values
D Elevation Mask 1-10
data NT300D reset 4-2

Index
PDOP 1-10 Contrast control 3-4

position fix mode 1-11 features 3-3
SNR 1-10 high-way 4-5, 5-1
Delete softkey 9-41 mercator grid 5-1, 5-2
Destination mode
course to 5-8 day time 4-2
waypoint 6-9, 8-21 night time 4-2
DESTINATION ALARM field 9-29 setup options 4-2
DFT Glossary-2 size 3-3
DGPS DISPLAY CYCLING TIME field 9-42
corrections DISPLAY field 9-7
accuracy 1-8 displaying
definition Glossary-3 local time 4-2
description 1-5 PLOT screen layers 5-6
error sources 1-6 unit for distance 4-2
Mode indicator 3-8 UTC time 4-2
positioning 1-5 display-only field 3-10
see differential GPS distance
signal lock 1-12 between reference station and
DGPS LOCK ALARM field 9-31 mobile receivers 1-7
DGPS MODE field 9-9 DISTANCE field
DGPS OK MSG field 9-26 STATUS/NAV screen 8-21
DGPS SOURCE field 9-9 DISTANCE IN DR field 8-19
DIFF field 8-9 Distance Made Good
differential beacons 8-16 definition Glossary-3
differential GPS field
known radiobeacons C-1 NAV1 screen 5-10
positioning 1-5 Distance to Destination
radiobeacon definition Glossary-3
listing C-1 field
digital signal processor 1-14 NAV1 screen 5-10
direct mount antenna 2-16 Distance to Waypoint
Direction of Current Glossary-7 definition Glossary-3
disclaimer of warranty iii field
display NAV1 screen 5-10
Brightness control 3-4 DMG
compass 5-1 definition Glossary-3

Index
field NAV1 screen 5-10

NAV1 screen 5-10 option
option SETUP/USER/USER 1, 2
SETUP/USER/USER 1, 2 and 3 screens 9-43
and 3 screens 9-43 Dual Head Option. see Remote Station
document conventions xxix
Done softkey 5-10
DOP E
definition Glossary-3 Edit softkey 7-5, 7-7
DR 1-13 electrical interference 2-14
configuration 4-6 sources 2-14
mode 4-6 elevation
Mode indicator 3-8 definition Glossary-3
DR HEADING field 8-19 factor influencing accuracy 1-7
DR SPEED field 8-19 mask Glossary-3
DR START POSITION field 8-19 default value 1-11
Drift influence on accuracy 1-8,
definition Glossary-2, Glossary-3 1-11
option ELEVATION field 9-10
SETUP/USER/USER 1, 2 ellipsoid
and 3 screens 9-43 definition Glossary-3
DRIFT field Emergency Destination Waypoint
SETUP/DR screen 9-24 cancelling 5-16
DSM Reference Station 1-8 creating 5-15
DSP (digital signal processing) Emergency Location softkey 5-14, 5-15,
See digital signal processing 1-14 6-9
DTD emergency waypoint 5-15
definition Glossary-3 actions 5-15
field cancelling 5-15
NAV1 screen 5-10 creating 5-15
option Emergency Waypoint softkey 5-15
SETUP/USER/USER 1, 2 EMERSAVE record 5-15
and 3 screens 9-43 End softkey 3-11
DTM output sentence B-24 entering
DTW data in fields 3-10
definition Glossary-3 route
field manually 7-7

Index
using range and and 3 screens 9-43

bearing 7-10 European datum 9-14
environment Execute softkey 8-24
factors influencing accuracy 1-9 Ext Datum softkey 9-63
ephemeris external
definition Glossary-4 alarm output 2-31
errors 1-6 corrections 1-2
Erase softkey 3-11, 6-8, 7-5, 7-11 external corrections 4-4
Erase to End softkey 3-11 EYE PATTERN field 8-23
erroneous signals 1-9
ERROR 3-15
error F
erroneous signals 1-9 factory default values
messages 3-15 resetting 4-2
multipath 1-7 Fast Fourier Transform
orbital prediction 1-6 definition Glossary-4
receiver noise 1-7 feature list
S/A removal 1-6 optional 1-4
sources of DGPS error standard 1-3
ionospheric delay 1-7 FFT
multipath 1-7 definition Glossary-4
orbital errors 1-7 narrowband plot 9-36
overview 1-6 narrowband plot with squaring
receiver noise 1-7 on 9-36
S/A 1-7 wideband plot 9-36
tropospheric delay 1-7 fields
error messages 3-15 alphabetical 3-10
E-SQUARED field alphanumeric 3-10, 3-11
seven parameter datum 9-18, 9-67 character entry 3-11
three parameter datum 9-16, 9-66 display only 3-10
Estimated Time of Arrival entering data 3-10
definition Glossary-4 multiple choice 3-10
ETA numeric 3-10, 3-11
definition Glossary-4 Presentation window 3-10
field 8-21 File Transfer Protocol (FTP) site xxviii
option FINAL DESTINATION field 8-21
SETUP/USER/USER 1, 2 Find Empty softkey 6-7

Index
Finnish datum 9-14 glossary Glossary-1

firmware GMT
release date B-77 definition Glossary-4
upgrade agreement 1-4 Go To softkey 5-6
version number B-77 PLOT screen 5-6
Fish icon WAYPOINT screen 6-7
ROUTE screen 7-9 GP Talker ID B-5
WAYPOINT screen 6-6 GPQ sentence B-12
flush mount GPS
SCR 2-39 accuracy 1-3
FORMAT field 9-39 definition Glossary-4
FREQ field 8-22 error sources 1-6
frequency offset 1-14 Lock alarm 9-31
FROM field Mode indicator 3-8
ROUTE screen 7-4 navigation screens 5-2
From SCR softkey 6-8, 6-11 noise sources 1-6
ftp.trimble.com xxviii parameters configuration 4-3
Full Route softkey 5-6 position fix mode
function keys 3-5 influence on accuracy 1-11
fuse 2-33 position update rate 1-3
current protection 2-32 positioning 1-5
installation 2-34 pseudorange errors
specifications 2-34 removing 1-7
signal acquisition delay 1-3
time Glossary-4
G tracking channels 1-3
GC week number B-17
definition Glossary-4 GPS Almanac Data sentence B-16
selecting 7-8 GPS DOP and Active Satellites
Geodetic Surveyor receiver 1-8 sentence B-28
Geodetic System Surveyor receiver 1-8 GPS Fix Data sentence B-25
GGA output sentence B-25 GPS LOCK ALARM field 9-31
gimbal GPS MODE field 9-8
installation kit 2-5, 2-8 GPS OK MSG field 9-26
mounting 2-9 GPS Pseudorange Noise Statistics
GIS Surveyor Base Station 1-8 sentence B-29
GLL output sentence B-26 GPS Range Residuals sentence B-27

Index
GPS Record sentence B-46 SETUP/USER/USER 1, 2

GPS Satellites in View sentence B-30 and 3 screens 9-43
Great Britain datum 9-14 HEADING field
Great Circle SETUP/DR screen 9-24
definition Glossary-4 Heading to Steer Command
PTNLR,ERTL sentence B-61 sentence B-31
selecting 7-8 Heading, Deviation and Variation
Greenwich Mean Time Glossary-4 sentence B-14
ground Height Above Ellipsoid
connection 2-34 definition Glossary-4
installation 2-34 Here softkey 6-7
reference 2-24 H-Field Loop antenna 1-4, 1-15
GRS output sentence B-27 hiding
GSA output sentence B-28 PLOT screen layers 5-6
GST output sentence B-29 hierarchy
GSV output sentence B-30 PLOT screen 5-5
PLOT screens 5-5
ROUTE screens 7-2
H SETUP screens 9-2
HAE Glossary-4 STATUS screens 8-2
Hazard alarm 5-7 WAYPOINT screens 6-2
HAZARD ALARM field 9-28 high-way display 4-5, 5-1
HDG Hjorsey datum 9-14
definition Glossary-4 HK80
field parameter setting 9-22
NAV1 screen 5-10 Hong Kong Grid 9-22
input sentence B-14 Horizontal Dilution of Precision
HDOP definition Glossary-4
definition Glossary-4 HSC output sentence B-31
field 8-9
influence on accuracy 1-10
I
Head Up softkey 5-11
Heading I/O
definition Glossary-4 port configuration 4-3
field processing
NAV1 screen 5-10 beacon 1-14
option I/O port

Index
See serial port 2-26 gimbal mount 2-9

IALA ground 2-34
beacons 8-16 grounding 2-24
station number 8-11 installation kit 2-1, 2-5
icons interconnect diagram 2-2
waypoint 6-6 interface cable termination 2-27
Idle message 8-23 interface devices 2-23
IEC945 compliance 1-3, 2-1 LCD display 2-5
II Talker ID B-5 marine conditions 2-1
IMO 2-1 mode 3-3
Incr Scale softkey 8-25 NT300D 2-1
Insert softkey 7-11 overview 2-1
Installation panel mount 2-10
mode power 2-32
SETUP screen 4-1 Remote Station 2-40
installation RS-422 connections 2-24
antenna 2-3, 2-13 SCR 2-36
direct mount 2-16 flush mount 2-39
installation kit 2-17 serial
pole mount 2-14 interface 2-25
antenna cable port connectors 2-26
connector 2-18 installation kit
connectors 2-18 CDU 2-5
overview 2-17 installation mode
part number 2-1 NT300D 3-3
preparing cable ends 2-17 interconnect diagram
routing 2-17 NT300D 2-2
specifications 2-4 interface devices
breaker/fuse panel 2-33 installation 2-23
CDU 2-1, 2-5, 2-6, 2-7 internal beacon receiver
back panel 2-23 configuration 4-4
gimbal mount 2-8 status 8-1
panel mount 2-10 International Maritime Organization 2-1
combined antenna 2-1 INTERVAL field 9-26
contact closure outputs 2-30 ionospheric
CONXALL connector 2-26 delay 1-7
fuse 2-32, 2-34 errors 1-7

Index
isolated floating power supply 2-24 creating 7-7

record
manual entry 7-7
K maximum number 7-5
KEY BEEP field 9-26 number B-61
keypad 1-2, 3-4 LEG field 7-13, 8-21
numeric 3-4 Leg Library Status Query sentence B-68
kilometers Leg Library Status Report
as unit for distance 4-2 sentence B-69
displaying 4-2 Leg Query sentence B-60
Leg Report sentence B-61
LEVEL field 8-23
L LG Talker ID B-5
library
L/L (DM) parameter setting 9-22 route 4-6
L/L (DMS) parameter setting 9-22 waypoint 4-6, 6-1
Land Surveyor II receiver 1-8 Lighted Buoy icon
Land Surveyor IID receiver 1-8 ROUTE screen 7-9
Languages 9-53 WAYPOINT screen 6-6
languages limitation of liability iii
English 4-2 limited warranty
French 4-2 firmware iv
German 4-2 hardware iv
Icelandic 4-2 software iv
Spanish 4-2 local time
latitude 1-9 displaying 4-2
coordinates B-65 Lock message 8-23
direction B-65 longitude 1-9
layers direction B-65
COG Indicator 5-7 Loran C chains 1-15
Pred Pos 5-7
Wpts 5-7
XTE Lines 5-7 M
Layers softkey 5-6
LC Talker ID B-5 MAG VARIATION field 9-19
LCD display 1-2, 1-3, 2-5, 3-3, 3-6 Magnetic Deviation field B-14
leg Magnetic Sensor Heading field B-14
Magnetic Variation field B-14

Index
man over board 5-14 confirmation 3-12

manual 3D position fix mode 1-11 error 3-15
Manual Freq (Channel 0) field 9-33 status 3-13
Manual Freq (Channel 1) field 9-33 warning 3-14
Manual mode MF 1-2, 1-14
beacon receiver 4-4 definition Glossary-5
Manual option 9-34 miles
MANUAL VARIATION field 9-19 as unit for distance 4-2
manual waypoint switching 9-20 displaying 4-2
marine radiobeacons MOB waypoint 5-15
August 1996 list C-1 mode
site ID C-1 DGPS 9-9
MASKS field 9-10 GPS 9-8
Maxwell technology 1-2 indicator 3-7
Mean Sea Level Glossary-5 installation 3-3
medium frequency Glossary-5 normal 3-3
memory MODE field 8-9
PC Card 1-4 SETUP/NAV screen 9-20
Memory card STATUS/BEACON RECEIVER
care of 10-7 screen 8-22
menu Mode indicator 3-8
displaying 3-9 DGPS 3-8, 4-4
MENU key 3-9 DR 3-8
options 3-6 GPS 3-8
pages 3-9 More softkey 3-6, 3-9
using 3-7 mount
Menu key 3-6 antenna 2-13
mercator grid 5-2 gimbal 2-5
panning 5-4 MSK input sentence B-13
PLOT screen 4-5 MSL
scaling 5-4 definition Glossary-5
zoom MSS output sentence B-31, B-32
in 5-4 multipath
out 5-4 environment 1-7
MESSAGE BEEP field 9-26 environmental factors 1-9
MESSAGE field 8-9 errors 1-7
messages factor influencing accuracy 1-7

Index
multiple choice compass display 5-11

data 3-10 displaying 5-2
data selection 3-10 overview 5-11
field 3-10 steering indicator 5-12
Navigation Record sentence B-48
Navigation screens 4-5, 5-1
N monitoring vessel position 4-5
NAD-27 datum 9-14 NAV1 screen 5-2
NAD-83 datum 9-14 NAV2 screen 5-2
NAME field overview 5-1
ROUTE screen 7-4, 7-8 PLOT screen 5-2
seven parameter datum 9-17, 9-67 types 5-2
three parameter datum 9-16, 9-66 USER1 screen 5-2
nautical miles USER2 screen 5-2
as unit for distance 4-2 USER3 screen 5-2
displaying 4-2 NAVSTAR GPS
NAV CALC field 9-19 definition Glossary-5
Nav key 3-5, 5-2 NC Glossary-5
NAV1 screen 5-8 Next Field softkey 5-10
active route 4-5 NEXT WAYPOINT field 8-21
CTW field 5-10 night display 4-2
data fields 5-10 NMEA Record (Part 1) sentence B-52
displaying 5-2 NMEA Record (Part 2) sentence B-52
DMG field 5-10 NMEA-0183
DTD field 5-10 custom input sentence
DTW field 5-10 PTNLC,ERTI B-54
HDG field 5-10 PTNLC,ERTL B-59
optional data fields 5-10 PTNLC,EWPI B-63
overview 5-8 PTNLQ,ERTI B-56
SOG field 5-10 PTNLQ,ERTL B-60
SPD field 5-10 PTNLQ,EWPI B-64
vessel’s relationship to intended PTNLQ,NRTI B-66
course 4-5 PTNLQ,NRTL B-68
VMG field 5-10 PTNLQ,VERS B-76
XTE field 5-10 PTNLS,SRTI B-73
NAV2 screen PTNLS,SWPI B-73
compass 4-5 custom output sentence

Index
PTNL,CFG,0 B-45 GLL B-26

PTNL,CFG,1 B-46 GRS B-27
PTNL,CFG,2 B-48 GSA B-28
PTNL,CFG,3 B-50 GST B-29
PTNL,CFG,4 B-52 GSV B-30
PTNL,CFG,5 B-52 HSC B-31
PTNLA,ERTI B-53 MSS B-31, B-32
PTNLA,ERTL B-58 R00 B-33
PTNLA,EWPI B-62 RMB B-34
PTNLR,ERTI B-57 RMC B-36
PTNLR,ERTL B-61 VDR B-38
PTNLR,EWPI B-65 VTG B-38, B-39
PTNLR,NRTI B-67 WCV B-40
PTNLR,NRTL B-69 WPL B-41
PTNLR,NWPI B-71 XTE B-42
PTNLR,SRTI B-76 ZDA B-43
PTNLR,SWPI B-73 ZLZ B-44
PTNLR,VERS B-77 sentence
definition Glossary-5 checksum values B-4
input sentence field formats B-4
GPQ B-12 fields B-4
HDG B-14 GSA B-2
MSK B-13 null fields B-5
VHW B-15 RMC B-10
interface devices 2-23 sample structure B-2
latitude and longitude values B-6 structure B-1
NT300D support 1-3 summary B-9
other values B-6 symbols and delimiters B-3
output sentence XTE B-42
ALM B-16 ZDA B-1
APA B-18 serial port input option 9-55
APB B-19 serial port output option 9-56
BOD B-21 signal input and output 2-26
BWC B-22 Talker ID Codes
BWR B-23 GP B-5
DTM B-24 II B-5
GGA B-25 LC B-5

Index
LG B-5 contrast control 3-4

time values B-6 control keys 3-2
NO Glossary-5 cursor controls 3-4
noise display
level 1-14 contrast control 3-4
NT300D 1-6 options 4-2
normal mode electrical interference 2-14
NT300D 3-3 external
normal video 4-2 alarm output 2-31
Normally Closed corrections 1-2
definition Glossary-5 factors influencing accuracy
Normally Open number of visible
definition Glossary-5 satellites 1-8
North Up softkey 5-11 PDOP 1-8
notes xxx reference station type 1-8
NT300D satellite elevation mask 1-8
antenna 2-3 SNR 1-8
antenna cable 2-4 function keys 3-5
back panel 1-3 fuse 2-34
backlighting 1-2 GPS tracking channels 1-3
beacon receiver 1-13 I/O ports 2-26
brightness control 3-4 IEC945 compliance 1-3
C/A code 1-2 input and output protocols 1-3
CDU 2-5 installation 2-1
CE-mark compliance 1-3 I/O ports 2-26
configuration 4-1 kit 2-5
alarms 4-6 internal corrections 1-2
beacon receiver 4-4 keypad 1-2
coordinate system LCD display 1-2, 1-3, 3-3, 3-6
selection 4-4 mobile receivers 1-5, Glossary-3
datum selection 4-4 mode
DR 4-6 installation 3-3
factory defaults 4-2 normal 3-3
route library 4-6 navigation tools 1-3
SCR 4-7 NMEA-0183 1-3
track recorder 4-6 numeric keypad 3-4
waypoint library 4-6 part numbers 2-1

Index
position update rate 1-3 OUPUT BAUD RATE field 9-62

receiver noise 1-6
Remote Station
interconnection 2-41 P
reset P/V filter 1-2, 9-9
default values 4-2 P1 port 2-26
RTCM SC-104 1-2 P2 port 2-26
serial Page Down softkey 6-7, 9-63
ports 1-2, 2-26 Page Up softkey 6-7
speed log output 2-31 panel mount 2-10
standard features 1-3 CDU 2-10
TAIP 1-3 installation kit 2-10
technical data 1-2 panning
tracking channels 1-3 mercator grid 5-4
TSIP 1-3 parameters
typical accuracy 1-3 GPS 4-3
user interface 1-2 setup 4-2
warranty 1-4 part numbers 2-1
number pass-through function 2-23
visible satellites 1-7, 1-8, 1-9 PC Card 4-6
numeric configuration 4-6, 9-41
data 3-10 memory card 1-4, 4-6
data entry 3-10, 3-11 REC TO SCR field 9-48
field 3-10 storing
keypad 3-4 routes 7-14
waypoints 6-8
PCMCIA
O
See PC Card 4-6
OFFSET field 9-7 PDOP
OK softkey 3-13, 3-14 definition Glossary-5
Operating the SCR 10-2 field 8-9, 9-11
optional features 1-4 influence on accuracy 1-7, 1-8,
orbital 1-10
errors 1-6 mask 1-10, Glossary-5
prediction errors 1-6 default setting 1-10
radius 1-5 PDOP SWITCH field 9-11
organization xxvi Plot key 3-7

Index
PLOT screen 3-7 position

COG indicator 4-5, 5-3 factors influencing accuracy 1-7
displaying layers 5-6 mode Glossary-5
Hazard alarm 9-28 predicted 5-3
heading indicator 4-5 signal acquisition delay 1-3
hierarchy 5-5 storage 5-14
icons 5-3 submeter accuracy 1-5
latitude scale 5-4 typical accuracy 1-3
layers update rate 1-3
displaying 5-6 Position Data sentence B-26
Pred Pos 5-7 Position Dilution of Precision
vessel icon 4-5 definition Glossary-5
Wpts 5-7 see also PDOP
XTE Lines 5-7 POSITION DISPLAY field 9-22
Layers softkey 5-6 POSITION field
longitude scale 5-4 SETUP/DR screen 9-24
menu 5-3 position fix mode 1-11
mercator grid 4-5, 5-2, 5-3 POSITION RATE field 9-62
monitoring vessel track 4-5 Position/Velocity filter 1-2, 9-9
overview 5-1, 5-3 positioning
panning mercator grid 5-4 2D 1-11
predicted position 4-5, 5-3 2D or 3D 1-9
Presentation window 5-4 3D 1-11
scaling grid 5-4 Auto 1-11
softkeys 5-6 default 1-11
track history 5-3 power
unit of measure 5-4 cable 2-32
waypoints 4-5 circuit protection 2-32
XTE lines 4-5, 5-3 connection 2-32
PNU fuse
option holder 2-34
SETUP/USER/USER 1, 2 source connection 2-32
and 3 screens 9-43 supply 2-24
pole mount antenna 2-14 Power key 3-3
Port 1 2-26 PPNM A 2-30
Port 2 2-26 PPNM B 2-30
POS/VEL FILTER field 9-9 PRC

Index
age mobile receivers 1-5

default value 1-12 multipath 1-7
degraded position receiver noise 1-7
accuracy 1-12 reference station 1-5
overview 1-12 S/A 1-6
time tag 1-12 satellite clock 1-6
creation time 1-12 satellite orbital 1-6
definition Glossary-6 sources 1-6
effect on position accuracy 1-12 tropospheric delay 1-7
field 8-13 PTNL,CFG,0 output sentence B-45
preamplifier 1-15 PTNL,CFG,1 output sentence B-46
Pred Pos PTNL,CFG,2 output sentence B-48
field 9-29 PTNL,CFG,3 output sentence B-50
softkey 5-7 PTNL,CFG,4 output sentence B-52
predicted position 5-3 PTNL,CFG,5 output sentence B-52
description 5-7 PTNLA,ERTI output sentence B-57
setup 5-7 PTNLA,ERTL output sentence B-58
preface xxv PTNLA,EWPI output sentence B-62
prefiltering 1-13 PTNLC,ERTI input sentence B-54
Presentation window 3-8, 5-4 PTNLC,ERTL input sentence B-59
fields 3-10 PTNLC,EWPI input sentence B-63
prioritizing corrections 1-2 PTNLQ,ERTI input sentence B-56
PRN PTNLQ,ERTL input sentence B-60
definition Glossary-6 PTNLQ,EWPI input sentence B-64
product PTNLQ,NRTI input sentence B-66
name B-77 PTNLQ,NRTL input sentence B-68
serial number B-77 PTNLQ,VERS input sentence B-76
Product Information Record PTNLR,ERTI output sentence B-57
sentence B-45 PTNLR,ERTL output sentence B-61
pseudorandom number PTNLR,EWPI output sentence B-65
definition Glossary-6 PTNLR,EWPI sentence B-65
pseudorange PTNLR,NRTI output sentence B-67
correction Glossary-6 PTNLR,NRTL output sentence B-69
correction age 1-12 PTNLR,NWPI output sentence B-71
errors 1-5 PTNLR,SRTI output sentence B-76
description 1-7 PTNLR,SWPI output sentence B-73
ionospheric delay 1-7 PTNLR,VERS output sentence B-77

Index
PTNLS,SRTI input sentence B-73 Receiver Information Report

PTNLS,SWPI input sentence B-73 sentence B-77
pull-up resistor 2-30 Recommended Minimum Navigation
PWR Information sentence B-34
connector 2-26 Recommended Minimum Specific GPS
port 2-26 Data sentence B-36
recording
navigation data 4-6
R positions 4-6
R00 output sentence B-33 reference station 1-5, 1-7, Glossary-3
radar definition Glossary-6
connection 2-32 health monitoring 1-12
radio frequency interference 2-34 placing at known location 1-5,
radiobeacon Glossary-3
channel Glossary-6 REFSTA ID field 8-11
definition Glossary-6 related information xxviii
list of IALA stations C-1 update notes xxviii
receiver 1-2 relay contacts 2-30
RADIUS field 9-20, 9-28 REMOTE SELECT option 9-57
RAIM Glossary-6 Remote Station
GAST output sentence B-29 cable pinout requirements 2-42
GRS output sentence B-27 cable termination 2-42
RANGE field 7-8, 7-10 choosing location 2-40
Range Rate Correction Glossary-6 configuration fields 9-55
RATE field 8-22 connecting to primary unit 2-41
rate of corrections installation 2-40
reference station 1-7 installing CDU 2-40
reader comment form xxix operation 11-1
REC RATE field 9-49 routing cable 2-40
REC RATE MODE field 9-48 REMOTE STATION option 9-56
REC TO SCR field 9-48 reset
receiver NT300D 4-2
noise 1-7 Reset softkey 9-52
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Return softkey
Monitoring Glossary-6 menus 3-6
Receiver Information Query ROUTE screen 7-8
sentence B-76 SETUP/ I/O /CONTROL/DATUM

Index
screen 9-63 record

SETUP/LANGUAGES editing 7-11
screen 9-53 entering 7-6
Return to Boat softkey 5-4, 5-6 erasing 7-12
Reverse softkey 7-5 naming 7-8
reverse video 4-2 number B-57, B-61
revision notice iii storing on PC Card 7-14
RFI 2-34 search and rescue 7-14
definition Glossary-7 types 7-9, B-57
Rhumb Line ROUTE DISTANCE field 7-8
definition Glossary-7 ROUTE field 8-21
PTNLR,ERTL sentence B-61 Route Library Status Query
selecting 7-8 sentence B-66
RL Route Library Status Report
definition Glossary-7 sentence B-67
selecting 7-8 Route Query sentence B-56
RMB output sentence B-34, B-35 Route Report sentence B-57
RMC output sentence B-10, B-36, B-37 ROUTE screen
RMS 1-8 arrow in left margin 7-3
route fields 7-4
advancing legs 7-13 hierarchy 7-2
creating 7-6 overview 7-1
first waypoint 7-8 softkeys 7-5
using range and Route Search Report sentence B-72
bearing 7-10 Route Search sentence B-73
definition 7-1 ROUTE/EDIT screen
icons 7-9 manual entry 7-7
label B-57 menu options 7-11
leg record number B-61 RRC
library 4-6, 7-3 definition Glossary-6
number of blank field 8-13
records B-67 RS-232
number of Leg records 7-5 receiving signals on RS-422
number of legs B-57 port 2-25
number of records 7-3 RS-422 port configuration 4-3
maximum number B-67 signal connections 2-25
overview 7-1 signal ground 2-25

Index
signal level converter 2-25 clock-dither 1-6

RS-422 1-4 ephemeris 1-6
cable 2-24 orbital 1-6
cable requirements 2-24 removing 1-6
interface connections 2-24 unplanned clock errors 1-6
port configuration 4-3 satellite clock dithering 1-6
serial connections 2-25 satellite
signal broadcasts
ground 2-25 clock data 1-6
level converter 2-25 orbital data 1-6
RT-90 datum 9-14 predicted behavior 1-6
RTCM clock dithering 1-6
definition Glossary-7 constellation 1-9
serial port elevation 1-7
input option 9-55 pseudorange errors 1-6
output option 9-56 signal
RTCM 16 ALARM field 9-29 accuracy 1-11
RTCM SC-104 strength 1-11
corrections 1-2 weak signals 1-11
definition Glossary-7 Save
message function 5-14
formatting 1-14 key 3-5, 5-14, 5-15
pass-through function 2-23 SAVE function 5-14
records SAVE screen 5-14
Type 3 8-15 Emergency Waypoint
Type 7 8-16 softkey 5-15
signal input and output 2-26 overview 5-14
RTCM STATION MSG field 9-26 softkeys 5-15
RTCM WER field 8-23 SCALE field 9-18, 9-67
scaling
mercator grid 5-4
S PLOT Screen 5-4
S/A to display full route 5-6
description 1-6 scope xxvi
error Scorpio Option 1-4
pseudorange 1-6 SCR 1-4, 2-23
errors 1-6 configuration 4-7

Index
connecting cables 2-36 PLOT 5-3

installation ROUTE 7-3
choosing location 2-36 ROUTE/EDIT 7-7
diagram 2-37 ROUTE/SEARCH &
options 2-37 RESCUE 7-15
overview 2-36 SAVE 5-14
memory cards 10-5 SETUP 9-6
mounting 2-36 SETUP I/O 9-54
part number 2-1 SETUP/ I/O /CC OUTPUT 9-68
PC Card types 4-6 SETUP/ I/O /CONTROL 2 9-61
port 2-26 SETUP/ I/O /NMEA
retrieving waypoint libraries 6-11 SENTENCE 9-59
routing cables 2-36 SETUP/ I/O /USER DATUM
setup 9-38 3 9-65
signal input and output 2-26 SETUP/ I/O /USER DATUM
storing 7 9-65
route libraries 4-6 SETUP/ALARM 1 9-25
waypoint libraries 6-11 SETUP/ALARM 2 9-27
using 4-7 SETUP/ALARM 3 9-30
waypoint storage 4-6 SETUP/BEACON
screen RECEIVER 9-32
confirmation messages 3-12 SETUP/BEACON RECEIVER/
elements 3-7 FFT 9-35, 9-37
error messages 3-15 SETUP/DR 9-23
fields 3-10 SETUP/GPS 9-8
menu 3-7, 3-9 SETUP/GPS/DATUM 9-14
MENU key 3-6 SETUP/GPS/USER/DATUM
Mode indicator 3-7, 3-8 3 9-15
More softkey 3-9 SETUP/LANGUGAGES 9-53
Presentation window 3-7 SETUP/NAV 9-19
softkeys 3-6 SETUP/NAV/COORDS 9-21
status messages 3-13 SETUP/SCR 9-38
title bar 3-7, 3-8 SETUP/SCR/DIR 9-41
warning messages 3-14 SETUP/SCR/FORMAT 9-40
screens SETUP/TRACK 9-47
NAV1 5-8 SETUP/TRACK/CONFIG 9-51
NAV2 5-11 SETUP/TRACK/CONFIG/

Index
EDIT 9-51 Search message 8-23

SETUP/TRACK/DISP 9-49 SEARCH MODE field 9-33
SETUP/USER 9-42 selective availability
SETUP/USER/USER 1 9-43 See S/A 1-6
SETUP/USER/USER 2 9-43 serial
SETUP/USER/USER 3 9-43 interface
SETUP/UTIL 9-70 configuration 2-26
SETUPSETUP/GPS/USER installation 2-25
DATUM 7 9-15 installing external
STATUS 8-4 devices 2-25
STATUS/BEACON interface devices 2-23
RECEIVER 8-22 pin-out diagram 2-25
STATUS/DGPS 8-10 protocols 1-3
STATUS/DGPS/BEACON RS-422 cable
ALMANAC 8-16 requirements 2-24
STATUS/DGPS/ port
CORRECTIONS 8-12 alarm output 2-26
STATUS/DGPS/REF configuration 4-3
STATION 8-15 connector
STATUS/DGPS/RTCM installation 2-26
MESSAGE 8-14 contact closure 2-26
STATUS/DR 8-18 external corrections 4-4
STATUS/GPS 8-6 external RTCM
STATUS/GPS/INFO 8-8 corrections 1-2
STATUS/GRAPH 8-24 installing external
STATUS/GRAPH/ devices 2-25
EXECUTE 8-25, 8-26 NMEA-0183 2-26
STATUS/NAV 8-20 pin-out diagram 2-28
STATUS/SCR 8-27 Port 1 2-26
USER1 5-13 Port 1 contact closure output
WAYPOINT 6-3 signal 2-30
search Port 2 2-26
mode Glossary-7 RS-422 to RS-232 2-25
route RS-422 to RS-422 2-25
defining 7-14 RS-422 to TTL 2-25
waypoint library B-74 RTCM SC-104 2-26
Search and Rescue softkey 7-5 speed log 2-26

Index
TAIP 2-26 fields 9-62

TSIP 2-26 overview 9-61
resistor 2-30 SETUP/ I/O /NMEA CONTROL
Serial Port Record sentence B-50 screen 9-61
Set SETUP/ I/O /NMEA screen
definition Glossary-7 definition 9-5
option SETUP/ I/O /NMEA SENTENCES
SETUP/USER/USER 1, 2 screen
and 3 screens 9-43 overview 9-59
Set and Drift sentence B-38 TALKER ID field options 9-60
SET field SETUP/ I/O screen
SETUP/DR screen 9-24 definition 9-5
setup overview 9-54
changing parameters 4-2 SETUP/ALARM 1 screen
external beacon receiver 9-32 definition 9-4
GPS parameters 9-8 fields 9-26
Misc/Languages 9-53 overview 9-25
overview 9-1 SETUP/ALARM 2 screen
SCR 9-38 definition 9-4
Setup key 3-5 fields 9-28
SETUP screen overview 9-27
definition 9-4 XTE alarm 5-7
factory default values 9-3 SETUP/ALARM 3 screen
fields 9-6 definition 9-4
hierarchy 9-2 fields 9-31
Installation mode 4-1 overview 9-30
manual leg switching 7-13 SETUP/ALARM screen
overview 9-1, 9-6 overview 9-25
protected screens 9-3 SETUP/BEACON RECECIVER/FFT
summary 9-4 screen
working with 4-1 definition 9-4
SETUP/ I/O /CC OUTPUT screen SETUP/BEACON RECEIVER screen
definition 9-5 definition 9-4
fields 9-69 fields 9-33
overview 9-68 overview 9-32
SETUP/ I/O /CONTROL screen SETUP/BEACON RECEIVER/FFT
definition 9-5 narrowband plot 9-37

Index
wideband plot 9-37 data recording 8-26

SETUP/BEACON RECEIVER/FFT definition 9-4
screen 9-35 fields 9-48
SETUP/DR screen overview 9-45
definition 9-4 SETUP/TRACK/CONFIG screen 9-50
SETUP/GPS screen SETUP/TRACK/CONFIG/EDIT
definition 9-4 screen 9-51
fields 9-8 SETUP/TRACK/DISP screen 9-49
overview 9-8 SETUP/TRACK/RESET screen 9-52
SETUP/GPS/DATUM screen definition 9-4
definition 9-4 SETUP/USER screen 3-5
overview 9-13 definition 9-4
SETUP/GPS/DATUM/USER DATUM overview 9-42
screen SETUP/USER/USER 1 screen
definition 9-4 data selections 9-43
overview 9-15 displaying 5-2
SETUP/I/O /TERMINAL screen 9-58 displaying data 4-5
SETUP/LANGUAGES screen overview 4-5
definition 9-5 SETUP/USER/USER 2 screen
overview 9-53 displaying 5-2
SETUP/NAV screen 7-8, 7-13 displaying data 4-5
definition 9-4 overview 4-5
fields 9-19 SETUP/USER/USER 3 screen
overview 9-19 data selections 9-43
SETUP/NAV/COORDS screen displaying 5-2
definition 9-4 displaying data 4-5
fields 9-22 overview 4-5
overview 9-21 SETUP/USER/USER1 screen
SETUP/SCR screen overview 9-43
definition 9-5 SETUP/USER/USER2 screen
fields 9-39 overview 9-43
overview 9-38 SETUP/USER/USER3 screen
SETUP/SCR/DIR screen overview 9-43
overview 9-41 SETUP/UTIL screen
SETUP/TRACK screen definition 9-5

Index
memory clearing options 9-71 SNR

overview 9-70 electrical interference 2-14
seven parameter datum factor influencing accuracy 1-7
transformation 9-15 field 8-22, 9-11
Show Latest softkey 8-25 influence on accuracy 1-7
signal Mask
acquisition delay 1-3 default setting 1-11
level 1-14 overview 1-11
level converter softkeys 3-6
RS-232 to RS-422 2-25 0-9 3-11
return Add 7-11
TTL device 2-25 Advance One Leg 7-5, 7-13
Signal Strength field B-32 A-Z 3-11
Signal to Noise Ratio 9-11 Cancel 3-6
signal-to-noise ratio 8-7 Cancel Route 5-16, 7-5, 7-12
see SNR Change Display 5-10
Signal-to-Noise Ratio field B-32 Change Field 5-10
SIZE field 9-39 COG Indicator 5-7
Skull and Crossbones icon Copy to Waypoint 5-14, 5-15, 6-9
ROUTE screen 7-9 Cursor 8-25
WAYPOINT screen 6-6 Decr Scale 8-25
SLOT A field 9-39 Delete 9-41
SLOT B field 9-39 Done 5-10
slots Edit 7-5, 7-7
SCR 8-27 Emergency Location 5-14, 5-15,
Smart Card Reader 1-4, 2-23 6-9
connecting cables 2-36 Emergency Waypoint 5-15
installation Erase 3-11, 6-8, 7-5, 7-11
diagram 2-37 Erase to End 3-11
options 2-37 Execute 8-24
overview 2-36 Ext Datum 9-63
mounting 2-36 Find Empty 6-7
part number 2-1 From SCR 6-8, 6-11
retrieving waypoint libraries 6-11 Full Route 5-6
routing cables 2-36 Go To 5-6, 6-7
slots 8-27 Head Up 5-11
storing waypoint libraries 6-11 Here 6-7

Index
Incr Scale 8-25 definition Glossary-7

Insert 7-11 field
Layers 5-6 NAV1 screen 5-10
More 3-6, 3-9 SPD/HDG SOURCE field 8-19, 9-24
Next Field 5-10 specifications
North Up 5-11 display 3-3
OK 3-6, 3-13, 3-14 fuse 2-34
overview 3-6 operating characteristics A-1
Page Down 6-7, 9-63 physical A-1
Page Up 6-7, 9-63 power source 2-35
Pred Pos 5-7 Speed
Reset 9-52 field
Return 3-6, 9-53, 9-63 NAV1 screen 5-10
Return to Boat 5-4, 5-6 option
Reverse 7-5 SETUP/USER/USER 1, 2
Search and Rescue 7-5 and 3 screens 9-43
Show Latest 8-25 SPEED field
Space 3-11 SETUP/DR screen 9-24
To SCR 6-8, 6-11 speed log output 2-31
Track 5-7 Speed Over Ground
Use as Route 7-5 definition Glossary-7
User Datum 9-63 field
Wpts 5-7 NAV1 screen 5-10
XTE Lines 5-7 standard features 1-3
SOG START TIME field 8-19
definition Glossary-7 STATION HLTH field 8-11
field station number
NAV1 screen 5-10 IALA 8-11
option status
SETUP/USER/USER 1, 2 DGPS 8-10
and 3 screens 9-43 internal beacon receiver 8-1
source messages 3-13
DGPS 9-9 STATUS field 8-23
sources of error Status key 3-5
GPS 1-6 STATUS screen 4-5
Space softkey 3-11 definition 8-3
SPD fields 8-4

Index
hierarchy 8-2 STATUS/GRAPH/EXECUTE screen

monitoring NT300D status 4-5 overview 8-25
monitoring receiver status 4-5 softkeys 8-25
overview 8-4 STATUS/NAV screen 4-5
summary 8-3 definition 8-3
STATUS/BEACON RECEIVER fields 8-21
screen 8-22 overview 8-20
definition 8-3 STATUS/SCR screen
STATUS/DGPS screen 4-5 steering
definition 8-3 indicator 5-12
fields 8-11 Steering indicator 5-12
overview 8-10 straight thread
STATUS/DGPS/BEACON ALMANAC antenna pole mount 2-14
screen SV
overview 8-16 definition Glossary-7
STATUS/DGPS/CORRECTIONS field 8-13
screen health status B-17
overview 8-12 number of visible 1-9
STATUS/DGPS/REF STATION screen SWE001 3 datum 9-14
overview 8-15 System Surveyor II receiver 1-8
STATUS/DGPS/RTCM MESSAGE
screen
overview 8-14 T
STATUS/DR screen 4-5 TAIP
definition 8-3 definition Glossary-7
fields 8-19 input and output 2-26
overview 8-18 interface devices 2-23
STATUS/GPS screen 4-5 interfacing with external
definition 8-3 equipment 1-3
overview 8-6 serial port input option 9-55
STATUS/GPS/INFO screen serial port output option 9-56
overview 8-8 serial port protocol 1-4
STATUS/GRAPH screen Talker ID B-5
definition 8-3 TALKER ID field 9-60
overview 8-24 technical assistance xxviii

Index
technical data recorder

beacon receiver 1-13 configuration 4-6
NT300D 1-2 navigation data storage 4-6
Test 200 PPNM field 9-69 position storage 4-6
three parameter datum TRACK DISPLAY field 9-49
transformation 9-15 Track message 8-23
tie wrap TRACK REC field 9-48
antenna 2-18 Track softkey 5-7
Time tracking channels 1-3
24-hour format 9-26 trademarks iii
display 4-2 Trimble ASCII Interface Protocol 2-23
of position fix B-25 input and output 2-26
OFFSET field 9-7 interfacing with external
UTC B-25 equipment 1-3
TIME ALARM field 9-26 serial port protocols 1-4
Time and Date sentence B-43 Trimble Standard Interface
TIME field Protocol 2-23
SETUP screen 9-6 input and output 2-26
STATUS/GPS/INFO screen 8-9 interfacing with external
TIME IN DR field 8-19 equipment 1-3
TIME LIMIT field 9-29 serial port protocols 1-4
TIME LIMIT variable 5-7 tropospheric delay 1-7
Time of Day sentence B-44 minimizing 1-7
TIME REMAINING field 9-26 TSIP
Time To Go definition Glossary-7
definition Glossary-7 input and output 2-26
TIME TO GO field 8-21 interfacing with external
title bar 3-7, 3-8 equipment 1-3
TNL serial port
version number B-77 input option 9-55
TO field output option 9-56
ROUTE screen 7-4 protocol 1-4
To SCR softkey 6-8, 6-11 TTG
Tokyo datum 9-14 definition Glossary-7
track option
graphic depiction 5-7 SETUP/USER/USER 1, 2
history 5-3 and 3 screens 9-43

Index
TTL device definition Glossary-7

signal connections 2-25 User Datum softkey 9-63
signal return 2-25 user interface 1-2
TYPE User key 3-5, 5-2
field USER screen 3-5
ROUTE screen 7-4 overview 5-13
STATUS/DGPS USER1 screen 4-5
screen 8-11 overview 5-13
WAYPOINT screen 6-5 USER2 screen 4-5
icons overview 5-13
ROUTE screen 7-9 USER3 screen 4-5
WAYPOINT screen 6-6 overview 5-13
UTC
U GGA sentence B-25
unit for distance GRS sentence B-27
kilometers 4-2 GST sentence B-29
miles 4-2 RMC sentence B-37
nautical miles 4-2 time
unit of distance 5-4 displaying 4-2
kilometers 5-4 ZDA sentence B-43
nautical miles 5-4 UTM
United Kingdom definition Glossary-7
Scorpio Option 1-4 parameter setting 9-22
UNITS field 9-7
Universal Traverse Mercator
V
parameter setting 9-22 Variance Sense field B-14
POSITION DISPLAY field 9-22 VDOP
Unlighted Buoy icon definition Glossary-7
ROUTE screen 7-9 field 8-9
WAYPOINT screen 6-6 influence on accuracy 1-10
update notes xxviii VDR output sentence B-38
upgrade agreement Velocity Made Good
firmware 1-4 definition Glossary-8
Use as Route softkey 7-5 field
user datum NAV1 screen 5-10

Index
VERSION field 8-9 records B-71

Vertical Dilution of Precision overview 6-1
definition Glossary-7 search B-74
VHW input sentence B-15 MOB 5-15
video mode mode 9-20
normal 4-2 name 5-14
reverse 4-2 overview 6-1
VMG PLOT screen 5-7
definition Glossary-8 record
field creating 6-9
NAV1 screen 5-10 editing 6-10
option manual entry 7-7
SETUP/USER/USER 1, 2 maximum number B-71
and 3 screens 9-43 naming 7-8
SETUP/USER/USER 1, 2, number B-61, B-65
and 3 screens 9-44 retrieving 6-8
VTG output sentence B-38, B-39 saving to SCR 6-11, 10-6
storage 5-14
type B-65
W WAYPOINT ALARM field 9-29
warning messages 3-14 Waypoint Closure Velocity
warnings xxx sentence B-40
warranty Waypoint Configuration
extended 1-4 Acknowledgment sentence B-62
WATCH ALARM field 9-26 Waypoint Configuration Command
wavelength carrier-phase sentence B-63
measurements 1-3 Waypoint Library Status Query
waypoint sentence B-70
Bell 5-7 Waypoint Library Status Report
definition 6-1 sentence B-71
depicted 5-7 Waypoint Location sentence B-41
emergency 5-15 Waypoint Query sentence B-64
Hazard 5-7 Waypoint Report sentence B-65
icons 6-6 WAYPOINT screen
label B-65 elements of 6-3
library 4-6, 6-3 fields 6-3
number of blank hierarchy 6-2

Index
menus 6-3 option

overview 6-1 SETUP/USER/USER 1, 2
query fields 6-4 and 3 screens 9-43
Waypoint Search Report sentence B-74 output sentence B-42
Waypoint Search sentence B-75 XTE ALARM field 9-29
Waypt key 3-5 XTE Lines softkey 5-7
WB FFT message 8-23
WCV output sentence B-40
WER Glossary-8 Y
WGS-72 datum 9-14 Y AXIS/DELTA field
WGS-84 datum seven parameter datum 9-17, 9-67
definition Glossary-8 three parameter datum 9-16, 9-66
SETUP/GPS/DATUM Y AXIS/ROTATION field 9-17, 9-67
screen 9-14
Word Error Rate Glossary-8
World Wide Web (WWW) site xxviii Z
WPL output sentence B-41
WPT SWITCHING field 7-13, 9-20 Z AXIS/DELTA field
Wpts softkey 5-7 seven parameter datum 9-17, 9-67
WRITEPROT field 9-39 three parameter datum 9-16, 9-66
www.trimble.com xxviii Z AXIS/ROTATION field 9-17, 9-67
www.trimble.com/support/ ZDA output sentence B-43
support.htm xxviii example B-1
structure B-2
ZLZ output sentence B-44
X
X AXIS/DELTA field
seven parameter datum 9-17, 9-67
three parameter datum 9-16, 9-66
X AXIS/ROTATION field 9-17, 9-67
XTE
bar 4-5
Cross-Track Error lines 5-3
field
NAV1 screen 5-10
lines 5-3

Reader Comment Form
NT300D Operation Manual March 1999
P/N: 81705-00 Revision B
We appreciate your comments and suggestions for improving this publication.

Contributors of particularly helpful evaluations will receive a thank-you gift.
I use the following Trimble product_________
_______________________________________
for _________________________________________________________________________
_.
Please circle a response for each of the statements below:
1 = Strongly Agree 2 = Agree 3 = Neutral 4 = Disagree 5 = Strongly Disagree
The manual is well organized 1 2 3 4 5
I can find the information I want. 1 2 3 4 5
The information in the manual is accurate. 1 2 3 4 5
I can easily understand the instructions. 1 2 3 4 5
The manual contains enough examples. 1 2 3 4 5
The examples are appropriate and helpful. 1 2 3 4 5
The layout and format are attractive and useful. 1 2 3 4 5
The illustrations are clear and helpful. 1 2 3 4 5
The manual is: too long just right too short
Please answer the following questions:
Which sections do you use the most? _______
_______________________________________
What do you like best about the manual? ___________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________
What do you like least about the manual? ____
_______________________________________
_____________________________________
_______________________________________
Optional
Name ________________________________
_______________________________________
Company _____________________________
_______________________________________
Address_______________________________
_______________________________________
_____________________________________
_______________________________________
Telephone _____________________________ Fax
____________________________________
Please mail to the local office listed on the back cover or, to Trimble Navigation
Limited, 645 North Mary Avenue, Post Office Box 3642, Sunnyvale, CA 94088-
3642. All comments and suggestions become the property of Trimble
Navigation Limited.

nt300d PDF

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

nt300d PDF

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

NT300D

Part Number: 81705-00

Trimble Navigation Limited

+1-800-827-8000 in North America

Trimble Navigation Singapore PTE Limited

Trimble Japan K.K.

Trimble Navigation New Zealand Limited

Hardware Limited Warranty

NT300D Operation Manual v

1.5.4 Beacon Digital Signal Processing. . . . . . . . . . . .1-14

vi NT300D Operation Manual

2.8.1 Connecting the Ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34

NT300D Operation Manual vii

3.3.1 Editing Alphanumeric Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11

viii NT300D Operation Manual

5.2.3 PLOT Screen Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-5

NT300D Operation Manual ix

7.4 Editing Route Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-11

x NT300D Operation Manual

9.4 SETUP/GPS Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8

NT300D Operation Manual xi

10 Operating the SCR

11 Operating the Remote Station

xii NT300D Operation Manual

NT300D Operation Manual xiii

xiv NT300D Operation Manual

NT300D Operation Manual xv

Figure 2-23 Smart Card Reader Basic Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37

xvi NT300D Operation Manual

Figure 8-6 STATUS/DGPS/CORRECTIONS Screen . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12

NT300D Operation Manual xvii

Figure 9-20 SETUP/SCR/DIR Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41

xviii NT300D Operation Manual

NT300D Operation Manual xix

Table 8-3 Message on bottom lines of STATUS screen . . . . . . . . . 8-5

xx NT300D Operation Manual

Table 9-20 SETUP/TRACK Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48

NT300D Operation Manual xxi

Table B-14 BWR Sentence Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-23

xxii NT300D Operation Manual

Table B-43 PTNLA,ERTL Sentence Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-58

NT300D Operation Manual xxiii

xxiv NT300D Operation Manual

NT300D Operation Manual xxv

Scope and Audience

xxvi NT300D Operation Manual

• Chapter 5, Navigation Screens, shows you how to use the

NT300D Operation Manual xxvii

World Wide Web (WWW) Site

File Transfer Protocol (FTP) Site

xxviii NT300D Operation Manual

Reader Comment Form

NT300D Operation Manual xxix

Notes, Cautions, and Warnings

* Note – Notes give additional significant information about the subject

I Caution – Cautions alert you to situations that could cause hardware

M Warning – Warnings alert you to situations that could cause

xxx NT300D Operation Manual

Figure 1-1 NT300D Receiver

NT300D Operation Manual 1-1

1-2 NT300D Operation Manual

The NT300D communicates using both standard NMEA-0183

1.1 Standard Features